WR426F (2000) - Motorcycle YAMAHA - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL WR426F (2000) YAMAHA

OWNER'S SERVICE MANUAL

MANUEL D'ATELIER DU

PROPRIETAIRE

FAHRER- UND

WARTUNGS-HANDBUCH

MANUAL DE SERVCIO

DEL PROPIETARIO

WR426F(N)

WR400F(N)

5NG-28199-30

EC010010

WR426F(N)/WR400F(N)

OWNER'S SERVICE MANUAL

©2000 by Yamaha Motor Co., Ltd.

1st Edition, September 2000

All rights reserved.

Any reprinting or unauthorized use

without the written permission of

Yamaha Motor Co., Ltd.

is expressly prohibited.

Printed in Japan

WR426F(N)/WR400F(N)

MANUEL D'ATELIER DU PROPRIETAIRE

2000 Yamaha Motor Co., Ltd.

© 2000 Yamaha Motor Co., Ltd.

Congratulations on your purchase of a Yamaha WR series. This model is the culmination of Yamaha's vast experience in the production of pacesetting racing machines. It represents the highest grade of craftsmanship and reliability that have made Yamaha a leader.

This manual explains operation, inspection, basic maintenance and tuning of your machine. If you have any questions about this manual or your machine, please contact your Yamaha dealer.

NOTE:

As improvements are made on this model, some data in this manual may become outdated. If you have any questions, please consult your Yamaha dealer.

WARNING

PLEASE READ THIS MANUAL CAREFULLY AND COMPLETELY BEFORE OPERATING THIS MACHINE. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OPERATE THIS MACHINE UNTIL YOU HAVE ATTAINED A SATISFACTORY KNOWLEDGE OF ITS CONTROLS AND OPERATING FEATURES AND UNTIL YOU HAVE BEEN TRAINED IN SAFE AND PROPER RIDING TECHNIQUES. REGULAR INSPECTIONS AND CAREFUL MAINTENANCE, ALONG WITH GOOD RIDING SKILLS, WILL ENSURE THAT YOU SAFETY ENJOY THE CAPABILITIES AND THE RELIABILITY OF THIS MACHINE.

INTRODUCTION

THIS MACHINE IS DESIGNED STRICTLY FOR COMPETITION USE, ONLY ON A CLOSED COURSE. It is illegal for this machine to be operated on any public street, road, or highway. Off-road use on public lands may also be illegal. Please check local regulations before riding.

SAFETY INFORMATION

1. THIS MACHINE IS TO BE OPERATED BY AN EXPERIENCED RIDER ONLY.
   Do not attempt to operate this machine at maximum power until you are totally familiar with its characteristics.

2. THIS MACHINE IS DESIGNED TO BE RIDDEN BY THE OPERATOR ONLY.
   Do not carry passengers on this machine.

3. ALWAYS WEAR PROTECTIVE APPAREL.

When operating this machine, always wear an approved helmet with goggles or a face shield. Also wear heavy boots, gloves, and protective clothing. Always wear proper fitting clothing that will not be caught in any of the moving parts or controls of the machine.

1. ALWAYS MAINTAIN YOUR MACHINE IN PROPER WORKING ORDER.

For safety and reliability, the machine must be properly maintained. Always perform the pre-operation checks indicated in this manual. Correcting a mechanical problem before you ride may prevent an accident.

NOTICE IMPORTANTE

Always turn off the engine while refueling. Take care to not spill any gasoline on the engine or exhaust system. Never refuel in the vicinity of an open flame, or while smoking.

1. GASOLINE CAN CAUSE INJURY.

If you should swallow some gasoline, inhale excess gasoline vapors, or allow any gasoline to get into your eyes, contact a doctor immediately. If any gasoline spills onto your skin or clothing, immediately wash skin areas with soap and water, and change your clothes.

1. ONLY OPERATE THE MACHINE IN AN AREA WITH ADEQUATE VENTILA-TION.

Never start the engine or let it run for any length of time in an enclosed area. Exhaust fumes are poisonous. These fumes contain carbon monoxide, which by itself is odorless and colorless. Carbon monoxide is a dangerous gas which can cause unconsciousness or can be lethal.

1. PARK THE MACHINE CAREFULLY; TURN OFF THE ENGINE.

Always turn off the engine if you are going to leave the machine. Do not park the machine on a slope or soft ground as it may fall over.

1. THE ENGINE EXHAUST PIPE, MUFFLER, AND OIL TANK WILL BE VERY HOT AFTER THE ENGINE HAS BEEN RUN.

Be careful not to touch them or to allow any clothing item to contact them during inspection or repair.

10.PROPERLY SECURE THE MACHINE BEFORE TRANSPORTING IT.

When transporting the machine in another vehicle, always be sure it is properly secured and in an upright position and that the fuel cock is in the “OFF” position. Otherwise, fuel may leak out of the carburetor or fuel tank.

1. L'ESSENCE EST HAUTE-MENT INFLAMMABLE.

This manual will provide you with a good basic understanding of features, operation, and basic maintenance and inspection items of this machine. Please read this manual carefully and completely before operating your new machine. If you have any questions regarding the operation or maintenance of your machine, please consult your Yamaha dealer.

NOTE:

This manual should be considered a permanent part of this machine and should remain with it even if the machine is subsequently sold.

EC060000

NOTICE

Some data in this manual may become outdated due to improvements made to this model in the future. If there is any question you have regarding this manual or your machine, please consult your Yamaha dealer.

EC070001

F.I.M. MACHINE WEIGHTS:

Weights of machines without fuel

The minimum weights for motocross machines are:

for the class 125 cc...... minimum 88 kg (194 lb)

for the class 250 cc...... minimum 98 kg (216 lb)

for the class 500 cc...... minimum 102 kg (225 lb)

In modifying your machine (e.g., for weight reduction), take note of the above limits of weight.

AU NOUVEAU PROPRIETAIRE

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

EC081000

PARTICULARLY IMPORTANT INFORMATION

The Safety Alert Symbol means ATTENTION! BECOME ALERT! YOUR SAFETY IS INVOLVED!

WARNING

Failure to follow WARNING instructions could result in severe injury or death to the machine operator, a bystander, or a person inspecting or repairing the machine.

CAUTION:

A CAUTION indicates special precautions that must be taken to avoid damage to the machine.

NOTE:

A NOTE provides key information to make procedures easier or clearer.

Line drawing showing hands holding a closed notebook with numbered pages, illustrating the open format.

EC082000

FINDING THE REQUIRED PAGE

1. This manual consists of seven chapters; "General Information", "Specifications", "Regular inspection and adjustments", "Engine", "Chassis", "Electrical" and "Tuning".

2. The table of contents is at the beginning of the manual. Look over the general layout of the book before finding then required chapter and item.

Bend the book at its edge, as shown, to find the required fore edge symbol mark and go to a page for required item and description.

COMMENT UTILISER CE MANUEL

INFORMATIONS PARTICULIEREMENT IMPOR-TANTES

All of the procedures in this manual are organized in a sequential, step-by-step format. The information has been complied to provide the mechanic with an easy to read, handy reference that contains comprehensive explanations of all disassembly, repair, assembly, and inspection operations.

In this revised format, the condition of a faulty component will precede an arrow symbol and the course of action required will follow the symbol, e.g.,

- Bearings

Pitting/damage → Replace.

EC084002

HOW TO READ DESCRIPTIONS

To help identify parts and clarify procedure steps, there are exploded diagrams at the start of each removal and disassembly section.

1. An easy-to-see exploded diagram ① is provided for removal and disassembly jobs.
2. Numbers ② are given in the order of the jobs in the exploded diagram. A number that is enclosed by a circle indicates a disassembly step.
3. An explanation of jobs and notes is presented in an easy-to-read way by the use of symbol marks ③. The meanings of the symbol marks are given on the next page.
4. A job instruction chart ④ accompanies the exploded diagram, providing the order of jobs, names of parts, notes in jobs, etc.
5. Extent of removal ⑤ is provided in the job instruction chart to save the trouble of an unnecessary removal job.
6. For jobs requiring more information, the step-by-step format supplements ⑥ are given in addition to the exploded diagram and job instruction chart.

CLUTCH CLUTCH ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑩ ⑪ ⑫ ⑬ ⑭ ⑮ ⑯ ⑰ ⑱ ⑲ ⑳ ⑴ ⑵ ⑶ ⑷ ⑸ ⑹ ⑺ ⑳ ⑪ ⑫ ⑬ ⑭ ⑮ ⑯ ⑰ ⑱ ⑲ ⑳ ㉑ ㉒ ㉓ ㉔ ㉕ ㉖ ㉗ ㉘ ㉙ ㉚ ㉛ ㉜ ㉝ ㉞ ㉟ ㉳ ㉟ ㉟' Insert removal: ● Push rod and push lever removal ● Push pod 1 disassembly ● Clutch housing removal Order: Place name: Q'ty: Remarks: Preparation for removal: CLUTCH REMOVAL: Drain the engine oil. Brake pedal: Clutch cable: 1: Clutch cover: 2: Basket: 3: Dowel pin: 4: Clutch spring: 5: Pressure plate: 6: Push rod 1: 7: Group: 8: Plain washer: 9: Bearing: 10: Ball: 11: Push rod 2: Refer to "ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT" section in the CHAPTER 3. Refer to "ENGINE REMOVAL" section. Disconnect at engine side.

4-45

CLUTCH ENG ECN00034 REMOVAL POINTS ECN00034 Clutch boss 1. Remove: • Nut ① • Lock washer ② • Clutch boss ③ NOTE: _ Straighten the lock washer tab and use the clutch holding tool ④ to hold the clutch boss. Clutch holding tool: YM-91042/90890-04086 A For USA and CDN B Except for USA and CON SCN00035 INSPECTION ECN00035 Clutch housing and boss 1. Inspect: • Clutch housing ① Cracks/wear/damage → Replace. • Clutch boss ② Scoring/wear/damage → Replace. SCN00036 Primary driven gear 1. Check: • Circumferential play Free play exists → Replace. • Gear teeth ⑧ Wear/damage → Replace. SCN00037 Clutch spring 1. Measure: • Clutch spring free length ⑨ Out of specification → Replace springs as a set. Clutch spring free length: Standard 50 mm (1.97 in) 49 mm (1.93 in)

4-47

Extent of removal	Order	Part name	Q'ty	Remarks
Preparation for removal		CLUTCH REMOVAL Drain the engine oil. Brake pedal Clutch cable		Refer to "ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT" section in the CHAPTER 3. Refer to "ENGINE REMOVAL" section. Disconnect at engine side.
	1	Clutch cover	1
	2	Basket	1
	3	Dowel pin	2
	4	Clutch spring	5
	5	Pressure plate	1
	6	Push rod 1	1
	7	Gridp	1
	8	Plain washer	1
	9	Bearing	1
	10	Ball	1
	11	Push rod 2	1

FORMAT DU MANUEL

ILLUSTRATED SYMBOLS (Refer to the illustration)

Illustrated symbols ① to ⑦ are designed as thumb tabs to indicate the chapter's number and content.

① General information
② Specifications
③ Regular inspection and adjustments
④ Engine
⑤ Chassis
⑥ Electrical
⑦ Tuning

Illustrated symbols ⑧ to ⑭ are used to identify the specifications appearing in the text.

⑧ With engine mounted
⑨ Special tool
⑩ Filling fluid
⑪ Lubricant
⑫ Tightening
⑬ Specified value, Service limit
⑭ Resistance (Ω), Voltage (V), Electric current (A)

Illustrated symbols ⑮ to ⑱ in the exploded diagrams indicate grade of lubricant and location of lubrication point.

⑮ Apply engine oil
⑯ Apply molybdenum disulfide oil
⑰ Apply lightweight lithium-soap base grease
⑱ Apply molybdenum disulfide grease

Illustrated symbols ⑲ to ⑳ in the exploded diagrams indicate where to apply a locking agent and where to install new parts.

⑲ Apply locking agent (LOCTITE)
⑳ Use new one

SYMBOLES GRAPHIQUES (Voir l'illustration)

CHECKING OF CONNECTION 1-6

SPECIAL TOOLS 1-7

CONTROL FUNCTIONS 1-10

FUEL 1-13

STARTING AND BREAK-IN 1-14

TORQUE-CHECK POINTS 1-18

CLEANING AND STORAGE 1-19

CHAPTER 2

SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

(WR426F) 2-1

MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS

(WR426F) 2-4

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

(WR400F) 2-18

MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS

(WR400F) 2-21

GENERAL TORQUE

SPECIFICATIONS 2-35

DEFINITION OF UNITS 2-35

LUBRICATION DIAGRAMS 2-36

CABLE ROUTING DIAGRAM 2-38

TABLES DES MATIERES

CHAPITRE 1 RENSEIGNEMENTS GENERAUX

DESCRIPTION 1-1

IDENTIFICATION DE LA

MACHINE 1-2

INFORMATIONS

IMPORTANTES 1-3

VERIFICATION DES

CONNEXIONS 1-6

OUTILS SPECIAUX ....1-7

FONCTIONS DES

COMMANDES 1-10

ESSENCE 1-13

MISE EN MARCHE

ET RODAGE 1-14

POINTS DE VERIFICATION DE

COUPLE DE SERRAGE....1-18

NETTOYAGE

ET RANGEMENT 1-19

INHALT

GENERALES (WR426F)....2-1

CARACTERISTIQUES

D'ENTRETIEN (WR426F) .....2-4

CARACTERISTIQUES

GENERALES (WR400F) ......2-18

CARACTERISTIQUES

D'ENTRETIEN (WR400F) .....2-21

CARACTERISTIQUES

GENERALES DE COUPLE .....2-35

DEFINITION DES UNITES .....2-35

SCHEMAS DE GRAISSAGE .....2-36

CHEMINEMENT

DES CABLES 2-38

CYLINDER AND PISTON 4-41

CLUTCH (WR426F) 4-48

CLUTCH (WR400F) 4-55

OIL FILTER, WATER PUMP

AND CRANKCASE COVER (RIGHT) .... 4-62

BALANCER 4-69

OIL PUMP 4-72

KICK AXLE AND SHIFT SHAFT 4-76

CDI MAGNETO 4-83

ENGINE REMOVAL 4-87

CRANKCASE AND CRANKSHAFT ..... 4-92

TRANSMISSION, SHIFT CAM

AND SHIFT FORK 4-101

CHAPITRE 3 CONTROLES ET RE- GLAGES COURANTS

PROGRAMME D'ENTRETIEN ..3-1

CONTROLE ET ENTRETIEN

AVANT UTILISATION ....3-4

MOTEUR 3-5

PARTIE CYCLE 3-26

PARTIE ELECTRIQUE ....3-47

EMBRAYAGE (WR426F) .....4-48

EMBRAYAGE (WR400F) .....4-55

FILTRE A HUILE, POMPE

A EAU ET COUVERCLE

DE CARTER (DROIT) ......4-62

BALANCIER 4-69

POMPE A HUILE 4-72

AXE DE DEMARREUR

AU PIED ET ARBRE DE

SELECTEUR 4-76

MAGNETO CDI 4-83

DEPOSE DU MOTEUR .....4-87

CARTER ET VILEBREQUIN ....4-92

BOITE A VITESSES,

TAMBOUR ET

FOURCHETTE DE

SELECTION 4-101

KAPITEL 4 MOTOR

SITZBANK, KRAFTSTOFFTANK

BUSTIBLE Y CUBIERTAS

LATERALES 4-1

TUBO DE ESCAPE Y

SILENCIADOR 4-2

RADIADOR 4-4

CARBURADOR 4-8

ÁRBOLES DE LEVAS ......4-21

CULATA 4-28

VÁLVULAS Y MUELLES

DE VÁLVULA 4-32

EMBRAGUE (WR426F)......4-48

EMBRAGUE (WR400F)......4-55

FILTRO DE ACEITE, BOMBA DE

AGUA Y CUBIERTA

DEL CÁRTER (DERECHO) .....4-62

COMPENSADOR 4-69

BOMBA DE ACEITE ....4-72

EJE DEL PEDAL Y EJE

FOURCHE AVANT ....5-28

GUIDON 5-41

DIRECTION 5-46

BRAS OSCILLANT ....5-52

AMORTISSEUR ARRIERE .....5-59

KAPITEL 5 FAHRWERK

VORDER- UND HINTERRAD ....5-1

VORDER- UND

HINTERRADBREMSE ....5-11

TELESKOPGABEL 5-28

LENKER 5-41

LENKKOPF 5-46

SCHWINGE 5-52

FEDERBEIN 5-59

CABÍTULO 5 CHASIS

RUEDA DELANTERA Y

RUEDA TRASERA 5-1

FRENO DELANTERO Y

FRENO TRASERO 5-11

D'ACCELERATION)....6-7

SYSTEME D'ECLAIRAGE .....6-11

TPS-SYSTEM (DROSSELKLAP-

PEN-POSITIONSSENSOR) .....6-7

LICHTANLAGE 6-11

CABÍTULO 6 SISTEMA ELÉCTRICO

CHAPITRE 7 MISES AU POINT

MOTEUR 7-1

PARTIE CYCLE 7-11

① Clutch lever
② Decompression lever
③ "ENGINE STOP" button
④ Trip meter
⑤ Lights switch
⑥ Front brake lever
⑦ Throttle grip
⑧ Radiator cap
⑨ Fuel tank cap
⑩ Oil filler plug/dipstick
⑪ Tail light
⑫ Kick starter
⑬ Fuel tank
⑭ Headlight
⑮ Radiator
⑯ Coolant drain bolt
⑰ Rear brake pedal
⑱ Valve joint
⑲ Fuel cock
⑳ Cold starter knob
②1 Hot starter knob (red)
② Air cleaner
②3 Drive chain
⑳ Shift pedal
⑳ Front fork

NOTE:

• The machine you have purchased may differ slightly from those shown in the following.
• Designs and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components for identification

Technical diagram of a DHTR motorcycle with numbered parts for identification

Technical diagram of a motorcycle with numbered parts for identification

RENSEIGNEMENTS

GENERAUX

DESCRIPTION

There are two significant reasons for knowing the serial number of your machine:

1. When ordering parts, you can give the number to your Yamaha dealer for positive identification of the model you own.

2. If your machine is stolen, the authorities will need the number to search for and identify your machine.

EC121001

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The vehicle identification number ① is stamped on the right of the steering head pipe.

Technical diagram of a vehicle engine assembly with labeled parts ① and ②

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with labeled component (1), no readable text or symbols present

EC123001

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The engine serial number ① is stamped into the elevated part of the right-side of the engine.

EC124000

MODEL LABEL

The model label ① is affixed to the frame under the rider's seat. This information will be needed to order spare parts.

IDENTIFICATION DE LA MACHINE

Cartoon illustration of a person washing a motorcycle with buckets nearby (no text or symbols)

Technical line drawing of a robotic hand and robotic arm with mechanical components (no text or symbols)

Cartoon illustration of a mechanic working on a motorcycle with tools (no text or symbols)

Cartoon illustration of a person using a power tool (no text or symbols present)

Cartoon illustration of a man sitting on the floor surrounded by stacks of coins and a question mark above his head (no text or symbols)

EC130000 IMPORTANT INFORMATION

EC131010 PREPARATION FOR REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY

1. Remove all dirt, mud, dust, and foreign material before removal and disassembly.

When washing the machine with high pressured water, cover the parts as follows.

• Silencer end
  • Air filter intake hole
  • Carburetor accelerator pump

• Use proper tools and cleaning equipment. Refer to "SPECIAL TOOLS" section.

• When disassembling the machine, keep mated parts together. They include gears, cylinders, pistons, and other mated parts that have been "mated" through normal wear. Mated parts must be reused as an assembly or replaced.
• During the machine disassembly, clean all parts and place them in trays in the order of disassembly. This will speed up assembly time and help assure that all parts are correctly reinstalled.
• Keep away from fire.

INFORMATIONS IMPOR- TANTES PREPARATION POUR LA DEPOSE ET DEMONTAGE

ALL REPLACEMENT PARTS

1. We recommend to use Yamaha genuine parts for all replacements. Use oil and/or grease recommended by Yamaha for assembly and adjustment.

EC133000

GASKETS, OIL SEALS AND O-RINGS

1. All gaskets, oil seals, and O-rings should be replaced when an engine is overhauled. All gasket surfaces, oil seal lips, and O-rings must be cleaned.

2. Properly oil all mating parts and bearings during reassembly. Apply grease to the oil seal lips.

Technical diagram showing two bolted components with a numbered connection point labeled '1'

Technical diagram of a mechanical valve assembly with labeled component ①

Technical mechanical diagram showing a cross-sectional view of a bearing assembly with labeled component ② and directional arrow.

EC134000

LOCK WASHERS/PLATES AND COTTER PINS

1. All lock washers/plates ① and cotter pins must be replaced when they are removed. Lock tab(s) should be bent along the bolt or nut flat(s) after the bolt or nut has been properly tightened.

EC135001

BEARINGS AND OIL SEALS

1. Install the bearing(s) ① and oil seal(s) ② with their manufacturer's marks or numbers facing outward. (In other words, the stamped letters must be on the side exposed to view.) When installing oil seal(s), apply a light coating of lightweight lithium base grease to the seal lip(s). Oil the bearings liberally when installing.

CAUTION:

Do not use compressed air to spin the bearings dry. This causes damage to the bearing surfaces.

PIECES DE RECHANGE

Technical diagram showing a mechanical or structural component with numbered parts and directional arrow indicating flow or movement.

EC136000

CIRCLIPS

1. All circlips should be inspected carefully before reassembly. Always replace piston pin clips after one use. Replace distorted circlips. When installing a circlip ①, make sure that the sharp-edged corner ② is positioned opposite to the thrust ③ it receives. See the sectional view.

④ Shaft

CIRCLIPS

Two-panel line drawing showing hands performing a manual tool manipulation (no text or symbols)

Technical diagram showing two-step assembly steps for a mechanical component, with labeled parts and directional arrow.

Pure electrical circuit lines without any symbols

Pure electrical circuit lines without any symbols

EC1C0001 CHECKING OF CONNECTION

Dealing with stains, rust, moisture, etc. on the connector.

1. Disconnect: • Connector

2. Dry each terminal with an air blower.

3. Connect and disconnect the connector two or three times.

4. Pull the lead to check that it will not come off.

5. If the terminal comes off, bend up the pin ① and reinsert the terminal into the connector.

6. Connect: • Connector

NOTE: ____ The two connectors "click" together.

1. Check for continuity with a tester.

NOTE:

• If there in no continuity, clean the terminals.
- Be sure to perform the steps 1 to 7 listed above when checking the wireharness.
- For a field remedy, use a contact revitalizer available on the market.
• Use the tester on the connector as shown.

VERIFICATION DES CONNEXIONS

The proper special tools are necessary for complete and accurate tune-up and assembly. Using the correct special tool will help prevent damage caused by the use of improper tools or improvised techniques. The shape and part number used for the special tool differ by country, so two types are provided. Refer to the list provided to avoid errors when placing an order.

NOTE:

• For U.S.A. and Canada, use part number starting with "YM-" or "YU-".
• For others, use part number starting with "90890-".

Part number Tool	name/How to use Illustration
YU-1135-A, 90890-01135 Cr	rankcase separating toolThese tool is used to remove the crankshaft from either case.	YU-1135-A 90890-01135
YU-1235, 90890-01235 Rotor	holding toolThis tool is used when loosening or tightening the fly-wheel magneto securing nut.	YU-1235 90890-01235
YU-3097, 90890-01252 YU-1256	Dial gauge and standStandThese tools are used to check each part for runout or bend.	YU-3097YU-125	90890-01252
YU-90050, 90890-01274 YU-90050, 90890-01275 YU-91044, 90890-04081 YM-1277, 90890-01277	Crankcase installing toolPotBoltSpacerAdapterThese tools are used to install the crankshaft.	YU-90050YM-1277YU-	90890-0127490890-0127790890-90890-
YU-1304, 90890-01304 Piston	pin pullerThis tool is used to remove the piston pin.	YU-1304 90890-01304
YU-24460-01, 90890-01325 YU-33984, 90890-01352	Radiator cap testerAdapterThese tools are used for checking the cooling system.	YU-24460-01YU-33984	90890-0132590890-01352
YU-33270-B, 90890-01362	Flywheel pullerThis tool is used to remove the flywheel magneto.	YM-33270-B 90890-01362
YU-33975, 90890-01403 Ring nut wrenchThis tool is used when tighten the steering ring nut to specification.		YU-33975 90890-01403
YM-1423, 90890-01423 Damper rod holderUse this tool to remove and install the damper rod.		YM-1423 90890-01423
YM-01442, 90890-01442 Fork seal driverThis tool is used when install the fork oil seal.		YM-01442 90890-01442
YU-3112-C, 90890-03112 Pocket testerUse this tool to inspect the coil resistance, output voltage and amperage.		YU-3112-C 90890-03112
YU-08036-B 90890-03113	Inductive tachometerEngine tachometerThis tool is needed for observing engine rpm.	YU-08036-B 90890-03113
YM-33277-A, 90890-03141 Timing lightThis tool is necessary for checking ignition timing.		YM-33277-A 90890-03141
YM-04019, 90890-04019 Valve spring compressorThis tool is needed to remove and install the valve assemblies.		YM-04019 90890-04019
YM-91042, 90890-04086 Clutch holding toolThis tool is used to hold the clutch when removing or installing the clutch boss securing nut.		YM-91042 90890-04086
YM-4116, 90890-04116 YM-4097, 90890-04097	Valve guide removerIntake (4.5 mm)Exhaust (5.0 mm)This tool is needed to remove and install the valve guide.	YM-4116YM-4097	90890-0411690890-04097
YM-4117, 90890-04117YM-4098, 90890-04098	Valve guide installerIntakeExhaustThis tool is needed to install the valve guide.	YM-4117YM-4C	90890-0411790890-(
YM-4118, 90890-04118YM-4099, 90890-04099	Valve guide reamerIntake (4.5 mm)Exhaust (5.0 mm)This tool is needed to rebore the new valve guide.	YM-4118\K464	90890-041189
YM-3448790890-06754	Dynamic spark testerIgnition checkerThis instrument is necessary for checking the ignition system components.	YM-34487 90890-06754
ACC-QUICK-GS-KT90890-85505	Quick gasketYAMAHA Bond No. 1215This sealant (Bond) is used for crankcase mating surface, etc.	ACC-QUICK-GS-KT 90890-85505

OUTILS SPECIAUX

Technical line drawing of a mechanical clamp or grip assembly with no visible text or symbols

Technical line drawing of a mechanical device with labeled parts (no text or symbols present)

5 4 3 2 N 1

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled component ①

EC150000

CONTROL FUNCTIONS

EC151000

"ENGINE STOP" BUTTON

The "ENGINE STOP" button ① is located on the left handlebar. Continue pushing the "ENGINE STOP" button till the engine comes to a stop.

EC152000

CLUTCH LEVER

The clutch lever ① is located on the left handlebar; it disengages or engages the clutch. Pull the clutch lever to the handlebar to disengage the clutch, and release the lever to engage the clutch. The lever should be pulled rapidly and released slowly for smooth starts.

EC153000

SHIFT PEDAL

The gear ratios of the constant-mesh 5 speed transmission are ideally spaced. The gears can be shifted by using the shift pedal ① on the left side of the engine.

EC154000

KICK STARTER

Rotate the kick starter ① away from the engine. Push the starter down lightly with your foot until the gears engage, then kick smoothly and forcefully to start the engine. This model has a primary kick starter so the engine can be started in any gear if the clutch is disengaged. In normal practices, however, shift to neutral before starting.

FONCTIONS DES COMMANDES

BOUTON D'ARRET DE MOTEUR "ENGINE STOP"

Technical line drawing of a mechanical clamp or grip assembly (no text or symbols)

DECOMPRESSION LEVER

CAUTION:

Never use the decompression lever after the engine is started. The engine may be damaged if you use the decompression lever while it is running.

The decompression lever ① is located on the left handlebar and is used when starting the engine. Squeezing the decompression lever presses down on the exhaust valve and releases the pressure in the cylinder head. This enables the vehicle to be kickstarted more easily.

Technical diagram showing a mechanical component with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating motion or flow.

EC155001

THROTTLE GRIP

The throttle grip ① is located on the right handlebar; it accelerates or decelerates the engine. For acceleration, turn the grip toward you; for deceleration, turn it away from you.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with labeled part (1), no readable text or symbols present

EC156000

FRONT BRAKE LEVER

The front brake lever ① is located on the right handlebar. Pull it toward the handlebar to activate the front brake.

YAKARA

EC157000

REAR BRAKE PEDAL

The rear brake pedal ① is located on the right side of the machine. Press down on the brake pedal to activate the rear brake.

LEVIER DE DECOMPRESSION

ATTENTION:

The fuel cock supplies fuel from the tank to carburetor and also filters the fuel. The fuel cock has three positions:

OFF: With the lever in this position fuel will not flow. Always return the lever to this position when the engine is not running.

ON: With the lever in this position fuel flows to the carburetor. Normal riding is done with the lever in this position.

RES: With the lever in this position fuel flows to the carburetor from the reserve section of the fuel tank after the main supply of the fuel has been depleted. Normal riding is possible with the lever is in this position, but it is recommended to add fuel as soon as possible.

Technical diagram of automotive suspension system components with labeled parts and directional arrow indicating motion

COLD STARTER KNOB

When cold, the engine requires a richer air-fuel mixture for starting. A separate starter circuit, which is controlled by the cold starter knob ①, supplies this mixture. Pull the cold starter knob out to open the circuit for starting. When the engine has warmed up, push it in to close the circuit.

Technical line drawing of automotive suspension components (no text or symbols)

HOT STARTER KNOB (red)

The hot starter knob (red) ① is used when starting a warm engine.

Use the hot starter knob when starting the engine again immediately after it was stopped (the engine is still warm). Pulling out the hot starter knob injects secondary air to thin the air-fuel mixture temporarily, allowing the engine to be started more easily.

CAUTION:

After the engine has started, be sure to push the hot starter knob back in.

ROBINET A ESSENCE

Technical line drawing of a mechanical linkage assembly (no text or symbols)

Technical diagram showing a mechanical assembly with labeled components and an inset view of a component with numbered parts.

EC15F000

VALVE JOINT

This valve joint ① prevents fuel from flowing out and is installed to the fuel tank breather hose.

CAUTION:

In this installation, make sure the arrow faces the fuel tank and also downward.

LIGHTS SWITCH

The lights switch ① is located on the handlebar.

FLAP

In order to prevent water from entering the carburetor while the motorcycle is operated in the rain, attach the accessory flap ① to the frame at the rear of the fuel tank.

NOTE:

Riding with the flap attached when it is not raining can help keep out dust, dirt and sand.

FUEL

Always use the recommended fuel as stated below. Also, be sure to use new gasoline the day of a race.

Recommended fuel:

Except for AUS:

Premium unleaded fuel with a research octane number of 95 or higher.

For AUS:

Unleaded fuel only

NOTE:

Except for AUS:

1. If knocking or pinging occurs, use a different brand of gasoline or higher octane grade.

2. If unleaded gasoline is not available, then leaded gasoline can be used.

FONCTIONS DES COMMANDES/ESSENCE ARMATUREN UND DEREN FUNKTION/KRAFTSTOFF FUNCIONES DE CONTROL/COMBUSTIBLE

CLAPET ANTIRETOUR DE TUYAU DE RENIFLARD

Never start or run the engine in a closed area. The exhaust fumes are poisonous; they can cause loss of consciousness and death in a very short time. Always operate the machine in a well-ventilated area.

CAUTION:

• The carburetor on this motorcycle has a built-in accelerator pump. Therefore, when starting the engine, do not operate the throttle or the spark plug will foul.
  ·Unlike a two-stroke engine, this engine cannot be kick started when the throttle is open because the kick starter may kick back. Also, if the throttle is open the air/fuel mixture may be too lean for the engine to start.
• Never use the decompression lever after the engine is started. The engine may be damaged if you use the decompression lever while it is running.
  • Before starting the machine, perform the checks in the pre-operation check list.

STARTING A COLD ENGINE

1. Inspect the coolant level.
2. Turn the fuel cock to "ON".
3. Shift the transmission into neutral.
4. Fully open the cold starter knob.
5. Without pulling in the decompression lever, slowly depress the kick starter until the compression stroke is found. When considerable resistance of the kick starter is felt, the engine is on the compression stroke. If the engine is on the exhaust stroke, resistance will only be felt when the kick starter is initially depressed, not through the entire range of depression (as when the engine is on the compression stroke); therefore, depress the kick starter a few more times.

Do not open the throttle while kicking the kick starter. Otherwise, the kick starter may kick back.

1. Return the cold starter knob to its original position and run the engine at 3,000 \~ 5,000 r/min for 1 or 2 minutes.

NOTE: ____

Since this model is equipped with an accelerator pump, if the engine is raced (the throttle opened and closed), the air/fuel mixture will be too rich and the engine may stall. Also unlike a two-stroke engine, this model can idle.

CAUTION:

Do not warm up the engine for extended periods of time.

Do not operate the cold starter knob and throttle. Open the hot starter knob (red) and start the engine by kicking the kick starter forcefully with a firm stroke.

As soon as the engine starts, push in the hot starter knob to close the air passage.

Restarting an engine after a fall

Pull the hot starter knob (red) and start the engine. As soon as the engine starts, push in the hot starter knob to close the air passage.

The engine fails to start

Pull the hot starter knob (red) all the way out, pull the decompression lever to the handlebar, and while holding the lever, kick the kickstarter 10 to 20 times to clear the engine.

Then, restart the engine.

Refer to "Restarting an engine after a fall".

		Throttle grip operation*	Cold starter knob	Hot starter knob (red)
Starting a cold engine	Air temperature = less than 5 °C (41 °F)	Open 3 or 4 times	ON OFF
	Air temperature = more than 5 °C (41 °F)	None ON	OFF
	Air temperature (normal temperature) = between 5 °C (41 °F) and 25 °C (77 °F)	None ON	N/OFF OFF
	Air temperature = more than 25 °C (77 °F)	None OFF	OFF
Starting an engine after a long period of time		None ON	OFF
Restarting a warm engine None		OFF ON
Restarting an engine after a fall		None OFF	ON

* Operate the throttle grip before kick starting.

CAUTION:

Observe the following break-in procedures during initial operation to ensure optimum performance and avoid engine damage.

MISE EN MARCHE D'UN MOTEUR CHAUD

1. Before starting the engine, fill the fuel tank with the fuel.
2. Perform the pre-operation checks on the machine.
3. Start and warm up the engine. Check the idle speed, and check the operation of the controls and the "ENGINE STOP" button. Then, restart the engine and check its operation within no more than 5 minutes after it is restarted.
4. Operate the machine in the lower gears at moderate throttle openings for five to eight minutes.
5. Check how the engine runs when the motorcycle is ridden with the throttle 1/4 to 1/2 open (low to medium speed) for about one hour.
6. Restart the engine and check the operation of the machine throughout its entire operating range. Restart the machine and operate it for about 10 to 15 more minutes. The machine will now be ready to race.

CAUTION:

- After the break-in or before each race, you must check the entire machine for loose fittings and fasteners as per "TORQUE-CHECK POINTS".

Tighten all such fasteners as required.

- When any of the following parts have been replaced, they must be broken in. CYLINDER AND CRANKSHAFT:

About one hour of break-in operation is necessary.

PISTON, RING, VALVES, CAMSHAFTS AND GEARS:

These parts require about 30 minutes of break-in operation at half-throttle or less. Observe the condition of the engine carefully during operation.

PROCEDURE DE RODAGE

Frame construction ———— Frame to rear frame ——— Combined seat and tank ———— Fuel tank to frame

Exhaust system Silencer to rear frame

Engine mounting ____ Frame to engine

Steering Steering shaft to handlebar Steering shaft to frame Steering shaft to handle crown Handle crown to handlebar

Suspension Front Steering shaft to front fork Front fork to handle crown Front fork to under bracket Rear For link type Assembly of links Link to frame Link to shock absorber Link to swingarm Rear Installation of shock absorber Shock absorber to frame Rear Installation of swing-arm Tightening of pivot shaft

Wheel Installation of wheel Front Rear Tightening of front axle Tightening of axle holder Tightening of rear axle Wheel to sprocket

Brake Front Caliper to front fork Brake disc to wheel Tightening of union bolt Master cylinder to handlebar Tightening of air bleeder Rear Brake disc to wheel Tightening of union bolt Master cylinder to frame Tightening of air bleeder

Fuel system ____ Fuel tank to fuel cock

NOTE: ____ Concerning the tightening torque, refer to "MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS" section in the CHAPTER 2.

POINTS DE VERIFICATION DE COUPLE DE SERRAGE

CLEANING AND STORAGE

EC1B1000

CLEANING

Frequent cleaning of your machine will enhance its appearance, maintain good overall performance, and extend the life of many components.

1. Before washing the machine, block off the end of the exhaust pipe to prevent water from entering. A plastic bag secured with a rubber band may be used for this purpose.
2. If the engine is excessively greasy, apply some degreaser to it with a paint brush. Do not apply degreaser to the chain, sprockets, or wheel axles.
3. Rinse the dirt and degreaser off with a garden hose; use only enough pressure to do the job.

CAUTION:

Excessive hose pressure may cause water seepage and contamination of wheel bearings, front forks, brakes and transmission seals. Many expensive repair bills have resulted from improper high pressure detergent applications such as those available in coin-operated car washers.

1. After the majority of the dirt has been hosed off, wash all surfaces with warm water and a mild detergent. Use an old toothbrush to clean hard-to-reach places.
2. Rinse the machine off immediately with clean water, and dry all surfaces with a soft towel or cloth.
3. Immediately after washing, remove excess water from the chain with a paper towel and lubricate the chain to prevent rust.
4. Clean the seat with a vinyl upholstery cleaner to keep the cover pliable and glossy.
5. Automotive wax may be applied to all painted or chromed surfaces. Avoid combination cleaner-waxes, as they may contain abrasives.
6. After completing the above, start the engine and allow it to idle for several minutes.

NETTOYAGE ET RANGEMENT

NETTOYAGE

If your machine is to be stored for 60 days or more, some preventive measures must be taken to avoid deterioration. After cleaning the machine thoroughly, prepare it for storage as follows:

1. Drain the fuel tank, fuel lines, and the carburetor float bowl.
2. Remove the spark plug, pour a tablespoon of SAE 10W-30 motor oil in the spark plug hole, and reinstall the plug. With the engine stop switch pushed in, kick the engine over several times to coat the cylinder walls with oil.
3. Remove the drive chain, clean it thoroughly with solvent, and lubricate it. Reinstall the chain or store it in a plastic bag tied to the frame.
4. Lubricate all control cables.
5. Block the frame up to raise the wheels off the ground.
6. Tie a plastic bag over the exhaust pipe outlet to prevent moisture from entering.
7. If the machine is to be stored in a humid or salt-air environment, coat all exposed metal surfaces with a film of light oil. Do not apply oil to rubber parts or the seat cover.

NOTE:

Make any necessary repairs before the machine is stored.

RANGEMENT

Model name: WR426FN (USA)	WR426F (EUROPE)WR426F(N) (CDN, AUS, NZ, ZA)
Model code number: 5NG1 (USA)	5NG2 (EUROPE)5NG4 (CDN, AUS, NZ, ZA)
Dimensions:Overall length 2,171 mm (85.5 in)Overall width 827 mm (32.6 in)Overall height 1,303 mm (51.3 in)Seat height 998 mm (39.3 in)Wheelbase 1,490 mm (58.7 in)Minimum ground clearance 373 mm (14.7 in)
Basic weight:With oil and full fuel tank 121.5 kg (268 lb)
Engine:Engine type Liquid cooled 4-stroke, DOHCCylinder arrangement Single cylinder, forward Displacement 426 cmBore · stroke 95.0Compression ratio 12.5 : 1Starting system	inclined ^3 (15.0 Imp oz, 14.4 US oz)· 60.1 mm (3.74 · 2.37 in)Kick starter
Lubrication system:	Dry sump
Oil type or grade:Engine oil	(For USA and CDN)At 5 °C (40 °F) or higher Yamalube 4 (20W-40) or SAE 20W-40 type SH motor oil (Non-Friction modified)At 15 °C (60 °F) or lower Yamalube 4 (10W-30) or SAE 10W-30 type SH motor oil (Non-Friction modified) and/or Yamalube 4-R (15W-50) (Non-Friction modified)(Except for USA and CDN)API “SH” or higher grade
Oil capacity:Engine oilPeriodic oil change 1.5 L (1.32 Imp qt, 1.59 US qt)With oil filter replacement 1.6 L (1.41 Imp qt, 1.69 US qt)Total amount 1.7 L (1.50 Imp qt, 1.80 US qt)
Coolant capacity (including all routes): 1.2 L (1.06 Imp qt, 1.27 US qt)
Air filter: Wet type element
Fuel:Type Premium unleaded fuel with a research octaneTank capacity 12 L (2.64 Imp gal, 3.17 US gal)Reserve 1.6 L (0.35 Imp gal, 0.42 US gal)	number of 95 or higher. (Except for AUS)Unleaded fuel only (For AUS)(For USA, CDN)8.0 L (1.76 Imp gal, 2.11 US gal)(Except for USA, CDN)(For USA, CDN)1.4 L (0.31 Imp gal, 0.37 US gal)(Except for USA, CDN)
Carburetor:Type FCR-MX39Manufacturer KEIHIN
Spark plug:Type/manufacturer CR8E/NGKGap 0.7 ~ 0.8 mm (0.028 ~ 0.031 in)	U24ESR-N/DENSO
Clutch type: Wet, multiple-disc
Transmission:Primary reduction systemPrimary reduction ratioSecondary reduction systemSecondary reduction ratioTransmission typeOperationGear ratio: 1st2nd3rd4th5th	Gear62/21 (2.952)Chain drive50/14 (3.571)Constant mesh, 5-speedLeft foot operation29/12 (2.416)26/15 (1.733)21/16 (1.312)21/20 (1.050)21/25 (0.840)
Chassis:Frame typeCaster angleTrail	Semi double cradle27.8°123 mm (4.84 in)
Tire:Type With tubeSize (front) 80/100-21 51M (USA, CDN, ZA)Size (rear) 110/100-18 64M (USA, CDN, ZA)Tire pressure (front and rear) 100 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2, 15 psi)	90/90-21 54R (EUROPE, AUS, NZ)130/90-18 69R (EUROPE, AUS, NZ)
Brake:Front brake type Single disc brakeOperation Right hand operationRear brake type Single disc brakeOperation Right foot operation
Suspension:Front suspension Telescopic forkRear suspension Swingarm (link type monocross suspension)
Shock absorber:Front shock absorber Coil spring/oil damperRear shock absorber Coil spring/gas, oil damper
Wheel travel:Front wheel travel 300 mm (11.8 in)Rear wheel travel	315 mm (12.4 in)
Electrical:Ignition system	CDI magneto

MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS (WR426F)

ENGINE

Item Standard Limit
Cylinder head:Warp limit ---- 0.05 mm			(0.002 in)
Cylinder:Bore size 95.00 ~ 95.01 mmOut of round limit ---- 0.05 mm		(3.7402 ~ 3.7406 in)	----(0.002 in)
Camshaft:Drive method Chain drive (left) ----Camshaft cap inside diameter 22.000 ~ 22.021 mmCamshaft bearing diameter 21.967 ~ 21.980 mmCamshaft-to-cap clearance 0.020 ~ 0.054 mmCam dimensions			----0.08 mm(0.003 in)
Intake “A” 31.7 ~ 31.8 mm“B” 22.95 ~Exhaust“A” 31.2 ~ 31.3 mm“B” 22.95 ~Camshaft runout limit		(1.2480 ~ 1.2520 in)23.05 mm(0.9035 ~ 0.9075 in)1.3 mm(1.2283 ~ 1.2323 in)23.05 mm(0.9035 ~ 0.9075 in)---- 0.03 mm	31.6 mm(1.244 in)22.85 mm(0.900 in)31.1 mm(1.224 in)22.85 mm(0.900 in)(0.0012 in)
Item		Standard	Limit
Cam chain: Cam chain type/No. of links 92RH2010-120MPX/120 ----
Cam chain adjustment method Automatic ----
Valve, valve seat, valve guide: Valve clearance (cold) IN 0.10 ~ 0.15 mm		(0.0039 ~ 0.0059 in)	----
Valve dimensions:
Head Diameter	Face Width	Seat Width	Margin Thickness
“A” head diameter IN 26.9 ~ 27.1 mm		(1.0591 ~ 1.0669 in)	----
“B” face width IN 2.26 mm (0.089 in) ----		(1.0984 ~ 1.1063 in)	----
“C” seat width IN 0.9 ~ 1.1 mm		(0.0354 ~ 0.0433 in)	1.6 mm
			(0.0630 in)
“D” margin thickness IN 1 mm (0.0394 in) 0.85 mm		(0.0354 ~ 0.0433 in)	1.6 mm
			(0.0630 in)
Stem outside diameter IN 4.475 ~ 4.490 mm		(0.1762 ~ 0.1768 in)	(0.033 in)
			4.445 mm
			(0.1750 in)
Guide inside diameter IN 4.500 ~ 4.512 mm		(0.1772 ~ 0.1776 in)	4.935 mm
			(0.1943 in)
Stem-to-guide clearance IN 0.010 ~ 0.037 mm		(0.0004 ~ 0.0015 in)	4.550 mm
			(0.1791 in)
Stem runout limit		----	5.050 mm
			(0.1988 in)
Item		Standard	Limit
Valve seat width IN 0.9 ~ 1.1 mmEX 0.9 ~ 1.1 mm(0.0354 ~ 0.0433 in)1.6 mm(0.0630 in)		(0.0354 ~ 0.0433 in)(0.0354 ~ 0.0433 in)	1.6 mm(0.0630 in)1.6 mm(0.0630 in)
Valve spring:Free length IN 41.36 mm (1.63 in) 39.3 mmEX 43.60 mm (1.72 in) 41.4 mmSet length (valve closed) IN 32.87 mm (1.29 in) ----EX 35.38 mm (1.39 in) ----Compressed pressure(installed) IN 112.8 ~ 129.8 NEX 116.3 ~ 133.9 N(11.5 ~ 13.2 kg, 25.35 ~ 29.10 lb)----Tilt limit *N ---- 2.5°/1.8 mmEX ---- 2.5°/1.9 mm(C482)Direction of winding(top view) IN Clockwise ----EXClockwise		(1.55 in)(1.63 in)----(2.5°/0.071 in)(2.5°/0.075 in)

Item	Standard		Limit
Piston rings:Top ringType Barrel ----Dimensions (B·T) 1.2End gap (installed) 0.20 ~ 0.30 mmSide clearance (installed) 0.030 ~ 0.065 mm2nd ringType Taper ----Dimensions (B·T) 1.00End gap (installed) 0.35 ~ 0.50 mmSide clearance 0.020 ~ 0.055 mmOil ringDimensions (B·T) 2.0End gap (installed) 0.2 ~ 0.5 mm (0.01 ~ 0.02 in) ----	3.5 mm (0.05 · 0.14 in) ----(0.008 ~ 0.012 in)(0.0012 ~ 0.0026 in)		0.55 mm(0.022 in)0.12 mm(0.005 in)0.85 mm(0.033 in)0.12 mm(0.005 in)----
Crankshaft:Crank width “A” 61.95 ~ 62.0Runout limit “C” 0.03 mm (0.1 mBig end side clearance “D” 0Small end free play “F”	2.9 mm (0.08 · 0.11 in) ----(2.439 ~ 2.441 in)(0.0059 ~ 0.0177 in)0.4 ~ 1.0 mm (0.02 ~ 0.04 in) 2.0 mm		------(0.002 in)0.50 mm(0.02 in)(0.08 in)----
Balancer:Balancer drive method	Gear		----
Decompression device:TypeCable free play	Manual5 ~ 9 mm (0.20 ~ 0.35 in)		----
Air filter oil grade:	Engine oil		----
Item	Standard Limit
Clutch:Friction plate thickness 2.9 ~ 3.1 mm (0.114 ~ Quantity 9 ----Clutch plate thickness 1.1 ~ 1.3 mm (0.043 ~ 0.051 in) ----Quantity 8 ----Warp limit ---- 0.1 mmClutch spring free length 48.4 mm (1.91 in) 47.4 mmQuantity 6 ----Clutch housing thrust clearance 0.10 ~ 0.35 mm(0.0039 ~ 0.0138 in) ----Clutch housing radial clearance 0.010 ~ 0.044 mm(0.0004 ~ 0.0017 in) ----Clutch release method Inner push, cam push ----			(0.106 in)(0.004 in)(1.87 in) ---- ----
Shifter:Shifter type Cam drum and guide barGuide bar bending limit ----0.05 mm(0.002 in)
Kick starter:Type	Ratchet type		----
Carburetor:I. D. markMain jet (M.J)Main air jet (M.A.J)Jet needle-clip position (J.N)Cutaway (C.A)Pilot jet (P.J)Pilot air jet (P.A.J)Pilot outlet (P.O)Pilot screw (example) (P.S)Bypass (B.P)Valve seat size (V.S)Starter jet (G.S)Float height (F.H)Engine idle speedIntake vacuum	USA	EUROPE,CDN, AUS, NZ,ZA5NG1 00#165#200OBDRR-41.5#42#75ø0.91-5/8ø1.0ø3.8#658 mm (0.31 in)1,700 ~1,900 r/min33.3 ~ 38.7 kPa(250 ~ 290 mmHg,9.84 ~ 11.42 inHg)	---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ----

Item	Standard Limit
Lubrication system:Oil filter type Wire mesh type ----Oil pump type Trochoid type ----Tip clearance “A” 0.12 mm or lessTip clearance “B” 0.09 ~ 0.17 mmSide clearance 0.03 ~ 0.10 mmBypass valve setting pressure 40 ~ 80 kPa (0.4 ~ 0.8 kg/cm ^2 ,5.69 ~ 11.38 psi)	(0.0047 in or less)(0.0035 ~ 0.0067 in)(0.0012 ~ 0.0039 in)
Cooling:Radiator core sizeWidth 117.8 mm (4.6 in) ----Height 260 mm (10.2 in) ----Thickness 32 mm (1.26 in) ----Radiator cap opening pressure 110 kPa (1.1 kg/cm ^2 , 15.6 psi)Radiator capacity (total)Water pumpType	Single-suction centrifugal pump	----

graph TD
    A["Pressure feed"] --> B["Cylinder head"]
    C["Splashed scavenge"] --> B
    D["Drive axle"] --> E["Transmission gears"]
    E --> F["Main axle"]
    F --> G["Check ball"]
    G --> H["Oil pump rotor 1"]
    H --> I["Oil pump rotor 2"]
    I --> J["Oil strainer"]
    K["Cylinder head"] --> L["Crank pin"]
    M["Cylinder head"] --> N["Piston"]
    N --> O["Piston pin"]
    O --> P["Piston shaft"]
    P --> Q["Valve lifter"]
    Q --> R["Camshaft"]
    R --> S["Oil tank"]
    T["Oil filter"] --> U["Check ball"]
    U --> V["Oil pump rotor 1"]
    V --> W["Oil pump rotor 2"]
    W --> X["Oil strainer"]
    Y["Oil pan"] --> Z["End"]

Part to be tightened Thread size Qty			Tightening torque
			Nm m·kg ft·lb
Spark plug M10S	· 1.0 1	13 1.3 9.4
Camshaft cap M6	· 1.0 10	10 1.0 7.2
Cylinder head (stud bolt) M6	· 1.0	2	7	0.7 5.1
	M8 · 1.25 3	15 1.5 11
(bolt)	M10 · 1.25	4 44	4.4 32
(nut)	M6 · 1.0	2 10	1.0 7.2
	M8 · 1.25 2	20 2.0 14
Cylinder head cover	M6 · 1.0	2 10	1.0 7.2
Cylinder	M6 · 1.0	1 10	1.0 7.2
Timing chain tensioner	M6 · 1.0	2 10	1.0 7.2
Tensioner cap bolt	M6 · 1.0	1	7	0.7 5.1
Timing chain guide (rear)	M6 · 1.0	2 10	1.0 7.2
Decompression shaft	M6 · 1.0	1	7	0.7 5.1
Decompression cable guide	M6 · 1.0	1 10	1.0 7.2
Exhaust pipe (nut)	M8 · 1.25 1	13 1.3 9.4
(bolt)	M8 · 1.25 1	24 2.4 17
Silencer	M8 · 1.25 2	35 3.5 25
Silencer clamp	M8 · 1.25 1	20 2.0 14
Exhaust pipe protector	M6 · 1.0	3 10	1.0 7.2
Spark arrester (for USA)	M6 · 1.0	3 10	1.0 7.2
Silencer end pipe (for USA)	M6 · 1.0	1 10	1.0 7.2
Clamp (air cleaner joint)	M5 · 0.8	1	3	0.3 2.2
Clamp (carburetor joint)	M4 · 0.7	1	3	0.3 2.2
Air filter joint clamp	M6 · 1.0	1	3	0.3 2.2
Throttle cable cover	M5 · 0.8	1	4	0.4 2.9
Air filter element	M6 · 1.0	1	2	0.2 1.4
Air filter case cover	M6 · 1.0	4	4	0.4 2.9
Radiator panel (upper)	M6 · 1.0	2 10	1.0 7.2
Radiator	M6 · 1.0	6 10	1.0 7.2
Radiator hose clamp	M6 · 1.0	8	2	0.2 1.4
Impeller	M8 · 1.25 1	14 1.4 10
Water pump housing cover	M6 · 1.0	3 10	1.0 7.2
Coolant drain bolt	M6 · 1.0	1 10	1.0 7.2
Oil pump cover	M5 · 0.8	1	4	0.4	2.9
Oil pump	M6 · 1.0	3 10	1.0 7.2
Engine oil drain bolt (oil filter)	M6 · 1.0	1	10	1.0	7.2
Oil filter cover	M6 · 1.0	2 10	1.0 7.2
Oil delivery pipe 1	M10 · 1.25	1	20	2.0	14
	M8 · 1.25	2	18	1.8	13
Oil hose clamp	—	2	2	0.2	1.4
Clutch cover	M6 · 1.0	7 10	1.0 7.2
Crankcase cover (right)	M6 · 1.0 10	10 1.0 7.2
Crankcase cover (left)	M6 · 1.0	8	10	1.0	7.2
Crankcase	M6 · 1.0 12	12 1.2 8.7

Part to be tightened	Thread size	Q'ty	Tightening torque
			Nm	m·kg	ft·lb
Oil drain bolt (crankcase) M12 · 1.5 1 20 2.0 1.4Oil drain bolt (frame) M8 · 1.25 1 23 2.3 17Oil strainer (frame) M18 · 1.5 1 90 9.0 65Crankcase bearing stopper M6 · 1.0 15 10 1.0 7.2Drive axle oil seal stopper M6 · 1.0 2 10 1.0 7.2Ratchet wheel guide M6 · 1.0 2 12 1.2 8.7Kick crank M8 · 1.25 1 33 3.3 24Primary drive gear M20 · 1.0 1 75 7.5 54Clutch boss M20 · 1.0 1 75 7.5 54Clutch springBalancer driven gearBalancer weight plateDrive sprocketShift guideStopper leverSegmentNeutral switch	M6 · 1.0M14 · 1.0 1M6 · 1.0 3M20 · 1.0 1M6 · 1.0 2M6 · 1.0 1M8 · 1.25 1M5 · 0.8	650 5.0 3610 1.0 7.275 7.5 5410 1.0 7.210 1.0 7.230 3.0 222	8	0.8	5.8
	Neutral switch

NOTE:
△- marked portion shall be checked for torque tightening after break-in or before each race.

FC212201

CHASSIS

Item Standard Limit
Steering system:Steering bearing type Taper roller bearing ----
Front suspension: USA, CDN	AUS, NZ, ZA	EUROPE
Front fork travel 300 mm	(11.8 in)	← ----
Fork spring free length 460 mm	(18.1 in)	← 455 mm (17.9 in)
Spring rate, STD K = 4.51 N/mm	(0.46 kg/mm,25.8 lb/in)	K = 4.12 N/mm(0.42 kg/mm,23.5 lb/in)	----
Optional spring/spacer Yes ← ----Oil capacity 573 cm	3(20.2 Imp oz,19.4 US oz)	583 cm^3 (20.5 Imp oz,19.7 US oz)	----
Oil level 135 mm	(5.31 in)	125 mm(4.92 in)	----
<Min.~Max.>(From top of outer tube with inner tube and damper rod fully com-pressed without spring.)	80 ~ 150 mm(3.15 ~ 5.91 in)	← ----
Oil grade	Suspension oil“01”	← ----
Inner tube outer diameter	46 mm (1.81 in)	←	----
Front fork top end	Zero mm(Zero in)	← ----
Rear suspension: USA, CDN,	AUS, NZ, ZA	EUROPE
Shock absorber travel	132 mm(5.20 in)	← ----
Spring free length	260 mm(10.24 in)	← ----
Fitting length	241 mm(9.49 in)	244 mm(9.61 in)	----
<Min.~Max.>	240.5 ~ 258.5 mm(9.47 ~ 10.18 in)	←	----
Spring rate, STD K = 49.0 N/mm	(5.00 kg/mm,280.0 lb/in)	K = 47.0 N/mm(4.80 kg/mm,268.8 lb/in)	----
Optional spring	Yes ← ----
Enclosed gas pressure	1,000 kPa(10 kg/ cm^2 ,142 psi)	← ----
Swingarm:Swingarm free play limitEnd	----		1.0 mm (0.04 in)
Item	Standard Limit
Wheel:Front wheel type Spoke wheel ----Rear wheel type Spoke wheel ----Front rim size/material 21 · 1.60/Aluminum ----Rear rim size/material 18 · 2.15/Aluminum ----Rim runout limitRadial ---- 2.0 mm (0.08 in)Lateral ---- 2.0 mm (0.08 in)
Drive chain:Type/manufacturer DID520VM/DAIDO ----Number of links 113 links + joint ----Chain slack 40 ~ 50 mm (1.6 ~ 2.0 in) ----Chain length (10 links) ---- 150.1 mm (5.91 in)
Front disc brake:Disc outside diameter · Thickness	250 · 3.0 mm (9.84 · 0.12 in)		250 · 2.5 mm(9.84 · 0.10 in)
Pad thicknessMaster cylinder inside dia.Caliper cylinder inside dia.Brake fluid type	4.4 mm (0.17 in)11.0 mm (0.433 in)27.0 mm (1.063 in) · 2DOT #4		1 mm (0.04 in)--------
Rear disc brake:Disc outside diameter · Thickness	240 · 4.0 mm (9.45 · 0.16 in)		240 · 3.5 mm(9.45 · 0.14 in)
Deflection limitPad thicknessMaster cylinder inside dia.Caliper cylinder inside dia.Brake fluid type	---- 0.15 mm (0.006 in)6.4 mm (0.25 in)12.7 mm (0.500 in)27.0 mm (1.063 in) · 1DOT #4		1.0 mm (0.04 in)--------
Brake lever and brake pedal:Brake lever positionBrake pedal height(vertical height below footrest top)Clutch lever free play (at lever pivot)Throttle grip free play	95 mm (3.74 in)5 mm (0.20 in)2 ~ 4 mm (0.08 ~ 0.16 in)3 ~ 5 mm (0.12 ~ 0.20 in) ----		--------

Part to be tightened Thread size Q'ty			Tightening torque
			Nm m·kg ft·lb
Handle crown and outer tube M8 · 1.25 4 23 2.3 17Under bracket and outer tube M8 · 1.25 4 20 2.0 14Handle crown and steering shaft M24 · 1.0 1 145 14.5 105Handlebar holder (upper) M8 · 1.25 4 28 2.8 20Steering ring nutFront fork and cap boltFront fork and base valveCap bolt and damper rod (front fork)Bleed screw (front fork) and cap boltFront fork and protectorMeter cable holder and protectorFront fork and brake hose holderFront fork and hose coverFront fork and hose coverThrottle cable capClutch lever holderDecompression lever holderLights switchFront brake master cylinder and bracketFront brake master cylinder capBrake lever mounting (bolt)Brake lever mounting (nut)Brake lever position locknutHose guide (front brake hose)Front brake hose union bolt (master cylinder)Front brake hose union bolt (caliper)Front brake caliper and front forkBrake caliper (front and rear) and pad pin plugBrake caliper (front and rear) and pad pin M10 · 1.0 1 18 1.8 13Brake caliper (front and rear) and bleed screwFront wheel axle and nutFront wheel axle holderFront brake disc and wheel hubRear brake disc and wheel hubBrake pedal mountingRear brake master cylinder and frameRear brake reservoir tank and frameRear brake hose union bolt (caliper)	M28 · 1.0M48 · 1.0 2 30 3.0 22M30 · 1.0 2 55 5.5 40M12 · 1.25M5 · 0.8M6 · 1.0M5 · 0.8M6 · 1.0M5 · 0.8M4 · 0.7M6 · 1.0M4 · 0.7M6 · 1.0M6 · 1.0M6 · 1.0M5 · 0.8M10 · 1.25M10 · 1.25M8 · 1.25 2 23 2.3 17M10 · 1.0M10 · 1.0 1 18 1.8 13M8 · 1.25M16 · 1.5M8 · 1.25 4 23 2.3 17M6 · 1.0M6 · 1.0M8 · 1.25 1 26 2.6 19M6 · 1.0M6 · 1.0M10 · 1.25	Refer to NOTE.30 3.0 2255 5.5 402261041016744442910101674442922610665430303030303030303030303030303030303030303030303030303030303030303030303030303030303030303030303030303	Nm m·kg ft·lb	Refer to NOTE.	30 3.0 2255 5.5 4022610410101030303030303030303030303030303030303030303030303030303030303030303030303030303030303030303030303030

NOTE:
1. First, tighten the ring nut approximately 38 Nm (3.8 m • kg, 27 ft • lb) by using the ring nut wrench, then loosen the ring nut one turn.
2. Retighten the ring nut 7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • lb).

Part to be tightened Thread size Q'ty			Tightening torque
			Nm m·kg ft·lb
Rear brake hose union bolt (master cylinder) M10 · 1.25 1 30 3.0 22
Rear wheel axle and nut M20 · 1.5 1 125 12.5 90
Driven sprocket and wheel hub M8 · 1.25 6 42 4.2 30
Nipple (spoke)	—	72 3	0.3	2.2
Disc cover and rear brake caliper	M6 · 1.0	2	7	0.7	5.1
Protector and rear brake caliper	M6 · 1.0	2	7	0.7	5.1
Engine mounting:
Engine bracket and frame	M8 · 1.25 7	34 3.4 24
Engine and frame (front)	M10 · 1.25	1	69	6.9	50
Engine and frame (upper)	M10 · 1.25	1	55	5.5	40
Engine and frame (lower)	M10 · 1.25	1	69	6.9	50
Engine guard (left and right)	M8 · 1.25 2	23 2.3 17
Pivot shaft and nut	M16 · 1.5 1	85 8.5 61
Relay arm and swingarm	M14 · 1.5 1	80 8.0 58
Relay arm and connecting rod	M14 · 1.5 1	80 8.0 58
Connecting rod and frame	M14 · 1.5 1	80 8.0 58
Rear shock absorber and frame	M10 · 1.25	1	56	5.6	40
Rear shock absorber and relay arm	M10 · 1.25	1	53	5.3	38
Rear frame and frame	M8 · 1.25 3	29 2.9 21
Swingarm and brake hose holder	M5 · —	4	4	0.4	2.9
Drive chain tensioner mounting	M8 · 1.25	2	19	1.9	13
Chain support and swingarm	M6 · 1.0	3	7	0.7	5.1
Seal guard and swingarm	M5 · 0.8	4	6	0.6	4.3
Fuel tank mounting	M6 · 1.0	2	10	1.0	7.2
Fuel tank and fuel cock	M6 · 1.0	2	7	0.7	5.1
Fuel tank and seat set bracket	M6 · 1.0	1	7	0.7	5.1
Fuel tank and hooking screw (fitting band)	M6 · 1.0	1	7	0.7	5.1
Fuel tank and fuel tank bracket	M6 · 1.0	4	7	0.7	5.1
Seat mounting	M8 · 1.25 2	23 2.3 17
Side cover mounting	M6 · 1.0	2	7	0.7	5.1
Air scoop and fuel tank	M6 · 1.0	4	4	0.4	2.9
Air scoop and radiator panel (lower)	M6 · 1.0	2	4	0.4	2.9
Front fender mounting	M6 · 1.0	4	7	0.7	5.1
Rear fender mounting	M6 · 1.0	4	7	0.7	5.1
Headlight stay (under) and under bracket	M6 · 1.0	2	7	0.7	5.1
Headlight	M6 · 1.0	3	7	0.7	5.1
Tail light	M6 · 1.0	3	4	0.4	2.9
Tail light lead clamp and rear fender	M4 · 1.59	2	1	0.1	0.7
Coolant reservoir tank	M6 · 1.0	2	7	0.7	5.1
Sidestand bracket and frame	M10 · 1.25	2	64	6.4	46
Sidestand mounting	M10 · 1.25	1 64	6.4 46

NOTE:
△- marked portion shall be checked for torque tightening after break-in or before each race.

FC212300

ELECTRICAL

Item Standard Limit
Ignition system:Advancer type Electrical ----
CDI:Magneto-model/manufacturer F5NG 00/YAMAHA ----Source coil 1 resistance (color) 640 ~ 960 Ω at 20 °C (68 °F)(Green – Brown)Source coil 2 resistance (color) 464 ~ 696 Ω at 20 °C (68 °F)(Green – Pink)Lighting coil resistance (color) 0.16 ~ 0.24 Ω at 20 °C (68 °F)(Black – Yellow)Pickup coil resistance (color) 248 ~ 372 Ω at 20 °C (68 °F)(White – Red)CDI unit-model/manufacturer 5NG-00/YAMAHA(For USA)5NG-10/YAMAHA(Except for USA)	----
	----
Ignition coil:Model/manufacturer 5BE-00/YAMAHA ----Minimum spark gap 6 mm (0.24 in) ----Primary winding resistanceSecondary winding resistance	0.20 ~ 0.30 Ω at 20 °C (68 °F)9.5 ~ 14.3 kΩ at 20 °C (68 °F)	----
		----

Part to be tightened	Thread size	Q'ty	Tightening torque
			Nm	m·kg	ft·lb
Stator	M6 · 1.0	3	10	1.0	7.2
Rotor	M10 · 1.25	1	48	4.8	35
Ignition coil	M6 · 1.0	2	7	0.7	5.1

EC211000

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (WR400F)

Model name: WR400F (EUROPE)	WR400FN (AUS)
Model code number: 5GS9
Dimensions:Overall length 2,171 mm (85.5 in)Overall width 827 mm (32.6 in)Overall height 1,303 mm (51.3 in)Seat height 998 mm (39.3 in)Wheelbase 1,490 mm (58.7 in)Minimum ground clearance 373 mm (14.7 in)
Basic weight:With oil and full fuel tank 121.5 kg (268 lb)
Engine:Engine type Liquid cooled 4-stroke, DOHCCylinder arrangement Single cylinder, forward Displacement 399 cmBore · strokeCompression ratio 12.5 : 1Starting system	inclined ^3 (14.1 Imp oz, 13.5 US oz)92.0 · 60.1 mm (3.62 · 2.37 in)Kick starter
Lubrication system:	Dry sump
Oil type or grade:Engine oil	API “SH” or higher grade
Oil capacity:Engine oilPeriodic oil changeWith oil filter replacementTotal amount	1.5 L (1.32 Imp qt, 1.59 US qt)1.6 L (1.41 Imp qt, 1.69 US qt)1.7 L (1.50 Imp qt, 1.80 US qt)
Coolant capacity (including all routes):	1.2 L (1.06 Imp qt, 1.27 US qt)
Air filter:	Wet type element
Fuel:Type Premium unleaded fuel with a research octanenumber of 95 or higher. (Except for AUS)Unleaded fuel only (For AUS)Tank capacity 8.0 L (1.76 Imp gal, 2.11 US gal)Reserve 1.4 L (0.31 Imp gal, 0.37 US gal)
Carburetor:Type FCR-MX39Manufacturer KEIHIN
Spark plug:Type/manufacturer CR8E/NGKGap 0.7 ~ 0.8 mm (0.028 ~ 0.031 in)	U24ESR-N/DENSO
Clutch type: Wet, multiple-disc
Transmission:Primary reduction system GearPrimary reduction ratio 62/21 (2.952)Secondary reduction system Chain driveSecondary reduction ratio 50/14 (3.571)Transmission type Constant mesh, 5-speedOperationGear ratio: 1st2nd3rd4th5th	Left foot operation29/12 (2.416)26/15 (1.733)21/16 (1.312)21/20 (1.050)21/25 (0.840)
Chassis:Frame typeCaster angleTrail	Semi double cradle27.8°123 mm (4.84 in)
Tire:Type With tubeSize (front)Size (rear)Tire pressure (front and rear)	90/90-21 54R130/90-18 69R100 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2, 15 psi)
Brake:Front brake typeOperationRear brake typeOperation	Single disc brakeRight hand operationSingle disc brakeRight foot operation
Suspension:Front suspensionRear suspension	Telescopic forkSwingarm (link type monocross suspension)

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (WR400F)

SPEC

Shock absorber:Front shock absorber Coil spring/oil damperRear shock absorber Coil spring/gas, oil damper
Wheel travel:Front wheel travel 300 mm (11.8 in)Rear wheel travel 315 mm (12.4 in)
Electrical:Ignition system CDI magneto

MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS (WR400F)

ENGINE

Item Standard Limit
Cylinder head:Warp limit ---- 0.05 mm			(0.002 in)
Cylinder:Bore size 92.00 ~ 92.01 mmOut of round limit ---- 0.05 mm		(3.6220 ~ 3.6224 in)	----(0.002 in)
Camshaft:Drive method Chain drive (left) ----Camshaft cap inside diameter 22.000 ~ 22.021 mmCamshaft bearing diameter 21.967 ~ 21.980 mmCamshaft-to-cap clearance 0.020 ~ 0.054 mmCam dimensions			----0.08 mm(0.003 in)
Intake “A” 31.7 ~ 31.8 mm“B” 22.95 ~Exhaust“A” 31.2 ~ 31.3 mm“B” 22.95 ~Camshaft runout limit		(1.248 ~ 1.252 in)23.05 mm(0.9035 ~ 0.9075 in)1.3 mm(1.2283 ~ 1.2323 in)23.05 mm(0.9035 ~ 0.9075 in)---- 0.03 mm	31.6 mm(1.244 in)22.85 mm(0.900 in)31.1 mm(1.224 in)22.85 mm(0.900 in)(0.0012 in)
Item		Standard	Limit
Cam chain: Cam chain type/No. of links 92RH2010-120MPX/120 ----
Cam chain adjustment method Automatic ----
Valve, valve seat, valve guide: Valve clearance (cold) IN 0.10 ~ 0.15 mm		(0.0039 ~ 0.0059 in)	----
Valve dimensions:
Head Diameter	Face Width	Seat Width	Margin Thickness
“A” head diameter IN 26.9 ~ 27.1 mm		(1.0591 ~ 1.0669 in)	----
“B” face width IN 2.26 mm (0.089 in) ----		(1.0984 ~ 1.1063 in)	----
“C” seat width IN 0.9 ~ 1.1 mm		(0.0354 ~ 0.0433 in)	1.6 mm
			(0.0630 in)
“D” margin thickness IN 1 mm (0.0394 in) 0.85 mm		(0.0354 ~ 0.0433 in)	1.6 mm
			(0.0630 in)
Stem outside diameter IN 4.475 ~ 4.490 mm		(0.1762 ~ 0.1768 in)	(0.033 in)
			(0.033 in)
Guide inside diameter IN 4.500 ~ 4.512 mm		(0.1772 ~ 0.1776 in)	4.445 mm
			(0.1750 in)
Stem-to-guide clearance IN 0.010 ~ 0.037 mm		(0.0004 ~ 0.0015 in)	4.935 mm
			(0.1943 in)
Stem runout limit		----	0.08 mm
			(0.003 in)
			0.10 mm
			(0.004 in)
			0.01 mm
			(0.0004 in)
Item		Standard	Limit
Valve seat width IN 0.9 ~ 1.1 mmEX 0.9 ~ 1.1 mm(0.0354 ~ 0.0433 in)1.6 mm(0.0630 in)		(0.0354 ~ 0.0433 in)mm(0.0354 ~ 0.0433 in)	1.6 mm(0.0630 in)1.6 mm(0.0630 in)
Valve spring:Free length IN 41.36 mm (1.63 in) 39.3 mmEX 43.60 mm (1.72 in) 41.4 mmSet length (valve closed) IN 32.86 mm (1.29 in) ----EX 35.38 mm (1.39 in) ----Compressed pressure(installed) IN 112.8 ~ 129.8 NEX 116.3 ~ 133.9 N(11.5 ~ 13.2 kg, 25.35 ~ 29.10 lb)----Tilt limit *N ---- 2.5°/1.8 mmEX ---- 2.5°/1.9 mmDirection of winding(top view) IN Clockwise ----EXClockwise		(1.55 in)(1.63 in)----(2.5°/0.071 in)(2.5°/0.075 in)
Piston:Piston to cylinder clearance 0.040 ~ 0.065 mmPiston size “D” 91.945 ~ 91.960 mmMeasuring point “H” 9 mm (0.354 in) ----Piston off-setPiston pin bore inside diameterPiston pin outside diameter		(0.0016 ~ 0.0026 in)(3.6199 ~ 3.6205 in)1 mm (0.0394 in)18.004 ~ 18.015 mm(0.7088 ~ 0.7093 in)17.991 ~ 18.000 mm(0.7083 ~ 0.7087 in)	0.1 mm(0.004 in)----
			18.045 mm(0.7104 in)17.971 mm(0.7075 in)
Piston rings:Top ringType Barrel ----Dimensions (B·T)End gap (installed) 0.20 ~ 0.35 mmSide clearance (installed) 0.030 ~ 0.065 mm2nd ringType Taper ----Dimensions (B·T)End gap (installed) 0.40 ~ 0.55 mmSide clearance 0.020 ~ 0.055 mmOil ringDimensions (B·T)End gap (installed) 0.2 ~ 0.5 mm (0.01 ~ 0.02 in) ----		1.2 · 3.5 mm (0.05 · 0.14 in)(0.008 ~ 0.014 in)(0.0012 ~ 0.0026 in)	----0.6 mm(0.024 in)0.12 mm(0.005 in)----0.9 mm(0.035 in)0.12 mm(0.005 in)----
Crankshaft:Crank width “A” 61.95 ~ 62.0Runout limit “C” 0.03 mm (0.1 mY4DC)Big end side clearance “D” 0Small end free play “F”		2.0 · 2.9 mm (0.08 · 0.11 in)----	----
		(2.439 ~ 2.441 in)(0.0059 ~ 0.0177 in)0.4 ~ 1.0 mm (0.02 ~ 0.04 in) 2.0 mm(0.08 in)	----(0.002 in)0.50 mm(0.02 in)
Balancer:Balancer drive method		Gear	----
Decompression device:TypeCable free play		Manual5 ~ 9 mm (0.20 ~ 0.35 in)	----
Air filter oil grade:		Engine oil	----
Clutch:
Friction plate 1 thickness 2.72 ~ 2.88 mm		(0.107 ~ 0.113 in)	2.52 mm(0.099 in)
Inner diameter ø112 mm (4.41 in) ----
Quantity 7 ----
Friction plate 2 thickness 2.92 ~ 3.08 mm		(0.115 ~ 0.121 in)	2.72 mm(0.107 in)
Inner diameter ø116 mm (4.57 in) ----
Quantity 1 ----
Clutch plate thickness 1.1 ~ 1.3 mm (0.043 ~ 0.051 in) ----
Quantity 7 ----
Warp limit ---- 0.1 mm
Clutch spring free length 44 mm (1.73 in) 43 mm			(0.004 in)
Quantity 5 ----			(1.69 in)
Clutch housing thrust clearance 0.20 ~ 0.45 mm		(0.0079 ~ 0.0177 in)	----
Clutch housing radial clearance 0.010 ~ 0.044 mm		(0.0004 ~ 0.0017 in)	----
Clutch release method Inner push, cam push		----
Shifter:
Shifter type		Cam drum and guide bar	----
Guide bar bending limit		---- 0.05 mm	(0.002 in)
Kick starter:
Type		Ratchet type	----
Carburetor:
I. D. mark		5GS6 61	----
Main jet (M.J)		#165	----
Main air jet (M.A.J)		#200	----
Jet needle-clip position (J.N)		OBDRQ-4 ----
Cutaway (C.A)		1.5	----
Pilot jet (P.J)		#42	----
Pilot air jet (P.A.J)		#75	----
Pilot outlet (P.O)		ø0.9	----
Pilot screw (example) (P.S)		1-1/2 ----
Bypass (B.P)		ø1.0	----
Valve seat size (V.S)		ø3.8	----
Starter jet (G.S)		#65	----
Float height (F.H)		8 mm (0.31 in)	----
Engine idle speed		1,700 ~ 1,900 r/min	----
Intake vacuum		33.3 ~ 38.7 kPa(250 ~ 290 mmHg, 9.84 ~ 11.42 inHg)	----
Item		Standard Limit
Lubrication system:Oil filter type Wire mesh type ----Oil pump type Trochoid type ----Tip clearance “A” 0.12 mm or lessTip clearance “B” 0.09 ~ 0.17 mmSide clearance 0.03 ~ 0.10 mmBypass valve setting pressure 40 ~ 80 kPa (0.4 ~ 0.8 kg/cm ^2 ,5.69 ~ 11.38 psi)	(0.0047 in or less)(0.0035 ~ 0.0067 in)(0.0012 ~ 0.0039 in)
Cooling:Radiator core sizeWidth 117.8 mm (4.6 in) ----Height 260 mm (10.2 in) ----Thickness 32 mm (1.26 in) ----Radiator cap opening pressure 110 kPa (1.1 kg/cm ^2 , 15.6 psi)Radiator capacity (total)Water pumpType		Single-suction centrifugal pump	----

graph TD
    A["Pressure feed"] --> B["Main axle"]
    C["Splashed scavenge"] --> D["Drive axle"]
    B --> E["Transmission gears"]
    E --> F["Cylinder head"]
    F --> G["Cylindrical head"]
    G --> H["Cylinder head"]
    H --> I["Cylinder head"]
    I --> J["Cylinder head"]
    J --> K["Cylinder head"]
    K --> L["Cylinder head"]
    L --> M["Cylinder head"]
    M --> N["Cylinder head"]
    N --> O["Cylinder head"]
    O --> P["Cylinder head"]
    P --> Q["Cylinder head"]
    Q --> R["Cylinder head"]
    R --> S["Cylinder head"]
    S --> T["Cylinder head"]
    T --> U["Cylinder head"]
    U --> V["Cylinder head"]
    V --> W["Cylinder head"]
    W --> X["Cylinder head"]
    X --> Y["Cylinder head"]
    Y --> Z["Cylinder head"]
    Z --> AA["Cylinder head"]
    AA --> AB["Cylinder head"]
    AB --> AC["Cylinder head"]
    AC --> AD["Cylinder head"]
    AD --> AE["Cylinder head"]
    AE --> AF["Cylinder head"]
    AF --> AG["Cylinder head"]
    AG --> AH["Cylinder head"]
    AH --> AI["Cylinder head"]
    AI --> AJ["Cylinder head"]
    AJ --> AK["Cylinder head"]
    AK --> AL["Cylinder head"]
    AL --> AM["Cylinder head"]
    AM --> AN["Cylinder head"]
    AN --> AO["Cylinder head"]
    AO --> AP["Cylinder head"]
    AP --> AQ["Cylinder head"]
    AQ --> AR["Cylinder head"]
    AR --> AS["Cylinder head"]
    AS --> AT["Cylinder head"]
    AT --> AU["Cylinder head"]
    AU --> AV["Cylinder head"]
    AV --> AW["Cylinder head"]
    AW --> AX["Cylinder head"]
    AX --> AY["Cylinder head"]
    AY --> AZ["Cylinder head"]
    AZ --> BA["Cylinder head"]
    BA --> BB["Cylinder head"]
    BB --> BC["Cylinder head"]
    BC --> BD["Cylinder head"]
    BD --> BE["Cylinder head"]
    BE --> BF["Cylinder head"]
    BF --> BG["Cylinder head"]
    BG --> BH["Cylinder head"]
    BH --> BI["Cylinder head"]
    BI --> BJ["Cylinder head"]
    BJ --> BK["Cylinder head"]
    BK --> BL["Cylinder head"]
    BL --> BM["Cylinder head"]
    BM --> BN["Cylinder head"]
    BN --> BO["Cylinder head"]
    BO --> BP["Cylinder head"]
    BP --> BQ["Cylinder head"]
    BQ --> BR["Cylinder head"]
    BR --> BS["Cylinder head"]
    BS --> BT["Cylinder head"]
    BT --> BU["Cylinder head"]
    BU --> BV["Cylinder head"]
    BV --> BW["Cylinder head"]
    BW --> BX["Cylinder head"]
    BX --> BY["Cylinder head"]
    BY --> BZ["Cylinder head"]
    BZ --> CA["Cylinder head"]
    CA --> CB["Cylinder head"]
    CB --> CC["Cylinder head"]
    CC --> CD["Cylinder head"]
    CD --> DE["Cylinder head"]
    DE --> DF["Cylinder head"]
    DF --> DG["Cylinder head"]
    DG --> DH["Cylinder head"]
    DH --> DI["Cylinder head"]
    DI --> DJ["Cylinder head"]
    DJ --> DK["Cylinder head"]
    DK --> DL["Cylinder head"]
    DL --> DV["Cylinder head"]
    DV --> DW["Cylinder head"]
    DW --> DX["Cylinder head"]
    DX --> DWB["Cylinder head"]

Part to be tightened Thread size Qty			Tightening torque
			Nm m·kg ft·lb
Spark plug M10S · 1.0 1 13 1.3 9.4
Camshaft cap M6 · 1.0 10 10 1.0 7.2
Cylinder head (stud bolt)	M6 · 1.0	2	7	0.7	5.1
	M8 · 1.25 3	15 1.5 11
(bolt)	M10 · 1.25	4 44	4.4 32
(nut)	M6 · 1.0	2 10	1.0 7.2
	M8 · 1.25 2	20 2.0 14
Cylinder head cover	M6 · 1.0	2 10	1.0 7.2
Cylinder	M6 · 1.0	1 10	1.0 7.2
Timing chain tensioner	M6 · 1.0	2	10	1.0	7.2
Tensioner cap bolt	M6 · 1.0	1	7	0.7	5.1
Timing chain guide (rear)	M6 · 1.0	2	10	1.0	7.2
Decompression shaft	M6 · 1.0	1	7	0.7	5.1
Decompression cable guide	M6 · 1.0	1	10	1.0	7.2
Exhaust pipe (nut)	M8 · 1.25 1	13 1.3 9.4
(bolt)	M8 · 1.25 1	24 2.4 17
Silencer	M8 · 1.25 2	35 3.5 25
Silencer clamp	M8 · 1.25 1	20 2.0 14
Exhaust pipe protector	M6 · 1.0	3	10	1.0	7.2
Spark arrester (for USA)	M6 · 1.0	3	10	1.0	7.2
Silencer end pipe (for USA)	M6 · 1.0	1	10	1.0	7.2
Clamp (air cleaner joint)	M5 · 0.8	1	3	0.3	2.2
Clamp (carburetor joint)	M4 · 0.7	1	3	0.3	2.2
Air filter joint clamp	M6 · 1.0	1	3	0.3	2.2
Throttle cable cover	M5 · 0.8	1	4	0.4	2.9
Air filter element	M6 · 1.0	1	2	0.2	1.4
Air filter case cover	M6 · 1.0	4	4	0.4	2.9
Radiator panel (upper)	M6 · 1.0	2	10	1.0	7.2
Radiator	M6 · 1.0	6 10	1.0 7.2
Radiator hose clamp	M6 · 1.0	8	2	0.2	1.4
Impeller	M8 · 1.25 1	14 1.4 10
Water pump housing cover	M6 · 1.0	3	10	1.0	7.2
Coolant drain bolt	M6 · 1.0	1 10	1.0 7.2
Oil pump cover	M5 · 0.8	1	4	0.4	2.9
Oil pump	M6 · 1.0	3 10	1.0 7.2
Engine oil drain bolt (oil filter)	M6 · 1.0	1	10	1.0	7.2
Oil filter cover	M6 · 1.0	2 10	1.0 7.2
Oil delivery pipe 1	M10 · 1.25	1	20	2.0	14
	M8 · 1.25	2	18	1.8	13
Oil hose clamp	—	2	2	0.2	1.4
Clutch cover	M6 · 1.0	7 10	1.0 7.2
Crankcase cover (right)	M6 · 1.0 10	10 1.0 7.2
Crankcase cover (left)	M6 · 1.0	8	10	1.0	7.2
Crankcase	M6 · 1.0 12	12 1.2 8.7

Part to be tightened	Thread size	Q'ty	Tightening torque
			Nm	m·kg	ft·lb
Oil drain bolt (crankcase) M12 · 1.5 1 20 2.0 1.4
Oil drain bolt (frame) M8 · 1.25 1 23 2.3 17
Oil strainer (frame) M18 · 1.5 1 90 9.0 65
Crankcase bearing stopper M6 · 1.0 15 10 1.0 7.2
Drive axle oil seal stopper M6 · 1.0 2 10 1.0 7.2
Ratchet wheel guide M6 · 1.0 2 12 1.2 8.7
Kick crank M8 · 1.25 1 33 3.3 24
Primary drive gear M20 · 1.0 1 75 7.5 54
Clutch boss M20 · 1.0 1 75 7.5 54
Clutch spring	M6 · 1.0	5	8	0.8	5.8
Balancer driven gear	M14 · 1.0 1	50 5.0 36
Balancer weight plate	M6 · 1.0 3	10 1.0 7.2
Drive sprocket	M20 · 1.0 1	75 7.5 54
Shift guide	M6 · 1.0 2	10 1.0 7.2
Stopper lever	M6 · 1.0 1	10 1.0 7.2
Segment	M8 · 1.25 1	30 3.0 22
Neutral switch	M5 · 0.8	2	4	0.4	2.9

NOTE:
△- marked portion shall be checked for torque tightening after break-in or before each race.

CHASSIS

Item Standard Limit
Steering system:Steering bearing type Taper roller bearing ----
Front suspension: USA, CDN	AUS, NZ, ZA	EUROPE
Front fork travel 300 mm	(11.8 in)	← ----
Fork spring free length 460 mm	(18.1 in)	← 455 mm (17.9 in)
Spring rate, STD K = 4.51 N/mm	(0.46 kg/mm,25.8 lb/in)	K = 4.12 N/mm(0.42 kg/mm,23.5 lb/in)	----
Optional spring/spacer Yes ← ----Oil capacity 573 cm	3(20.2 lmp oz,19.4 US oz)	583 cm^3 (20.5 lmp oz,19.7 US oz)	----
Oil level 135 mm	(5.31 in)	125 mm(4.92 in)	----
<Min.~Max.>(From top of outer tube with inner tube and damper rod fully compressed without spring.)	80 ~ 150 mm(3.15 ~ 5.91 in)	← ----
Oil grade	Suspension oil“01”	← ----
Inner tube outer diameter	46 mm (1.81 in)	←	----
Front fork top end	Zero mm(Zero in)	← ----
Rear suspension: USA, CDN,	AUS, NZ, ZA	EUROPE
Shock absorber travel	132 mm(5.20 in)	← ----
Spring free length	260 mm(10.24 in)	← ----
Fitting length	241 mm(9.49 in)	244 mm(9.61 in)	----
<Min.~Max.>	240.5 ~ 258.5 mm(9.47 ~ 10.18 in)	←	----
Spring rate, STD K = 49.0 N/mm	(5.00 kg/mm,280.0 lb/in)	K = 47.0 N/mm(4.80 kg/mm,268.8 lb/in)	----
Optional spring	Yes ← ----
Enclosed gas pressure	1,000 kPa(10 kg/ cm^2 ,142 psi)	← ----
Swingarm:Swingarm free play limitEnd		----		1.0 mm (0.04 in)
Item		Standard Limit
Wheel:Front wheel type Spoke wheel ----Rear wheel type Spoke wheel ----Front rim size/material 21 · 1.60/Aluminum ----Rear rim size/material 18 · 2.15/Aluminum ----Rim runout limitRadial ---- 2.0 mm (0.08 in)Lateral ---- 2.0 mm (0.08 in)
Drive chain:Type/manufacturer DID520VM/DAIDO ----Number of links 113 links + joint ----Chain slack 40 ~ 50 mm (1.6 ~ 2.0 in) ----Chain length (10 links) ---- 150.1 mm (5.91 in)
Front disc brake:Disc outside diameter · Thickness		250 · 3.0 mm (9.84 · 0.12 in)	250 · 2.5 mm(9.84 · 0.10 in)
Pad thicknessMaster cylinder inside dia.Caliper cylinder inside dia.Brake fluid type		4.4 mm (0.17 in)11.0 mm (0.433 in)27.0 mm (1.063 in) · 2DOT #4	1 mm (0.04 in)--------
Rear disc brake:Disc outside diameter · Thickness		240 · 4.0 mm (9.45 · 0.16 in)	240 · 3.5 mm(9.45 · 0.14 in)
Deflection limitPad thicknessMaster cylinder inside dia.Caliper cylinder inside dia.Brake fluid type		---- 0.15 mm (0.006 in)6.4 mm (0.25 in)12.7 mm (0.500 in)27.0 mm (1.063 in) · 1DOT #4	1.0 mm (0.04 in)--------
Brake lever and brake pedal:Brake lever positionBrake pedal height(vertical height below footrest top)Clutch lever free play (at lever pivot)Throttle grip free play		95 mm (3.74 in)5 mm (0.20 in)2 ~ 4 mm (0.08 ~ 0.16 in)3 ~ 5 mm (0.12 ~ 0.20 in) ----	--------
Part to be tightened Thread size Q'ty			Tightening torque
			Nm m·kg ft·lb
Handle crown and outer tube M8 · 1.25 4 23 2.3 17Under bracket and outer tube M8 · 1.25 4 20 2.0 14Handle crown and steering shaft M24 · 1.0 1 145 14.5 105Handlebar holder (upper) M8 · 1.25 4 28 2.8 20
Steering ring nut	M28 · 1.0	1	Refer to NOTE.
Front fork and cap bolt	M48 · 1.0 2	30 3.0 22
Front fork and base valve	M30 · 1.0 2	55 5.5 40
Cap bolt and damper rod (front fork)	M12 · 1.25	2	29	2.9	21
Bleed screw (front fork) and cap bolt	M5 · 0.8	2	1	0.1	0.7
Front fork and protector	M6 · 1.0	6	10	1.0	7.2
Meter cable holder and protector	M5 · 0.8	2	4	0.4	2.9
Front fork and brake hose holder	M6 · 1.0	2	10	1.0	7.2
Front fork and hose cover	M8 · 1.25	1	16	1.6	11
Front fork and hose cover	M6 · 1.0	1	7	0.7	5.1
Throttle cable cap	M5 · 0.8	2	4	0.4	2.9
Clutch lever holder	M5 · 0.8	2	4	0.4	2.9
Decompression lever holder and protector	M5 · 0.8	2	4	0.4	2.9
Lights switch	M4 · 0.7	2	2	0.2	1.4
Front brake master cylinder and bracket	M6 · 1.0	2	9	0.9	6.5
Front brake master cylinder cap	M4 · 0.7	2	2	0.2	1.4
Brake lever mounting (bolt)	M6 · 1.0	1	6	0.6	4.3
Brake lever mounting (nut)	M6 · 1.0	1	6	0.6	4.3
Brake lever position locknut	M6 · 1.0	1	5	0.5	3.6
Hose guide (front brake hose)	M5 · 0.8	2	4	0.4	2.9
Front brake hose union bolt (master cylinder)	M10 · 1.25	1	30	3.0	22
Front brake hose union bolt (caliper)	M10 · 1.25	1	30	3.0	22
Front brake caliper and front fork	M8 · 1.25 2	23 2.3 17
Brake caliper (front and rear) and pad pin plug	M10 · 1.0	1	3	0.3	2.2
Brake caliper (front and rear) and pad pin M10 · 1.0 1 18 1.8 13
Brake caliper (front and rear) and bleed screw	M8 · 1.25	1	6	0.6	4.3
Front wheel axle and nut	M16 · 1.5	1	105	10.5	75
Front wheel axle holder	M8 · 1.25 4	23 2.3 17
Front brake disc and wheel hub	M6 · 1.0	6	12	1.2	8.7
Rear brake disc and wheel hub	M6 · 1.0	6	14	1.4	10
Brake pedal mounting	M8 · 1.25 1	26 2.6 19
Rear brake master cylinder and frame	M6 · 1.0	2	10	1.0	7.2
Rear brake reservoir tank and frame	M6 · 1.0	1	10	1.0	7.2
Rear brake hose union bolt (caliper)	M10 · 1.25	1	30	3.0	22

NOTE:
1. First, tighten the ring nut approximately 38 Nm (3.8 m • kg, 27 ft • lb) by using the ring nut wrench, then loosen the ring nut one turn.
2. Retighten the ring nut 7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • lb).

Part to be tightened Thread size Q'ty			Tightening torque
			Nm m·kg ft·lb
Rear brake hose union bolt (master cylinder) M10 · 1.25 1 30 3.0 22
Rear wheel axle and nut M20 · 1.5 1 125 12.5 90
Driven sprocket and wheel hub M8 · 1.25 6 42 4.2 30
Nipple (spoke)	—	72 3	0.3	2.2
Disc cover and rear brake caliper	M6 · 1.0	2	7	0.7	5.1
Protector and rear brake caliper	M6 · 1.0	2	7	0.7	5.1
Engine mounting:
Engine bracket and frame	M8 · 1.25 7	34 3.4 24
Engine and frame (front)	M10 · 1.25	1	69	6.9	50
Engine and frame (upper)	M10 · 1.25	1	55	5.5	40
Engine and frame (lower)	M10 · 1.25	1	69	6.9	50
Engine guard (left and right)	M8 · 1.25 2	23 2.3 17
Pivot shaft and nut	M16 · 1.5 1	85 8.5 61
Relay arm and swingarm	M14 · 1.5 1	80 8.0 58
Relay arm and connecting rod	M14 · 1.5 1	80 8.0 58
Connecting rod and frame	M14 · 1.5 1	80 8.0 58
Rear shock absorber and frame	M10 · 1.25	1	56	5.6	40
Rear shock absorber and relay arm	M10 · 1.25	1	53	5.3	38
Rear frame and frame	M8 · 1.25 3	29 2.9 21
Swingarm and brake hose holder	M5 · —	4	4	0.4	2.9
Drive chain tensioner mounting	M8 · 1.25	2	19	1.9	13
Chain support and swingarm	M6 · 1.0	3	7	0.7	5.1
Seal guard and swingarm	M5 · 0.8	4	6	0.6	4.3
Fuel tank mounting	M6 · 1.0	2	10	1.0	7.2
Fuel tank and fuel cock	M6 · 1.0	2	7	0.7	5.1
Fuel tank and seat set bracket	M6 · 1.0	1	7	0.7	5.1
Fuel tank and hooking screw (fitting band)	M6 · 1.0	1	7	0.7	5.1
Fuel tank and fuel tank bracket	M6 · 1.0	4	7	0.7	5.1
Seat mounting	M8 · 1.25 2	23 2.3 17
Side cover mounting	M6 · 1.0	2	7	0.7	5.1
Air scoop and fuel tank	M6 · 1.0	4	4	0.4	2.9
Air scoop and radiator panel (lower)	M6 · 1.0	2	4	0.4	2.9
Front fender mounting	M6 · 1.0	4	7	0.7	5.1
Rear fender mounting	M6 · 1.0	4	7	0.7	5.1
Headlight stay (under) and under bracket	M6 · 1.0	2	7	0.7	5.1
Headlight	M6 · 1.0	3	7	0.7	5.1
Tail light	M6 · 1.0	3	4	0.4	2.9
Tail light lead clamp and rear fender	M4 · 1.59	2	1	0.1	0.7
Coolant reservoir tank	M6 · 1.0	2	7	0.7	5.1
Sidestand bracket and frame	M10 · 1.25	2	64	6.4	46
Sidestand mounting	M10 · 1.25	1 64	6.4 46

NOTE:
△- marked portion shall be checked for torque tightening after break-in or before each race.

FC212300

ELECTRICAL

Item Standard Limit
Ignition system:Advancer type Electrical ----
CDI:Magneto-model/manufacturer F5BF 00/YAMAHA ----Source coil 1 resistance (color) 640 ~ 960 Ω at 20 °C (68 °F)(Green – Brown)Source coil 2 resistance (color) 464 ~ 696 Ω at 20 °C (68 °F)(Green – Pink)Lighting coil resistance (color) 0.16 ~ 0.24 Ω at 20 °C (68 °F)(Black – Yellow)Pickup coil resistance (color) 248 ~ 372 Ω at 20 °C (68 °F)(White – Red)CDI unit-model/manufacturer 5GS-60/YAMAHA ----
Ignition coil:Model/manufacturer 5BE-00/YAMAHA ----Minimum spark gapPrimary winding resistanceSecondary winding resistance	6 mm (0.24 in)0.20 ~ 0.30 Ω at 20 °C (68 °F)9.5 ~ 14.3 kΩ at 20 °C (68 °F)	--------

Part to be tightened	Thread size	Q'ty	Tightening torque
			Nm	m·kg	ft·lb
Stator	M6 · 1.0	3	10	1.0	7.2
Rotor	M10 · 1.25	1	48	4.8	35
Ignition coil	M6 · 1.0	2	7	0.7	5.1

FC220001

GENERAL TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

This chart specifies torque for standard fasteners with standard I.S.O. pitch threads. Torque specifications for special components or assemblies are included in the applicable sections of this book. To avoid warpage, tighten multi-fastener assemblies in a crisscross fashion, in progressive stages, until full torque is reached. Unless otherwise specified, torque specifications call for clean, dry threads. Components should be at room temperature.

A(Nut)	B(Bolt)	TORQUE SPECIFICATION
		Nm m·kg ft·lb
10 mm	6 mm	6	0.6	4.3
12 mm	8 mm	15	1.5	11
14 mm	10 mm	30	3.0	22
17 mm	12 mm	55	5.5	40
19 mm	14 mm	85	8.5	61
22 mm	16 mm	130	13	94

A B

A: Distance between flats

B: Outside thread diameter

EC230000

DEFINITION OF UNITS

Unit Read	Definition Measure
mmcm	millimetercentimeter	10^-3 meter 10^-2 meter	LengthLength
kg kilogram 10		^3 gram Weight
N Newton 1 kg · m/sec		^2	Force
Nm m·kg	Newton meterMeter kilogram	N·m m·kg	Torque Torque
Pa Pascal N/m		^2	Pressure
N/mm Newton per millimeter N/mm		Spring rate
L cm ^3	LiterCubic centimeter	—	Volume or capacityVolume or capacity
r/min	Revolution per minute	—	Engine speed

CARACTERISTIQUES

CARACTERISTIQUES GENERALES (WR426F)

LUBRICATION DIAGRAMS

① Oil delivery pipe
② Intake camshaft
③ Exhaust camshaft
④ Oil cleaner element
⑤ Oil pump
⑥ Main axle
⑦ Drive axle

Technical schematic diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled components and directional arrows indicating motion or flow.

SCHEMAS DE GRAISSAGE

① Camshaft
② Connecting rod
③ Oil cleaner element
④ Crankshaft
⑤ Main axle
⑥ Drive axle
⑦ Oil delivery pipe

Technical schematic diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components for identification

① Hose guide
② Brake hose
③ Regulator
④ Fuel tank breather hose
⑤ Oil tank breather hose
⑥ Clamp
⑦ "ENGINE STOP" button lead
⑧ Sub wire harness
⑨ Tail light lead
⑩ TPS (throttle position sensor) lead
⑪ Neutral switch lead
⑫ Oil hose
⑬ Cylinder head breather hose
⑭ CDI magneto lead
⑮ Hose holder
⑯ Clutch cable
⑰ Decompression cable
⑱ Lights switch lead
⑲ Carburetor breather hose
⑳ Overflow hose
②1 Coolant reservoir tank breather hose

A Pass the fuel tank breather hose behind handlebar, then insert it into the steering shaft hole.
B Pass the decompression cable, "ENGINE STOP" button lead and lights switch lead under where the oil hose is attached.
C Fasten the CDI magneto lead, neutral switch lead "ENGINE STOP" button lead and lights switch lead to the frame with a plastic locking tie.
D Pass the "ENGINE STOP" button lead and lights switch lead along the inner side of the oil tank breather hose.

E Fasten the sub wire harness, "ENGINE STOP" button lead and lights switch lead to the frame in front of the protector of the sub wire harness with a plastic locking tie and cut off the tie end.
F Pass the cylinder head breather hose along the right side of the oil tank breather hose.
G Fasten the sub wire harness and "ENGINE STOP" button lead to the frame with a plastic locking tie and cut off the tie end.
H Pass the sub wire harness between the engine brackets.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components and labeled parts (A, B, C, D, etc.)

CHEMINEMENT DES

CABLES

Fasten the TPS lead (in the sub wire harness) under the frame so that it does not contact the carburetor.
☐ Fasten the TPS lead under the coupler to the frame with a plastic locking tie.
K Pass the carburetor breather hose and overflow hose between the connecting rod and cross tube (frame).
Fasten the neutral switch lead and oil hose together with a plastic locking tie.
M Fasten the neutral switch lead to the frame with a plastic band.
N Fasten the cylinder head breather hose with the hose holder.

Fasten the neutral switch lead and CDI magneto lead together with a plastic band.
P Pass the clutch cable through the cable guide.
☐ Pass the cylinder head breather hose along the inner side of the radiator pipe.
R Pass the clutch cable between the frame and radiator and over the lower boss on the radiator.
S Pass the neutral switch lead and CDI magneto lead over the middle radiator mounting boss. Then, pass the decompression cable under the middle radiator mounting boss and along the left side of the neutral switch lead and CDI magneto lead.

T Pass the clutch cable through the cable guide.
☐ Fit the brake hose into the guide on the protector.
√ Fasten the ignition coil lead (in the sub wire harness) on the upper inside of the frame and cut off the tie end.
W Pass the ignition coil lead (in the sub wire harness) under the cushion bracket (frame).
☒ Fasten the ignition coil lead (in the sub wire harness) to the frame with a plastic locking tie and cut off the tie end.
Y Pass the carburetor breather hoses and overflow hose so that all there hoses do not contact the rear shock absorber.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components and labeled parts (A, B, C, D, X, Y, W, V, U, S, T, R, P, O, N, M, K, L)

① Coolant reservoir tank breather hose
② Clamp
③ Ignition coil
④ High tension cord
⑤ CDI unit
⑥ CDI unit band
⑦ Radiator (left)
⑧ Radiator (right)
⑨ Decompression cable
⑩ CDI unit stay (frame)

A Fasten the coolant reservoir tank breather hose and carburetor breather hose together with a plastic locking tie.
B Fasten the ignition coil lead to the frame with a plastic band.
C Pass the ignition coil lead (in the sub wire harness) so that it does not contact the carburetor and rear shock absorber and connect it with the lead from the ignition coil on the inside of the frame.
☐ Fasten the ignition coil and ground lead to the frame with the bolt.
E Pass the throttle cables over the high tension cord.

F Pass the throttle cables along the outer side of the CDI unit leads.
G Using a plastic locking tie, clamp to the frame the CDI unit leads at their protecting tubes.
H Fit the boot over the coupler.
☐ Pass the throttle cables between the top radiator mounting boss and middle radiator mounting boss.
☐ Pass the CDI unit leads over the top radiator mounting boss.
K Cross the pull and return throttle cables before the radiator.
☐ Pass the throttle cables through the cable guide.
Insert the CDI unit band over the CDI unit stay (frame) as far as possible.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components and labeled parts A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M, ① to ⑩.

① Throttle cable
② Lights switch
③ Lights switch lead
④ Clamp
⑤ Decompression cable
⑥ Clutch cable
⑦ Hose guide
⑧ Trip meter
⑨ Brake hose
⑩ "ENGINE STOP" button lead

A Fasten the "ENGINE STOP" button lead to the handlebar with the plastic band.
B Pass the decompression cable between the brake hose and clutch cable.
C Pass the throttle cables between the handle crown and trip meter.
D Pass the light switch leads behind the "ENGINE STOP" button lead, then pass the head light lead (of the light switch leads) in front of the head pipe.
E Install the trip meter cable so that its bent portion faces the chassis rear.
F Install the brake hose so that it contacts the master cylinder projection and that its bent portion faces downward.

Technical schematic diagram of a mechanical device with numbered components and angular specifications

The following schedule is intended as a general guide to maintenance and lubrication. Bear in mind that such factors as weather, terrain, geographical location, and individual usage will alter the required maintenance and lubrication intervals. If you are a doubt as to what intervals to follow in maintaining and lubricating your machine, consult your Yamaha dealer.

Item	After break-in	Every race	Every third or 500 km (300 mi)	Every fifth or 1,000 km (600 mi)	As required	Remarks
ENGINE OILReplace	●			●
OIL FILTERClean	●			●
VALVESCheck the valve clearances.InspectReplace	●		●	●	●	The engine must be cold.Check the valve seats and valve stems for wear.
VALVE SPRINGSInspectReplace				●	●	Check the free length and the tilt.
VALVE LIFTERSInspectReplace				●	●	Check for scratches and wear.
CAMSHAFTSInspectReplace				●	●	Inspect the camshaft surface.
CAMSHAFT SPROCKETSInspectReplace				●	●	Check for wear on the teeth and for damage.
PISTONInspectCleanReplace				●	●●●	Inspect crackRemove carbon
PISTON RINGInspectReplace				●●	●	Check ring end gap
PISTON PINInspectReplace				●	●
CYLINDER HEADInspect and clean				●		Remove carbonChange gasket
CYLINDERInspect and cleanReplace				●	●	Inspect score marksInspect wear
CLUTCHInspect and adjustReplace	●	●			●	Inspect housing, friction plate, clutch plate and spring
TRANSMISSIONInspectReplace bearing					●●

Item	After break-in	Every race	Every third or 500 km (300 mi)	Every fifth or 1,000 km (600 mi)	As required	Remarks
SHIFT FORK, SHIFT CAM, GUIDE BAR Inspect					●	Inspect wear
ROTOR NUT Retighten	●			●
MUFFLER Inspect and retighten Clean Replace	●	●		●	●	*Whichever comes first
*SPARK ARRESTER Clean					(Every six months) ●
CRANK Inspect and clean				●	●
CARBURETOR Inspect, adjust and clean	●	●				When using a high-pressure washer, make sure that water does not enter the accelerator pump.
SPARK PLUG Inspect and clean Replace	●		●		●
DRIVE CHAIN Lubricate, slack, alignment Replace	●	●			●	Use chain lube Chain slack: 40 ~ 50 mm (1.6 ~ 2.0 in)
COOLING SYSTEM Check coolant level and leakage Check radiator cap operation Replace coolant Inspect hoses	●	●			●●	Every two years
OUTSIDE NUTS AND BOLTS Retighten	●	●				Refer to “STARTING AND BREAK-IN” section in the CHAPTER 1.
AIR FILTER Clean and lubricate Replace	●	●			●	Use foam air-filter oil
OIL STRAINER (frame) Clean				●
FRAME Clean and inspect	●	●
FUEL TANK, COCK Clean and inspect	●		●
BRAKES Adjust lever position and pedal height Lubricate pivot point Check brake disc surface Check fluid level and leakage Retighten brake disc bolts, caliper bolts, master cylinder bolts and union bolts Replace pads Replace brake fluid	●●●●●	●●●●●			●●	Every one year
Item	After break-in	Every race	Every third or 500 km (300 mi)	Every fifth or 1,000 km (600 mi)	As re-quired	Remarks
FRONT FORKS
Inspect and adjust	●	●				Suspension oil “01”
Replace oil	●			●	●
Replace oil seal
FRONT FORK OIL SEAL AND DUST SEAL						Lithium base grease
Clean and lube	●	●
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER					(After rain ride)	Molybdenum disulfide grease
Inspect and adjust	●	●	●
Lube
Retighten	●	●
CHAIN GUARD AND ROLLERS
Inspect	●	●
SWINGARM
Inspect and retighten	●	●
RELAY ARM, CONNECTING ROD						Molybdenum disulfide grease
Inspect and lube	●	●
STEERING HEAD						Lithium base grease
Inspect free play and retighten	●	●		●	●
Clean and lube
Replace bearing
TIRE, WHEELS
Inspect air pressure, wheel run-out, tire wear and spoke looseness	●	●
Retighten sprocket bolt	●	●
Inspect bearings			●		●	Lithium base grease
Replace bearings			●
Lubricate
THROTTLE, CONTROL CABLE						Yamaha cable lube or SAE 10W-30 motor oil
Check routing and connection	●	●
Lubricate	●	●

* marked: For USA

CONTROLES ET REGLAGES COURANTS

PROGRAMME D'ENTRETIEN

Before riding for break-in operation, practice or a race, make sure the machine is in good operating condition.

Before using this machine, check the following points.

GENERAL INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Item Routine Page
Coolant	Check that coolant is filled up to the radiator filler cap.Check that the coolant level is correct in the coolant reservoir tank.Check the cooling system for leakage.	P.3-5 ~ 9
Fuel	Check that a fresh gasoline is filled in the fuel tank. Check the fuel line for leakage.	P.1-13
Engine oil	Check that the oil level is correct. Check the crankcase and frame oil line for leakage.	P.3-14 ~ 18
Gear shifter and clutch	Check that gears can be shifted correctly in order and that the clutch operates smoothly.	P.3-10
Throttle grip/Housing	Check that the throttle grip operation and free play are correctly adjusted. Lubricate the throttle grip and housing, if necessary.	P.3-10 ~ 11
Brakes Check the play of front brake and effect of front and rear brake. P.3-26 ~ 32
Chain	Check chain slack and alignment. Check that the chain is lubricated properly.	P.3-33 ~ 35
Wheels	Check for excessive wear and tire pressure. Check for loose spokes and have no excessive play.	P.3-42 ~ 44
Steering	Check that the handlebar can be turned smoothly and have no excessive play.	P.3-44 ~ 45
Front forks and rear shock absorber	Check that they operate smoothly and there is no oil leakage. P.3-35 ~ 42
Cables (wires)	Check that the clutch and throttle cables move smoothly. Check that they are not caught when the handlebars are turned or when the front forks travel up and down.	—
Muffler Check that the muffler is tightly mounted and has no cracks. —
Sprocket Check that the driven sprocket tightening bolt is not loose. P.3-33
Lubrication Check for smooth operation. Lubricate if necessary. P.3-46
Bolts and nuts Check the chassis and engine for loose bolts and nuts. P.1-18
Lead connectors	Check that the CDI magneto, CDI unit, and ignition coil are connected tightly.	P.1-6
Settings	Is the machine set suitably for the condition of the racing course and weather or by taking into account the results of test runs before racing? Are inspection and maintenance completely done?	P.7-1 ~ 22

CONTROLE ET ENTRETIEN AVANT UTILISATION

Technical diagram showing a mechanical component with labeled part ① and internal spiral pattern

COOLANT FULL LOW a b

EC350000

ENGINE

COOLANT LEVEL INSPECTION

WARNING

Do not remove the radiator cap ①, drain bolt and hoses when the engine and radiator are hot. Scalding hot fluid and steam may be blown out under pressure, which could cause serious injury.

When the engine has cooled, place a thick towel over the radiator cap, slowly rotate the cap counterclockwise to the detent. This procedure allows any residual pressure to escape. When the hissing sound has stopped, press down on the cap while turning counterclockwise and remove it.

CAUTION:

Hard water or salt water is harmful to the engine parts. You may use distilled water, if you can't get soft water.

1. Place the machine on a level place, and hold it in an upright position.
2. Inspect:

- Coolant level

Coolant level should be between the maximum ⓐ and minimum ⓑ marks.

Coolant level is below the "LOW" level line Add soft water (tap water) up to the proper level.

1. Start the engine and let it warm up for several minutes.
2. Turn off the engine and check the coolant level again.

NOTE:

Before checking the coolant level, wait a few minutes until the coolant settles.

COOLANT REPLACEMENT

WARNING

Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot.

MOTEUR

CONTROLE DU NIVEAU DU LIQUIDE DE REFROIDISSEMENT

AVERTISSEMENT

Take care so that coolant does not splash on painted surfaces. If it splashes, wash it away with water.

COOLANT FULL LOW

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components labeled ①, ②, and ③.

1. Place a container under the engine.

2. Remove:

- Seat Refer to "SEAT FUEL TANK AND SIDE COVERS" section in the CHAPTER 4.

1. Disconnect:

- Coolant reservoir hose ① Drain the coolant completely.

1. Connect:

• Coolant reservoir hose

1. Remove:

- Engine guard ① - Coolant drain bolt ②

1. Remove:

- Radiator cap Drain the coolant completely.

1. Clean:

• Cooling system Thoroughly flush the cooling system with clean tap water.

1. Install:

- Copper washer New - Coolant drain bolt 10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb) - Engine guard - Bolt [engine guard (front)] 34 Nm (3.4 m · kg, 24 ft · lb) - Bolt [engine guard (rear)] 23 Nm (2.3 m · kg, 17 ft · lb)

ATTENTION:

Recommended coolant: High quality ethylene glycol anti-freeze containing anti-corrosion for aluminum engine

Coolant ① and water (soft water) ② mixing ratio: 50%/50%

Coolant capacity: 1.2 L (1.06 Imp qt, 1.27 US qt)

CAUTION:

• Do not mix more than one type of ethylene glycol antifreeze containing corrosion inhibitors for aluminum engine.
  • Do not use water containing impurities or oil.

Handling notes of coolant:

The coolant is harmful so it should be handled with special care.

WARNING

• When coolant splashes to your eye. Thoroughly wash your eye with water and see your doctor.
• When coolant splashes to your clothes. Quickly wash it away with water and then with soap.
• When coolant is swallowed. Quickly make him vomit and take him to a doctor.

COOLANT FULL LOW (a)

10. Install:

- Radiator cap

11. Fill:

- Coolant reservoir tank Midway @ between maximum and minimum marks on the tank.

9. Remplir:

• Radiateur
  • Moteur

Au niveau spécifié.

1. Start the engine and let it warm up for several minutes.

2. Turn off the engine and inspect the coolant level.

Refer to "COOLANT LEVEL INSPECTION" section.

NOTE:

Before checking the coolant level wait a few minutes until the coolant settles.

① ② ③ I4110101

① ② ③ I4110202

RADIATOR CAP INSPECTION

1. Inspect:

2. Seal (radiator cap) ①

3. Valve and valve seat ②

Crack/damage → Replace.

Fur deposits ③ → Clean or replace.

EC356001

RADIATOR CAP OPENING PRESSURE INSPECTION

1. Attach:

• Radiator cap tester ① and adapter ②

Radiator cap tester: YU-24460-01/90890-01325

Adapter: YU-33984/90890-01352

NOTE:

Apply water on the radiator cap seal.

③ Radiator cap

1. Apply the specified pressure.

Radiator cap opening pressure: 110 kPa (1.1 kg/cm ^2 , 15.6 psi)

1. Poser:

Impossible to maintain the specified pressure for 10 seconds → Replace.

Technical diagram showing a mechanical assembly with labeled parts, including a pressure gauge and tubing connections.

EC357002

COOLING SYSTEM INSPECTION

1. Inspect:

• Coolant level

1. Attach:

• Radiator cap tester ① and adapter ②

Radiator cap tester: YU-24460-01/90890-01325

Adapter: YU-33984/90890-01352

1. Apply the specified pressure.

Standard pressure: 180 kPa (1.8 kg/cm², 25.6 psi)

NOTE:

- Do not apply pressure more than specified pressure.

• Radiator should be filled fully.

1. Inspect:

- Pressure Impossible to maintain the specified pressure for 10 seconds → Repair.

• Radiator

- Radiator hose joint Coolant leakage → Repair or replace.

- Radiator hose Swelling → Replace.

CONTROLE DU SYSTEME DE REFROIDISSEMENT

KÜHLSYSTEM KONTROLLIEREN

CLUTCH ADJUSTMENT/ THROTTLE CABLE ADJUSTMENT

INSP ADJ

Technical diagram showing a hand operating a mechanical device with labeled component 'a'

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled parts, including numbered annotations for component identification.

EC359020 CLUTCH ADJUSTMENT

1. Check:

- Clutch lever free play ① Out of specification → Adjust.

Clutch lever free play ⓐ: 2 \~ 4 mm (0.08 \~ 0.16 in)

2. Adjust:

- Clutch lever free play

Clutch lever free play adjustment steps:

• Loosen the locknuts ①.
• Adjust the free play by changing their tightening position.
  • Tighten the locknuts.

NOTE:

• Make minute adjustment on the lever side using the adjuster ②.
  • After adjustment, check proper operation of clutch lever.

Technical diagram showing a mechanical component with labeled part 'a' and directional arrows indicating motion or force.

EC35A001 THROTTLE CABLE ADJUSTMENT

1. Check:

- Throttle grip free play @ Out of specification → Adjust.

Throttle grip free play ⓐ: 3 \~ 5 mm (0.12 \~ 0.20 in)

REGLAGE DE L'EMBRAYAGE

1. Contrôler:

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components, likely for assembly or maintenance reference.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components for identification

2. Adjust:

• Throttle grip free play

Throttle grip free play adjustment steps:

- Remove the throttle cable cap ① and throttle cable cover ②.

NOTE:

- Before adjusting the throttle cable free play, the engine idle speed should be adjusted. - When the motorcycle is accelerating, throttle cable #1 ③ is pulled and throttle cable #2 ④ is pushed.

1st step:

- Loosen the locknuts ⑤ on throttle cable #2. - Adjust the free play by changing their tightening position.

2nd step:

- Loosen the locknuts ⑥ on throttle cable #1. - Adjust the free play by changing their tightening position. - Tighten the locknuts.

WARNING

After adjusting, turn the handlebar to right and left and make sure that the engine idling does not run faster.

• Install the throttle cable cover and throttle cable cap.

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with numbered components and labeled parts

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled parts a and B, likely illustrating a valve or adjustment mechanism.

EC35S002

THROTTLE LUBRICATION

1. Remove:

• Rubber cover ①
- Throttle cable cap ②

2. Apply:

• Lithium soap base grease On the throttle cable end ⓐ.

3. Install:

• Throttle cable cap
• Screw (throttle cable cap)
  4 Nm (0.4 m · kg, 2.9 ft · lb)
  • Rubber cover

2. Régler:

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled parts a and b, including a hand operating a rotating component.

Technical diagram of a mechanical device with labeled parts and dimension indicators

DECOMPRESSION LEVER ADJUSTMENT

1. Check:

• Decompression lever free play

Checking steps:

• Remove the timing plug.
• Turn the crankshaft counterclockwise to align the T.D.C. mark ⓐ on the rotor with the align mark ⓑ on the crankcase cover when piston is at T.D.C. on compression stroke.
• Check the free play ©.

Free play: 5 \~ 9 mm (0.20 \~ 0.35 in)

1. Adjust:

• Decompression lever free play

Adjustment steps:

• Loosen the locknut ①.
• Turn the adjuster ② in or out until the adjustment is suitable.
  • Tighten the locknut.

CAUTION:

After the adjustment, start the engine and make sure that the engine does not stop when the handlebars are turned fully both ways. If the decompression cable is too tense, the engine will stop by the decompression system.

AIR FILTER CLEANING

NOTE:

Proper air filter maintenance is the biggest key to preventing premature engine wear and damage.

CAUTION:

Never run the engine without the air filter element in place; this would allow dirt and dust to enter the engine and cause rapid wear and possible engine damage.

REGLAGE DU LEVIER DE DECOMPRESSION

1. Contrôler:

Technical diagram of a vehicle's engine compartment with numbered parts and a highlighted component

Technical diagram showing a vehicle interior with labeled parts and a corresponding cross-sectional view of the engine.

Illustration showing three steps of a hand holding a small container, pouring liquid into a container with a tool, and finally pouring liquid into another container (no text or symbols present)

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with labeled parts (a, b, c) and numbered annotations

1. Remove:

- Seat

1. Disconnect:

• Tail light lead connectors ①

1. Remove:

• Air filter case cover ②

1. Remove:

• Fitting bolt ①

.Washer ②

• Air filter element ③

• Filter guide ④

1. Clean:

• Air filter element

Clean them with solvent.

NOTE:

After cleaning, remove the remaining solvent by squeezing the element.

CAUTION:

- Do not twist the element when squeezing the element.

• Leaving too much of solvent in the element may result in poor starting.

1. Inspect:

• Air filter element

Damage → Replace.

1. Apply:

- Foam-air-filter oil or engine mixing oil To the element.

NOTE:

Squeeze out the excess oil. Element should be wet but not dripping.

1. Install:

• Filter guide ①

NOTE:

Align the projection ⓐ on filter guide with the hole ⓑ in air filter element.

1. Déposer:

- Selle

1. Déconnecter:

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with labeled parts a and B, showing a circular cross-section with internal blades and a tool.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts (a, b, 1, 2) and numbered annotations.

9. Apply:

- Lithium soap base grease On the matching surface ⓐ on air filter element.

10. Install:

• Air filter element ①
.Washer
- Fitting bolt

2 Nm (0.2 m · kg, 1.4 ft · lb)

NOTE:

Align the projection ⓐ on filter guide with the hole ⓑ in air filter case.

ENGINE OIL LEVEL INSPECTION

1. Stand the motorcycle on a level surface.

NOTE:

• When checking the oil level make sure that the motorcycle is upright.
• Place the motorcycle on a suitable stand.

WARNING

Never remove the oil tank cap just after high speed operation. The heated oil could spurt out. causing danger. Wait until the oil cools down to approximately 70 °C (158 °F).

1. Idle the engine more than 3 minutes while keeping the motorcycle upright. Then stop the engine and inspect the oil level.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with labeled component (no text or symbols present)

3. Remove:

- Oil tank cap ①

CONTROLE DU NIVEAU D'HUILE MOTEUR MOTORÖLSTAND KONTROLLIEREN INSPECCIÓN DEL NIVEL DE ACEITE DE MOTOR

9. Appliquer:

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled parts a and b, likely illustrating a tool or component assembly.

Temp. 30 40 50 60°F B 0 5 10 15°C A

4. Inspect:

• Oil level

Oil level should be between maximum

① and minimum ② marks.

Oil level low → Add oil to proper level.

NOTE:

When inspecting the oil level, do not screw the oil level gauge into the oil tank.

Insert the gauge lightly.

(For USA and CDN)

Recommended oil:

At 5 °C (40 °F) or higher A

Yamalube 4 (20W-40) or SAE

20W-40 type SH motor oil (Non-Friction modified)

At 15 °C (60 °F) or lower B

Yamalube 4 (10W-30) or SAE

10W-30 type SH motor oil

(Non-Friction modified)

and/or

Yamalube 4-R (15W-50)

(Non-Friction modified)

CAUTION:

• Do not add any chemical additives. Engine oil also lubricates the clutch and additives could cause clutch slippage.
• Do not allow foreign material to enter the crankcase.

(Except for USA and CDN)

Recommended oil:

Refer to the following chart for selection of oils which are suited to the atmospheric temperatures.

Recommended engine oil classification:

API STANDARD:

API "SH" or higher grade (Designed primarily for motorcycles)

API SERVICE SH/CD SAE 10W-30 ENERGY CONSERVING II a b

CAUTION:

• Do not add any chemical additives or use oils with a grade of CD ⓐ or higher.
• Do not use oils labeled "ENERGY CONSERVING II" ⑥ or higher. Engine oil also lubricates the clutch and additives could cause clutch slippage.
• Do not allow foreign materials to enter the crankcase.

4. Contrôler:

When the oil tank is empty, never start the engine.

1. Idle the engine more than 10 seconds while keeping the motorcycle upright. Then stop the engine and add the oil to the maximum level.

2. Install:

- Oil tank cap

Technical diagram showing two mechanical assembly steps with labeled components

Technical diagram showing mechanical components with numbered annotations, likely illustrating a gear or valve assembly.

Technical diagram of vehicle suspension system components with numbered parts labeled 1 to 4

ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT

1. Start the engine and let it warm up for several minutes.

2. Stop the engine and place an oil pan under the drain bolt.

3. Remove:

• Oil filler plug ①
- Drain bolt (with gasket) ②
• Drain bolt (with gasket) ③
• Oil filter drain bolt (O-ring) ④

Drain the crankcase and oil tank (frame) of its oil.

1. Remove:

• Engine skidplate
• Engine oil hose clamp ①
• Bolt (engine oil hose) ②
• Engine oil hose ③
• Oil strainer (frame) ④

1. Clean:

• Oil strainer (frame)

① ③ New ② ③ New ③ New

1. If the oil filter is to be replaced during this oil change, remove the following parts and reinstall them.

Replacement steps:

• Remove the exhaust pipe.
• Remove the oil filter cover ① and oil filter element ②.
• Check the O-rings ③, if cracked or damaged, replace them with a new one.
  • Install the oil filter element and oil filter cover.

Oil filter cover: 10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

① New ② ③ ④ ⑤

7. Install:

• Plain washer ① New
  • Oil strainer (frame) ②
  90 Nm (9.0 m · kg, 65 ft · lb)
  • Engine oil hose ③
  • Bolt (engine oil hose) ④
  10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)
  • Engine oil hose clamp ⑤
  2 Nm (0.2 m · kg, 1.4 ft · lb)
  • Engine skid plate

8. Install:

• Gaskets New
• Oil filter drain bolt
10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)
• Drain bolt (crankcase)
20 Nm (2.0 m · kg, 14 ft · lb)
- Drain bolt (frame)
23 Nm (2.3 m · kg, 17 ft · lb)

9. Fill:

• Oil tank (frame)

Oil quantity:

Total amount:

1.7 L (1.50 Imp qt, 1.80 US qt)

Periodic oil change:

1.5 L (1.32 Imp qt, 1.59 US qt)

With oil filter replacement:

1.6 L (1.41 Imp qt, 1.69 US qt)

(1,41 Imp qt, 1,69 US qt)

9. Befüllen:

• Öltank (Rahmen)

Ölfüllmenge

Gesamtmenge

1,7 L

(1,41 Imp qt, 1,69 US qt)

1. Install:

• Oil filler plug

11.Inspect:

• Engine (for oil leaks)
• Oil level

Refer to "ENGINE OIL LEVEL INSPECTION".

12.Check:

• Oil pressure

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

Checking steps:

• Slightly loosen the oil gallery bolt ①.
- Start the engine and keep it idling until oil starts to seep from the oil gallery bolt. If no oil comes out after one minute, turn the engine off so it will not seize.
- Check oil passages, oil filter and oil pump for damage or leakage.
- Start the engine after solving the problem(s) and recheck the oil pressure.
• Tighten the oil gallery bolt to specification.

Oil gallery bolt: 18 Nm (1.8 m · kg, 13 ft · lb)

PILOT SCREW ADJUSTMENT

1. Adjust:

• Pilot screw ①

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

Adjusting steps:

NOTE:

To optimize the fuel flow at a smaller throttle opening, each machine's pilot screw has been individually set at the factory. Before adjusting the pilot screw, turn it in fully and count the number of turns. Record this number as the factory-set number of turns out.

• Turn in the pilot screw until it is lightly seated.
• Turn out the pilot screw by the factory-set number of turns.

Pilot screw:

WR426F: 1-5/8 turns out

* 7/8 turns out

WR400F: 1-1/2 turns out (example)

* Except for USA

IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT/ VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT

INSP ADJ

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating motion or movement

EC35M021

IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT

1. Start the engine and thoroughly warm it up.
2. Adjust:
3. Idle speed

Adjustment steps:

• Adjust the pilot screw.
  Refer to "PILOT SCREW ADJUSTMENT" section.
• Turn the throttle stop screw ① until the engine runs at the lowest possible speed.

To increase idle speed → Turn the throttle stop screw ① in ⓐ. To decrease idle speed → Turn the throttle stop screw ① out ⓑ.

Engine idling speed: 1,700 \~ 1,900 r/min

VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT

NOTE:

• The valve clearance should be adjusted when the engine is cool to the touch.
• The piston must be at Top Dead Center (T.D.C.) on compression stroke to check or adjust the valve clearance.

1. Remove:

• Seat
  • Fuel tank
  Refer to "SEAT, FUEL TANK AND SIDE COVERS" section in the CHAPTER 4.

2. Remove:

• Carburetor
Refer to "CARBURETOR" section in the CHAPTER 4.
• Spark plug cap
• Engine stay (upper)
• Cylinder head cover
Refer to "CAMSHAFTS" section in the CHAPTER 4.

3. Remove:

• Timing plug ①

• Straight plug ②

• O-ring

Technical diagram showing mechanical components with numbered labels ① and ②, likely illustrating a gear or cam mechanism.

Out of specification → Adjust.

Valve clearance (cold):

Intake valve:

0.10 \~ 0.15 mm (0.0039 \~ 0.0059 in)

Exhaust valve:

0.20 \~ 0.25 mm (0.0079 \~ 0.0098 in)

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled parts and directional arrow indicating motion or movement

Technical diagram of a mechanical gear assembly with labeled components A, B, C, D and E

Technical diagram of a vehicle's internal components with labeled parts 'e' and directional arrows indicating flow or movement.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with hands and components (no text or symbols)

Checking steps:

- Turn the crankshaft counterclockwise with a wrench.

NOTE:

Squeezing the decompressor lever allows the crankshaft to be turned easily.

- Align the T.D.C. mark ⓐ on the rotor with the align mark ⓑ on the crankcase cover when piston is at T.D.C. on compression stroke.

NOTE:

In order to be sure that the piston is at Top Dead Center, the punch mark © on the exhaust camshaft and the punch mark ⓐ on the intake camshaft must align with the cylinder head surface, as shown in the illustration.

- Measure the valve clearance ⓔ using a feeler gauge ①.

NOTE:

Record the measured reading if the clearance is incorrect.

REGLAGE DU JEU DE SOUPAPES

Technical diagram of an engine cylinder with labeled components and wiring

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with numbered components, likely illustrating a gear or valve mechanism.

Technical diagram of an engine cylinder with numbered components for assembly or maintenance reference.

EX IN

a 175

5. Adjust:

- Valve clearance

Adjustment steps:

• Loosen the timing chain tensioner cap bolt.
• Remove the timing chain tensioner and camshaft caps.

NOTE:

Remove the camshaft cap bolts in a criss-cross pattern from the outside working inwards.

- Remove the camshaft (intake ① and exhaust ②).

NOTE:

Attach a wire ③ to the timing chain to prevent it from falling into the crankcase.

• Remove the decompression guide ④, cable ⑤, bolt ⑥ and decompression shaft ⑦.
• Remove the valve lifters ⑧ and the pads ⑨.

NOTE:

• Place a rag in the timing chain space to prevent pads from falling into the crank-case.
• Identity each valve lifter and pad position very carefully so that they can be reinstalled in their original place.
• Select the proper pad using the pad selecting table.

Pad range		Pad Availability: 25 increments
No. 120 ~ No. 240	1.20 mm ~ 2.40 mm	Pads are available in 0.05 mm increments

NOTE:

The thickness ⓐ of each pad is indicated in hundreths of millimeters on the pad upper surface.

5. Régler:

- Jeu de soupapes

Etapes du réglage:

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating assembly or movement.

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with numbered components and a labeled component 'E'

• Round off the last digit of the installed pad number to the nearest increment.
Last digit of pad number	Rounded value
0 or 2 0
5	(NOT ROUNDED OFF)
8	10
EXAMPLE:Installed pad number = 148Rounded off value = 150NOTE:Pads can only be selected in 0.05 mm increments.
• Locate the rounded-off value and the measured valve clearance in the chart “PAD SELECTION TABLE”. The field where these two coordinates intersect shows the new pad number to use.
NOTE:Use the new pad number only as a guide when verifying the valve clearance adjustment.
• Install the new pads 10 and the valve lift-ers 11.
NOTE:• Apply the engine oil on the valve lifters.• Apply the molybdenum disulfide oil on the valve stem ends.• Valve lifter must turn smoothly when rotated with a finger.• Be careful to reinstall valve lifters and pads in their original place.
• Install the decompression shaft 12, plain washer 13, bolt 14, guide 15, bolt 16 and decompression cable 17.
NOTE:Apply the engine oil on the decompression shaft.
	Bolt (decompression shaft):7 Nm (0.7 m · kg, 5.1 ft · lb)Bolt (guide):10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

REGLAGE DU JEU DE SOUPAPES

- Install the camshafts (exhaust and intake), the timing chain and the camshaft caps. Refer to "CAMSHAFTS" section in the CHAPTER 4.

Bolt (camshaft cap): 10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

- Install the timing chain tensioner. Refer to "CAMSHAFTS" section in the CHAPTER 4.

NOTE: Turn the crankshaft counterclockwise several turns so that the installed parts settle into the right position.

- Recheck the valve clearance. - If the clearance is still incorrect, repeat all the clearance adjustment steps until the specified clearance is obtained.

1. Install:

- All removed parts

NOTE: ____ Install all removed parts in reversed order of their removal. Note the following points.

REGLAGE DU JEU DE SOUPAPES

• Be sure the exhaust pipe and muffler are cool before cleaning the spark arrester.
• Do not start the engine when cleaning the exhaust system.

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with numbered components and labeled parts

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with flange and bolt, no visible text or symbols

1. Remove:

• Bolt (spark arrester) ①

2. Remove:

- Spark arrester ① Pull the spark arrester out of the muffler.

3. Clean:

- Spark arrester Tap the spark arrester lightly, then use a wire brush to remove any carbon deposits.

4. Install:

- Spark arrester Insert the spark arrester into the muffler and align the bolt holes.

• Bolt (spark arrester)

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

Bleed the brake system if:

. The system has been disassembled.
• A brake hose has been loosened or removed.
• The brake fluid is very low.
• The brake operation is faulty.

A dangerous loss of braking performance may occur if the brake system is not properly bleed.

A ① ②

B ① ②

1. Remove:

• Master cylinder cap
• Diaphragm
• Protector (rear brake)

1. Bleed:

- Brake fluid

A Front

B Rear

Air bleeding steps:

a. Add proper brake fluid to the reservoir.
b. Install the diaphragm. Be careful not to spill any fluid or allow the reservoir to overflow.
c. Connect the clear plastic tube ② tightly to the caliper bleed screw ①.
d. Place the other end of the tube into a container.
e. Slowly apply the brake lever or pedal several times.
f. Pull the lever in or push down on the pedal. Hold the lever or pedal in position.
g. Loosen the bleed screw and allow the lever or pedal to travel towards its limit.
h. Tighten the bleed screw when the lever or pedal limit has been reached; then release the lever or pedal.

Bleed screw:

6 Nm (0.6 m · kg, 4.3 ft · lb)

i. Repeat steps (e) to (h) until of the air bubbles have been removed from the system.

PARTIE CYCLE

PURGE DE L'AIR DU SYSTEME DE FREINAGE

AVERTISSEMENT

If bleeding is difficult, it may be necessary to let the brake fluid system stabilize for a few hours. Repeat the bleeding procedure when the tiny bubbles in the system have disappeared.

j. Add brake fluid to the level line on the reservoir.

WARNING

Check the operation of the brake after bleeding the brake system.

3. Install:

• Protector (rear brake)
• Diaphragm
• Master cylinder cap

Technical line drawing of a mechanical lever mechanism with no text or symbols

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with labeled parts 1 and 2

EC362040

Brake lever position adjustment steps:Loosen the locknut 1.Turn the adjusting bolt 2 until the lever position @ is within specified position.Tighten the locknut.
	Locknut:5 Nm (0.5 m • kg, 3.6 ft • lb)
CAUTION:Be sure to tighten the locknut, as it will cause poor brake performance.

CAUTION:

REGLAGE DE FREIN AVANT VORDERRADBREMSE EINSTELLEN AJUSTE DEL FRENO DELANTERO

INSP ADJ

N.B.:

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components labeled ①, ②, and ©

A ③ ④ b

B ③ ⑤ C

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled parts and dimension annotations

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

FC364002

Out of specification → Adjust.

Brake pedal height ⓐ: 5 mm (0.20 in)

2. Adjust:

- Brake pedal height

Pedal height adjustment steps:

• Loosen the locknut ①.
• Turn the adjusting nut ② until the pedal height ④ is within specified height.
  • Tighten the locknut.

WARNING

- Adjust the pedal height between the maximum A and the minimum B as shown. (In this adjustment the bolt ③ end ⑥ should protrude out of the lower adjusting nut ④ but not be less than 2 mm (0.08 in) © away from the brake pedal ⑤). - After the pedal height adjustment, make sure that the rear brake does not drag.

EC365080

FRONT BRAKE PAD INSPECTION AND REPLACEMENT

1. Inspect:

- Brake pad thickness ⓐ

Out of specification → Replace as a set.

Brake pad thickness ⓐ:

Standard
4.4 mm(0.17 in)	1.0 mm(0.04 in)

2. Replace:

- Brake pad

Brake pad replacement steps:

- Remove the pad pin plug ①.

REGLAGE DU FREIN ARRIERE

1. Contôler:

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components for identification

Technical diagram showing a mechanical assembly with numbered component 5, likely illustrating a repair or mounting process.

Technical diagram showing hands operating a mechanical device with numbered parts labeled ⑥ and ⑦

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled parts (a, b) and numbered annotations (8)

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components for identification

• Loosen the pad pin ②.
• Remove the brake hose holder ③ and caliper ④ from the front fork.
• Remove the pad pin and brake pads ⑤.
• Connect the transparent hose ⑥ to the bleed screw ⑦ and place the suitable container under its end.
• Loosen the bleed screw and push the caliper piston in.

CAUTION:

Do not reuse the drained brake fluid.

• Tighten the bleed screw.

Bleed screw: 6 Nm (0.6 m · kg, 4.3 ft · lb)

• Install the brake pads ⑧ and pad pin.

NOTE:

• Install the brake pads with their projections ① into the caliper recesses ②.

• Temporarily tighten the pad pin at this point.

• Install the brake hose holder ⑨ and caliper ⑩ and tighten the pad pin ⑪.

NOTE:

Fit the brake hose holder cut © over the projection ⓐ on the front fork and clamp the brake hose.

Bolt (caliper): 23 Nm (2.3 m · kg, 17 ft · lb) Pad pin: 18 Nm (1.8 m · kg, 13 ft · lb)

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

• Install the pad pin plug ⑫. Pad pin plug: 3 Nm (0.3 m • kg, 2.2 ft • lb)

3. Inspect:

- Brake fluid level

Refer to "BRAKE FLUID LEVEL INSPECTION" section.

4. Check:

- Brake lever operation

A softly or spongy feeling → Bleed brake system.

Refer to "BRAKE SYSTEM AIR BLEEDING" section.

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled parts 'a' and directional arrows indicating movement or force.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components labeled ①, ②, and ③.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components for identification

EC366060

REAR BRAKE PAD INSPECTION AND REPLACEMENT

1. Inspect:

- Brake pad thickness @

Out of specification → Replace as a set.

Brake pad thickness ⓐ: Standard 6.4 mm (0.25 in) 1.0 mm (0.04 in)

2. Replace:

- Brake pad

Brake pad replacement steps:

• Remove the protector ① and pad pin plug ②.
• Loosen the pad pin ③.
• Remove the rear wheel ④ and caliper ⑤. Refer to “FRONT WHEEL AND REAR WHEEL” section in the CHAPTER 5.

Technical diagram showing hands operating a mechanical device with numbered parts labeled ⑥ and ⑦

Technical diagram showing hands operating a mechanical component with numbered parts labeled ⑧ and ⑨

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly steps with numbered components and a magnified detail view labeled 'a'

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components for identification

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components labeled 15 and 16

• Remove the pad pin ⑥ and brake pads ⑦.
• Connect the transparent hose ⑧ to the bleed screw ⑨ and place the suitable container under its end.
• Loosen the bleed screw and push the caliper piston in.

CAUTION:

Do not reuse the drained brake fluid.

• Tighten the bleed screw.

Bleed screw: 6 Nm (0.6 m · kg, 4.3 ft · lb)

• Install the brake pad ⑩ and pad pin ⑪.

NOTE:

• Install the brake pads with their projections ① into the caliper recesses ②.
• Temporarily tighten the pad pin at this point.

• Install the caliper ⑫ and rear wheel ⑬. Refer to “FRONT WHEEL AND REAR WHEEL” section in the CHAPTER 5.
• Tighten the pad pin ⑭.

Pad pin: 18 Nm (1.8 m · kg, 13 ft · lb)

• Install the pad pin plug ⑮ and protector ⑯.

Pad pin plug: 3 Nm (0.3 m · kg, 2.2 ft · lb) Bolt (protector): 7 Nm (0.7 m · kg, 5.1 ft · lb)

Boulon (protection):

7 Nm

Technical line drawing of three mechanical clip components (no text or symbols)

A a T LWR B a a UPPER LOWER

3. Inspect:

- Brake fluid level

Refer to "BRAKE FLUID LEVEL INSPECTION" section.

4. Check:

- Brake pedal operation

A softly or spongy feeling → Bleed brake system.

Refer to "BRAKE SYSTEM AIR BLEEDING" section.

EC36b000

REAR BRAKE PAD INSULATOR INSPECTION

1. Remove:

- Brake pad

Refer to "REAR BRAKE PAD INSPECTION AND REPLACEMENT" section.

2. Inspect:

- Rear brake pad insulator ① Damage → Replace.

EC367001

1. Place the master cylinder so that its top is in a horizontal position.

2. Inspect:

- Brake fluid level

Fluid at lower level → Fill up.

(a) Lower level

A Front

B Rear

Recommended brake fluid: DOT #4

WARNING

• Use only designated quality brake fluid to avoid poor brake performance.
• Refill with same type and brand of brake fluid; mixing fluids could result in poor brake performance.
• Be sure that water or other contaminants do not enter master cylinder when refilling.
• Clean up spilled fluid immediately to avoid erosion of painted surfaces or plastic parts.

3. Vérifier:

Illustration of a hand using a chain tag to process granular material on a tray (no text or symbols)

① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑩ a 12510206

graph TD
    A["Start"] --> B["Chain"]
    B --> C{Interaction Point}
    C --> D["End"]
    subgraph Position
        E["a"] --> F["Intermediate Node 1"]
        G["a"] --> H["Intermediate Node 2"]
    end
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#cfc,stroke:#333

FC368000

SPROCKETS INSPECTION

1. Inspect:

- Sprocket teeth ⓐ Excessive wear → Replace.

NOTE:

Replace the drive, driven sprockets and drive chain as a set.

DRIVE CHAIN INSPECTION

1. Remove:

• Master link clip
• Joint ①
• O-rings ②
• Drive chain ③

1. Clean:

- Drive chain Place it in kerosene, and brush off as much dirt as possible. Then remove the chain from the kerosene and dry the chain.

1. Measure:

- Drive chain length (10 links) ⓐ Out of specification → Replace.

Drive chain length (10 links): Limit: 150.1 mm (5.91 in)

1. Check:

- Drive chain stiffness ⓐ Clean and oil the chain and hold as illustrated. Stiff → Replace drive chain.

CONTROLE DES PIGNONS

1. Contrôler:

• Dent de pignon ⓐ

Usure excessive → Changer.

N.B.:

Diagram illustrating mechanical assembly steps with labeled components and a new component, likely from an engineering or manufacturing context.

Illustration of a hand using a tool to chain a gear, showing mechanical components (no text or symbols)

1. Install:

2. Drive chain ①
   • Joint ②
   • Master link clip ③

New

CAUTION:

Be sure to install the master link clip to the direction as shown.

① Turning direction

1. Lubricate:

- Drive chain

Drive chain lubricant: SAE 10W-30 motor oil or suitable chain lubricants

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled component 'a' and directional arrow

EC36A060

DRIVE CHAIN SLACK ADJUSTMENT

1. Elevate the rear wheel by placing the suitable stand under the engine.
2. Check:

- Drive chain slack ⓐ

Above the seal guard installation bolt.

Out of specification → Adjust.

Drive chain slack: 40 \~ 50 mm (1.6 \~ 2.0 in)

NOTE:

Before checking and/or adjusting, rotate the rear wheel through several revolutions and check the slack several times to find the tightest point. Check and/or adjust chain slack with rear wheel in this "tight chain" position.

REGLAGE DE LA FLECHE DE CHAINE DE TRANSMISSION

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components labeled ①, ②, and ③.

3. Adjust:

- Drive chain slack

Drive chain slack adjustment steps:Loosen the axle nut 1 and locknuts 2.Adjust chain slack by turning the adjusters 3.
To tighten → Turn adjuster 3 counterclockwise.To loosen → Turn adjuster 3 clockwise and push wheel forward.
Turn each adjuster exactly the same amount to maintain correct axle alignment.(There are marks @ on each side of chain puller alignment.)NOTE:Turn the adjuster so that the chain is in line with the sprocket, as viewed from the rear.CAUTION:Too small chain slack will overload the engine and other vital parts; keep the slack within the specified limits.Tighten the axle nut while pushing down the drive chain.
	Axle nut:125 Nm (12.5 m · kg, 90 ft · lb)
Tighten the locknuts.

Technical line drawing of a bicycle wheel assembly with a hand operating the wheel (no text or symbols)

EC36C000

FRONT FORK INSPECTION

1. Inspect:

- Front fork smooth action Operate the front brake and stroke the front fork. Unsmooth action/oil leakage → Repair or replace.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical clamp or bracket assembly (no text or symbols)

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled parts a and b, including a tool and gear mechanism.

S-H ① ② a

FC36D001

FRONT FORK OIL SEAL AND DUST SEAL CLEANING

1. Remove:

• Protector
• Dust seal ①

NOTE:

Use a thin screw driver, and be careful not to damage the inner fork tube and dust seal.

1. Clean:

• Dust seal ⓐ
• Oil seal ⓑ

NOTE:

• Clean the dust seal and oil seal after every run.
• Apply the lithium soap base grease on the inner tube.

EC36H002

FRONT FORK REBOUND DAMPING FORCE ADJUSTMENT

1. Adjust:

- Rebound damping force By turning the adjuster ①.

Stiffer a → Increase the rebound damping force. (Turn the adjuster 1 in.)

Softer b → Decrease the rebound damping force. (Turn the adjuster 1 out.)

	Extent of adjustment:
Maximum Minimum
Fully turned in position		20 clicks out (from maximum position)

NETTOYAGE DE BAGUE D'ETANCHEITE ET DE JOINT ANTIPOUSSIERE DE FOURCHE AVANT

1. Déposer:

This is the position which is back by the specific number of clicks from the fully turned-in position.

Standard position:

8 clicks out

*12 clicks out

* For EUROPE

CAUTION:

Do not force the adjuster past the minimum or maximum extent of adjustment. The adjuster may be damaged.

WARNING

Always adjust each front fork to the same setting. Uneven adjustment can cause poor handling and loss of stability.

EC36J001

FRONT FORK COMPRESSION DAMPING FORCE ADJUSTMENT

1. Remove:

• Rubber cap

1. Adjust:

- Compression damping force By turning the adjuster ①.

Stiffer ⓐ → Increase the compression damping force. (Turn the adjuster ① in.)

Softer ⑥ → Decrease the compression damping force. (Turn the adjuster ① out.)

Extent of adjustment:

Maximum Minimum

Fully turned in position

20 clicks out (from maximum position)

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating rotation or movement.

• POSITION STANDARD:

This is the position which is back by the specific number of clicks from the fully turned-in position.

Standard position:

7 clicks out

*14 clicks out

* For EUROPE

CAUTION:

Do not force the adjuster past the minimum or maximum extent of adjustment. The adjuster may be damaged.

WARNING

Always adjust each front fork to the same setting. Uneven adjustment can cause poor handling and loss of stability.

1. Install:

• Rubber cap

Mechanical assembly diagram showing gear and chain components with an arrow indicating motion direction (no text or labels)

EC36K000

REAR SHOCK ABSORBER INSPECTION

1. Inspect:

• Swingarm smooth action

Abnormal noise/unsmooth action → Grease the pivoting points or repair the pivoting points.

Damage/oil leakage → Replace.

CONTROLE DE L'AMORTISSEUR ARRIERE FEDERBEIN KONTROLLIEREN INSPECCIÓN DEL AMORTIGUADOR TRASERO

INSP ADJ

• POSITION STANDARD:

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts ① and ②, showing components like a spring and housing.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical spring assembly with dimension label (a), no text or symbols present

EC36M013

REAR SHOCK ABSORBER SPRING PRELOAD ADJUSTMENT

1. Elevate the rear wheel by placing the suitable stand under the engine.
2. Remove:

• Rear frame

1. Loosen:

- Locknut ①

1. Adjust:

- Spring preload By turning the adjuster ②.

Stiffer → Increase the spring preload. (Turn the adjuster 2 in.)

Softer → Decrease the spring preload. (Turn the adjuster 2 out.)

	Spring length (installed) @:
Standard length Extent of adjustment
241 mm (9.49 in)*244 mm (9.61 in)		240.5 ~ 258.5 mm(9.47 ~ 10.18 in)

* For EUROPE

NOTE:

• Be sure to remove all dirt and mud from around the locknut and adjuster before adjustment.
• The length of the spring (installed) changes 1.5 mm (0.06 in) per turn of the adjuster.

CAUTION:

Never attempt to turn the adjuster beyond the maximum or minimum setting.

1. Tighten:
2. Locknut
3. Install:
   • Rear frame

29 Nm (2.9 m · kg, 21 ft · lb)

REGLAGE DE LA PRECON- TRAINTE DE RESSORT DE

- Rebound damping force By turning the adjuster ①.

Stiffer a → Increase the rebound damping force. (Turn the adjuster 1 in.)

Softer b → Decrease the rebound damping force. (Turn the adjuster 1 out.)

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled parts (a, b) and directional arrows indicating motion or movement.

S H a b

• STANDARD POSITION:

This is the position which is back by the specific number of clicks from the fully turned-in position. (Which align the punch mark ⓐ on the adjuster with the punch mark ⓑ on the bracket.)

Standard position: About 10 clicks out

CAUTION:

Do not force the adjuster past the minimum or maximum extent of adjustment. The adjuster may be damaged.

REGLAGE DE LA FORCE D'AMORTISSEMENT DE REBOND DE L'AMORTISSEUR ARRIERE

1. Régler:

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating motion or movement.

EC36c000

REAR SHOCK ABSORBER LOW COMPRESSION DAMPING FORCE ADJUSTMENT

1. Adjust:

- Low compression damping force By turning the adjuster ①.

Stiffer ① → Increase the low compression damping force. (Turn the adjuster 1 in.)

Softer ⑥ → Decrease the low compression damping force. (Turn the adjuster 1 out.)

	Extent of adjustment:
Maximum Minimum
Fully turned in position		20 clicks out (from maximum position)

a b

• STANDARD POSITION:

This is the position which is back by the specific number of clicks from the fully turned-in position. (Which align the punch mark ① on the adjuster with the punch mark ⑥ on the high compression damping adjuster.)

Standard position: About 10 clicks out *About 12 clicks out

* For EUROPE

CAUTION:

Do not force the adjuster past the minimum or maximum extent of adjustment. The adjuster may be damaged.

REGLAGE DE LA FORCE D'AMORTISSEMENT A BASSE COMPRESSION DE L'AMORTIS- SEUR ARRIERE

1. Régler:

Technical diagram showing a mechanical assembly with labeled parts (a, b) and numbered annotations (①, ②)

EC36d000

REAR SHOCK ABSORBER HIGH COMPRESSION DAMPING FORCE ADJUSTMENT

1. Adjust:

• High compression damping force By turning the adjuster ①.

Stiffer a → Increase the high compression damping force. (Turn the adjuster 1 in.)

Softer b → Decrease the high compression damping force. (Turn the adjuster 1 out.)

	Extent of adjustment:
Maximum Minimum
Fully turned in position		2 turns out (from maximum position)

a b

• STANDARD POSITION:

This is the position which is back by the specific number of turns from the fully turned-in position. (Which align the punch mark ⓐ on the adjuster with the punch mark ⓑ on the adjuster body.)

Standard position:

About 1-1/4 turns out

*About 1-1/2 turns out

* For EUROPE

CAUTION:

Do not force the adjuster past the minimum or maximum extent of adjustment. The adjuster may be damaged.

REGLAGE DE LA FORCE D'AMORTISSEMENT A HAUTE COMPRESSION DE L'AMORTIS- SEUR ARRIERE

1. Régler:

Line drawing of hands holding a pressure gauge with a probe inserted (no text or symbols)

EC36Q000

TIRE PRESSURE CHECK

1. Measure:

• Tire pressure

Out of specification → Adjust.

Standard tire pressure: 100 kPa (1.0 kg/cm ^2 , 15 psi)

NOTE:

• Check the tire while it is cold.
• Loose bead stoppers allow the tire to slip off its position on the rim when the tire pressure is low.
  • A tilted tire valve stem indicates that the tire slips off its position on the rim.
• If the tire valve stem is found tilted, the tire is considered to be slipping off its position. Correct the tire position.

12010801

EC36S002

SPOKES INSPECTION AND TIGHTENING

1. Inspect:

• Spokes ①

Bend/damage → Replace.

Loose spoke → Retighten.

1. Tighten:

• Spokes

3 Nm (0.3 m · kg, 2.2 ft · lb)

NOTE:

Be sure to retighten these spokes before and after break-in. After a practice or a race check spokes for looseness.

Diagram of a hand using a tool to drive a gear and wheel assembly (no text or symbols)

EC36T000

WHEEL INSPECTION

1. Inspect:

- Wheel runout

Elevate the wheel and turn it.

Abnormal runout → Replace.

CONTROLE DE PRESSION DES

PNEUS

1. Mesurer:

(1,0 kg/cm², 15 psi)

N.B.:

(1,0 kg/cm², 15 psi)

NOTA:

Voile excessif → Changer.

RÄDER KONTROLLIEREN

1. Messen:

• Felgenschlag

Diagram of a mechanical assembly with hands and rotating components (no text or symbols)

Diagram of a hand using a tool to lift a wheel, showing rotational motion with arrows (no text or symbols)

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts ① and ②

1. Inspect:

• Bearing free play

Exist play → Replace.

STEERING HEAD INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT

1. Elevate the front wheel by placing a suitable stand under the engine.
2. Check:

• Steering shaft

Grasp the bottom of the forks and gently rock the fork assembly back and forth.

Free play → Adjust steering head.

1. Check:

• Steering smooth action

Turn the handlebar lock to lock.

Unsmooth action → Adjust steering ring nut.

1. Adjust:

• Steering ring nut

Steering ring nut adjustment steps:

• Remove the headlight.
• Remove the handlebar and handle crown.
• Loosen the ring nut ① using the ring nut wrench ②.

Ring nut wrench: YU-33975/90890-01403

Hakenschlüssel YU-33975/90890-01403

4. Ajustar:

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components labeled ③ and ④

⑩ ⑨ ⑦ ⑥ ⑤ ⑧ a FWD

Loosen the ring nut one turn.Retighten the ring nut using the ring nut wrench.WARNINGAvoid over-tightening.
	Ring nut (final tightening):7 Nm (0.7 m · kg, 5.1 ft · lb)
Check the steering shaft by turning it lock to lock. If there is any binding, remove the steering shaft assembly and inspect the steering bearings.Install the handle crown 5, steering shaft nut 6, handlebar 7, handlebar holder 8 and headlight 9.NOTE:The upper handlebar holder should be installed with the punched mark a forward.Insert the end of fuel breather hose 10 into the hole of the steering shaft.CAUTION:First tighten the bolts on the front side of the handlebar holder, and then tighten the bolts on the rear side.
	Steering shaft nut:145 Nm (14.5 m · kg, 105 ft · lb)Handlebar upper holder:28 Nm (2.8 m · kg, 20 ft · lb)Pinch bolt (handle crown):23 Nm (2.3 m · kg, 17 ft · lb)Headlight:7 Nm (0.7 m · kg, 5.1 ft · lb)

• Loosen the ring nut one turn.
• Retighten the ring nut using the ring nut wrench.
• Loosen the ring nut one turn.
• Retighten the ring nut using the ring nut wrench.
• Loosen the ring nut one turn.
• Retighten the ring nut using the ring nut wrench.
• Loosen the ring nut one turn.
• Retighten the ring nut using the ring nut wrench.
• Loosen the ring nut one turn.
• Retighten the ring nut using the ring nut wrench.
• Loosen the ring nut one turn.
• Retighten the ring nut using the ring nut wrench.
• Loosen the ring nut one turn.
• Retighten the ring nut using the ring nut wrench.
• Loosen the ring nut one turn.
• Retighten the ring nut using the ring nut wrench.
• Loosen the ring nut one turn.
• Retighten the ring nut using the ring nut wrench.
  |
  |
  |
  |
  |
  |
  |
  |
  |
• Loosen the ring nut one turn.
• Retighten the ring nut using the ring nut wrench.
  |
  |
  |
  |
  |
  |
  |
  |

Hakenschlüssel YU-33975/90890-01403

To ensure smooth operation of all components, lubricate your machine during setup, after break-in, and after every race.

① All control cable
② Clutch lever pivot
③ Shift pedal pivot
④ Footrest pivot
⑤ Throttle-to-handlebar contact
⑥ Drive chain
⑦ Tube guide cable winding portion
⑧ Throttle cable end
⑨ Clutch cable end
⑩ Decompression cable end

A Use Yamaha cable lube or equivalent on these areas.
B Use SAE10W-30 motor oil or suitable chain lubricants.
C Lubricate the following areas with high quality, lightweight lithium-soap base grease.

CAUTION:

Wipe off any excess grease, and avoid getting grease on the brake discs.

A A A A A A B C C

GRAISSAGE

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with labeled parts ① and ②, showing a shaft and housing assembly.

EC370000

ELECTRICAL

EC371001

SPARK PLUG INSPECTION

1. Remove:

• Spark plug

1. Inspect:

- Electrode ①

Wear/damage → Replace.

• Insulator color ②

Normal condition is a medium to light tan color.

Distinctly different color → Check the engine condition.

NOTE:

When the engine runs for many hours at low speeds, the spark plug insulator will become sooty, even if the engine and carburetor are in good operating condition.

1. Measure:

• Plug gap ⓐ

Use a wire gauge or thickness gauge.

Out of specification → Re-gap.

Spark plug gap:

0.7 \~ 0.8 mm (0.028 \~ 0.031 in)

1. Clean the plug with a spark plug cleaner if necessary.

NGK b a 18040301

1. Tighten:

- Spark plug

13 Nm (1.3 m · kg, 9.4 ft · lb)

NOTE:

• Before installing a spark plug, clean the gasket surface and plug surface.
• Finger-tighten ① the spark plug before torquing to specification ⑥.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

Line drawing of a mechanical assembly with hands operating a tool on a component (no text or symbols)

IGNITION TIMING CHECK

1. Remove:

- Timing plug ①

1. Attach:

- Timing light

- Inductive tachometer

To the spark plug lead.

Timing light: YM-33277-A/90890-03141

Inductive tachometer: YU-08036-B

Engine tachometer: 90890-03113

1. Check:

- Ignition timing

a H b

Checking steps:• Start the engine and let it warm up. Let the engine run at the specified speed.
	Engine speed:1,700 ~ 1,900 r/min
• Visually check the stationary pointer ⓐ is within the firing range ⓑ on the rotor.Incorrect firing range → Check rotor and pickup assembly.

1. Install:

- Timing plug

CONTROLE DE L'AVANCE A L'ALLUMAGE

1. Déposer:

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components, likely illustrating a gear or cam mechanism.

REPLACING THE HEADLIGHT BULBS

1. Remove:

- Headlight Refer to "SEAT, FUEL TANK AND SIDE COVERS" section in the CHAPTER 4.

1. Remove:

• Headlight bulb holder cover ①

1. Detach:

• Headlight bulb holder ①

1. Remove:

• Headlight bulb ②

WARNING

Since the headlight bulb gets extremely hot, keep flammable products and your hands away from the bulb unit it has cooled down.

1. Install:

- Headlight bulb New Secure the new headlight bulb with the headlight bulb holder.

CAUTION:

Avoid touching the glass part of the headlight bulb to keep it free form oil, otherwise the transparency of the glass, the life of the bulb and the luminous flux will be adversely affected. If the headlight bulb gets soiled, thoroughly clean it with a cloth moistened with alcohol or lacquer thinner.

1. Attach:

• Headlight bulb holder

1. Install:

• Headlight bulb holder cover

1. Install:

• Headlight

7 Nm (0.7 m · kg, 5.1 ft · lb)

Refer to "SEAT, FUEL TANK AND SIDE COVERS" section in the CHAPTER 4.

REMPLACER LES AMPOULES DU PHARE

1. Déposer:

• Phare

Technical diagram of a vehicle front panel with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating movement or change.

ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHT BEAMS

1. Adjust:

• Headlight beam (vertically)

Adjusting steps:Turn the adjusting screw 1 in direction a or b.

Direction @ Headlight beam is raised.

Direction b Headlight beam is lowered.

REGLAGES DES FAISCEAUX DES PHARES

1. Régler:

③ Side covers removal

④ Headlight removal

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
Preparation for removal		SEAT, FUEL TANK AND SIDE COVERS REMOVALTurn the fuel cock to “OFF”.Disconnect the fuel hose.
1↓3↓2↓3↓4↓	1 Seat 12 Air scoop (left and right) 23 Fitting band 1 Remove on fuel tank side.4 Bolt (fuel tank) 25 Fuel tank 16 Side cover (left) 17 Side cover (right) 18 Headlight coupler 19 Headlight 1

SELLE, RESERVOIR A ESSENCE ET CACHES LATERAUX SITZBANK, KRAFTSTOFFTANK UND SEITENABDECKUNGEN ASIENTO, DEPOSITO DE COMBUSTIBLE Y CUBIERTAS LATERALES

MOTEUR

SELLE, RESERVOIR A ESSENCE ET CACHES LATERAUX

A For USA
B Except for USA
Extent of removal:
① Silencer removal
② Exhaust pipe removal

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
Preparation for removal	Side cover (right) Refer to “SEAT, FUEL TANK AND SIDE COVERS” section.
12	1 Bolt (clamp) 1 Only loosening.2 Bolt [silencer (front)] 13 Bolt [silencer (rear)] 14 Silencer 15 Clamp 16 Nut (exhaust pipe) 17 Bolt (exhaust pipe) 18 Exhaust pipe 19 Gasket	2

TUYAU D'ECHAPPEMENT ET SILENCIEUX

A Pour l'USA

Technical line drawing of a pipe fitting with a magnified inset showing a ring detail (no text or symbols)

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components, likely for assembly or maintenance instructions.

INSPECTION

Exhaust pipe and silencer

1. Inspect:

- Gasket ①

Damage → Replace.

ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION Exhaust pipe and silencer

1. Install:

• Gasket New
- Exhaust pipe ①
• Nut (exhaust pipe) ②

13 Nm (1.3 m · kg, 9.4 ft · lb)

• Bolt (exhaust pipe) ③

First, temporarily tighten the nut (exhaust pipe), then tighten the bolt (exhaust pipe) 20 Nm (2.0 m·kg, 14 ft·lb). After that, retighten the nut (exhaust pipe) 13 Nm (1.3 m·kg, 9.4 ft·lb) and then the bolt (exhaust pipe) 24 Nm (2.4 m·kg, 17 ft·lb).

Technical diagram of a vehicle's front suspension system with numbered components and a 'New' label

2. Install:

- Clamp ①

② Coolant reservoir removal

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
Preparation for removal		RADIATOR REMOVALDrain the coolant.Seat, fuel tank and side cover Refer to “SEExhaust pipe Refer to “EXHAUST	Refer to “COOLANT REPLACEMENT” section in the CHAPTER 3.AT, FUEL TANK AND SIDE COVERS” section.PIPE AND SILENCER” section.
1	1 Engine guard (right) 12 Panel 23 Clamp 84 Radiator (right) 15 Hose 2 16 Hose 3 17 Hose 4 18 Pipe 2/O-ring9 Radiator breather hose10 Radiator (left)	1/111	1

RADIATEUR

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
	11 Hose 1 112 Pipe 1/O-ring 1/113 Coolant reservoir hose 114 Coolant reservoir tank

Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine and radiator are hot. Scalding hot fluid and steam may be blown out under pressure, which could cause serious injury.

When the engine has cooled, open the radiator cap by the following procedure:

Place a thick rag, like a towel, over the radiator cap, slowly rotate the cap counterclockwise to the detent. This procedure allows any residual pressure to escape.

When the hissing sound has stopped, press down on the cap while turning counterclockwise and remove it.

Diagram illustrating a mechanical or structural assembly with labeled component ①, showing layered structure and magnified detail.

Technical diagram showing labeled mechanical components with numbered annotations

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with numbered components, likely illustrating a vehicle or automotive assembly.

EC454000

INSPECTION

EC444100

Radiator

1. Inspect:

- Radiator core ① Obstruction → Blow out with compressed air through rear of the radiator. Bent fin → Repair/replace.

EC455000

ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION

Radiator

1. Install:

• Pipe 1 ① 10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb) • Hose 1 ② 2 Nm (0.2 m · kg, 1.4 ft · lb) • Pipe 2 ③ 10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

• Hose 3 ④ 2 Nm (0.2 m · kg, 1.4 ft · lb) • Hose 4 ⑤ 2 Nm (0.2 m · kg, 1.4 ft · lb)

1. Install:

• Hose 2 ① 2 Nm (0.2 m · kg, 1.4 ft · lb) • Radiator (left) ② 10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

REMARQUES CONCERNANT LA MANIPULATION

AVERTISSEMENT

Technical diagram showing two views of a vehicle engine cylinder with labeled parts, likely illustrating engine components or assembly.

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled parts and numbered annotations

3. Install:

• Radiator breather hose ①
• Radiator (right) ②

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

Refer to "CABLE ROUTING DIAGRAM" section in the CHAPTER 2.

4. Install:

• Panel ①
• Bolt (radiator panel upper) ②

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

NOTE:

Fit the hook ⓐ on the inner side first into the radiator.

3. Monter:

A WR426F
B WR400F
Extent of removal: ① Carburetor removal

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
Preparation for removal	Fuel tank	CARBURETOR REMOVALRefer to “SEAT, FUEL TANK AND SIDE	SIDE	COVERS” section.
	1 Clamp 12 Band 13 TPS coupler 14 Throttle cable cover 15 Throttle cable 26 Throttle cable cap 17 Clamp (air cleaner joint)8 Clamp (carburetor joint)9 Carburetor10 Carburetor joint	1 Loosen the screw (air cleaner joint).2 Loosen the screws (carburetor joint).1

CARBURATEUR

A WR426F
B WR400F

A WR426F
B WR400F
Extent of removal: ① Carburetor disassembly

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
1	CARBURETOR DISASSEMBLY1 Breather hose 42 Valve lever housing cover 13 Screw (throttle shaft) 14 Throttle valve 15 Needle holder 16 Jet needle 17 Accelerator pump cover 18 Spring (accelerator pump) 19 Diaphragm (accelerator pump) 110 Air cut valve cover 111 Spring (air cut valve)12 Diaphragm (air cut valve)13 Float chamber	111

DEMONTAGE DU CARBURATEUR

A WR426F
B WR400F

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with labeled components (no text or symbols present)

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

EC466020

HANDLING NOTE

CAUTION:

Do not loosen the screws {TPS (throttle position sensor)} ① except when changing the TPS (throttle position sensor) due to failure because it will cause a drop in engine performance.

REMOVAL POINTS

Pilot screw

1. Remove:

• Pilot screw ①

NOTE:

To optimize the fuel flow at a small throttle opening, each machine's pilot screw has been individually set at the factory. Before removing the pilot screw, turn it in fully and count the number of turns. Record this number as the factory-set number of turns out.

Line drawing of a hand using a tool to adjust or install a mechanical component (no text or symbols present)

INSPECTION

Carburetor

1. Inspect:

• Carburetor body

Contamination → Clean.

NOTE:

- Use a petroleum based solvent for cleaning. Blow out all passages and jets with compressed air.

- Never use a wire.

REMARQUE CONCERNANT LES MANIPULATIONS

ATTENTION:

Diagram showing exploded view of a mechanical component with numbered parts labeled 1 through 6

2. Inspect:

• Main jet ①
• Pilot jet ②
- Needle jet ③
- Starter jet ④
• Main air jet ⑤
• Pilot air jet ⑥

Damage → Replace.

Contamination → Clean.

NOTE:

• Use a petroleum based solvent for cleaning. Blow out all passages and jets with compressed air.
• Never use a wire.

Technical diagram showing three labeled mechanical components with annotations a, b, and c indicating different parts of a device.

EC464210

Needle valve

1. Inspect:

2. Needle valve ①

3. Valve seat ②

Grooved wear ⓐ → Replace.

Dust ⓑ and Ⓒ → Clean.

NOTE:

Replace the needle valve and valve seat as a set.

EC464300

Throttle valve

1. Check:

• Free movement

Stick → Repair or replace.

Insert the throttle valve ① into the carburetor body, and check for free movement.

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with labeled parts and directional arrow indicating assembly or movement.

Diagram of a laboratory probe with labeled parts and an inset showing a thermometer-like device with numbered parts.

EC464400

Jet needle

1. Inspect:

• Jet needle ①
Bends/wear → Replace.
- Clip groove
Free play exists/wear → Replace.
- Clip position

Standard clip position:

No.4 Groove

2. Contrôler:

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

Technical line drawing of a mechanical clamp or clamp device with two components and a labeled part (b), no text or symbols present.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical clamp device with two components and a numbered connection point (no text or symbols)

EC464511

Float height

1. Measure:

• Float height ⓐ

Out of specification → Adjust.

Float height: 8.0 mm (0.31 in)

Measurement and adjustment steps:

- Hold the carburetor in an upside down position.

NOTE:

• Slowly tilt the carburetor in the opposite direction, then take the measurement when the needle valve aligns with the float arm.
• If the carburetor is level, the weight of the float will push in the needle valve, resulting in an incorrect measurement.
  • Measure the distance between the mating surface of the float chamber and top of the float using a vernier calipers.

NOTE:

The float arm should be resting on the needle valve, but not compressing the needle valve.

• If the float height is not within specification, inspect the valve seat and needle valve.
  • If either is worn, replace them both.
• If both are fine, adjust the float height by bending the float tab ⑥ on the float.
  • Recheck the float height.

EC464600

Float

1. Inspect:

• Float ①

Damage → Replace.

Hauteur du flotteur

1. Mesurer:

Technical diagram of two mechanical fasteners with labeled parts, showing threaded ends and a dial indicator.

Technical diagram of mechanical components with numbered parts for identification

Technical diagram of automotive suspension components with numbered parts for identification

Technical diagram of mechanical components with numbered parts labeled ①, ②, ③, and ④

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components labeled ① and ②

Starter plunger

1. Inspect:

• Cold starter plunger ①
• Hot starter plunger (red) ②

Wear/damage → Replace.

Accelerator pump

1. Inspect:

• Diaphragm (accelerator pump) ①
• Spring (accelerator pump) ②
• Accelerator pump cover ③
• O-ring ④
• Push rod ⑤

Tears (diaphragm)/damage → Replace.

Dirt → Clean.

1. Inspect:

2. Throttle shaft ①
   • Spring ②

3. Lever 1 ③
   • Spring 1 ④
   • Lever 2 ⑤
   • Spring 2 ⑥

Dirt → Clean.

Air cut valve

1. Inspect:

• Diaphragm (air cut valve) ①
• Spring (air cut valve) ②
• Air cut valve cover ③
• O-ring ④

Tears (diaphragm)/damage →

Replace.

ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION Carburetor

1. Install:

• Hot starter plunger (red) ①
• Cold starter plunger ②

Plongeur de starter

1. Contrôler:

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with numbered parts and labeled features

Technical diagram of a mechanical clamp or spring assembly with labeled parts ①, ②, and ③

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with labeled parts ① and ②

Technical diagram of automotive engine components with labeled parts a, b, and numbered annotations

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts, showing components like springs and a clamp.

2. Install:

• Main air jet ①
• Pilot air jet ②
- Intake joint ③

5 Nm (0.5 m · kg, 3.6 ft · lb)

3. Install:

• Spring 1 ①
- Lever 1 ②

To lever 2 ③.

NOTE: ____

Make sure the spring 1 fits on the stopper @ of the lever 2.

4. Install:

• Spring 2 ①

To lever 2 ②.

5. Install:

- Push rod link lever assembly ①

NOTE:

Make sure the stopper ⓐ of the spring 2 fits into the recess ⓑ in the carburetor.

6. Install:

• Plain washer ①
  • Circlip ②

2. Monter:

Technical diagram of a car suspension system with labeled components

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components and a magnified inset showing detail view

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts including gears, springs, and adjustment knobs

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components, likely for repair or maintenance instructions.

7. Install:

•Spring ①
• Joint collar ②

To throttle shaft ③.

NOTE: Install the bigger hook ⓐ of the spring fits on the stopper Ⓑ of the throttle shaft pulley.

8. Install:

• Throttle shaft assembly ①
- Plain washer (metal) ②
- Plain washer (resin) ③
- Valve lever ④

NOTE:

• Fit the projection Ⓐ on the throttle shaft assembly into the slot ⓑ in the TPS (throttle position sensor).
• Make sure the stopper © of the spring fits into the recess in the carburetor.
• Turn the throttle shaft assembly left while holding down the lever 1 ⑤ and fit the throttle stop screw tip ⓑ to the stopper Ⓔ of the throttle shaft assembly pulley.

9. Install:

- Push rod ①

NOTE:

While holding down the lever 1 ②, insert the push rod farthest into the carburetor.

7. Installer:

• Ressort ①

- Manchette de joint ②

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components for identification

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components labeled ① to ④

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components for identification

10. Install:

• Starter jet ①
  • Pilot jet ②
• Spacer ③
• Needle jet ④
  • Main jet ⑤

11. Install:

• Valve seat
• Screw (valve seat) ①
• Needle valve ②
  • Float ③
• Float pin ④

NOTE:

• After installing the needle valve to the float, install them to the carburetor.
- Check the float for smooth movement.

12. Install:

• Pilot screw ①
• Spring ②
- Washer ③
• O-ring ④

Note the following installation points:

• Turn in the pilot screw until it is lightly seated.
• Turn out the pilot screw by the number of turns recorded before removing.

Pilot screw:

WR426F: 1-5/8 turns out

*7/8 turns out

WR400F: 1-1/2 turns out (example)

* Except for USA

A ① ② ③ ④ ④ B

13. Install:

• O-ring
- Float chamber ①
• Screw (float chamber) ②
- Cable holder (throttle stop screw cable) ③
- Hose holder (carburetor breather hose) ④

A WR426F

B WR400F

10. Monter:

Umdrehun- gen heraus

(Beispiel)

* Nicht USA

13. Montieren:

Technical diagram of engine components with numbered parts labeled 1 through 5

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components and cross-sectional views

Technical diagram of a mechanical device with numbered parts labeled 1 through 6

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with numbered components and cross-sectional views

Technical diagram of a mechanical device with numbered components labeled ①, ②, and ③.

14. Install:

• Diaphragm (air cut valve) ①
• Spring (air cut valve) ②
• O-ring ③
• Air cut valve cover ④
• Screw (air cut valve cover) ⑤

15. Install:

• Diaphragm (accelerator pump) ①
• Spring ②
. O-ring ③
• Cover ④
• Screw (cover) ⑤

NOTE:

Install the diaphragm (accelerator pump) with its mark @ facing the spring.

16. Install:

• Jet needle ①
• Collar ②
• Spring ③
- Needle holder ④
- Throttle valve plate ⑤ To throttle valve ⑥.

17. Install:

• Throttle valve assembly ①
• Screw (throttle shaft) ②

NOTE:

Install the valve lever rollers ③ into the slits ⓐ of the throttle valve.

18. Install:

• O-ring ①
- Valve lever housing cover ②
• Bolt (valve lever housing cover) ③

14. Monter:

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled parts (a) and (b), likely from an engineering drawing.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts and a circular annotation indicating a specific component.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components and labeled parts

1. Install:

- Carburetor breather hose ① Refer to “CABLE ROUTING DIAGRAM” section in the CHAPTER 2.

NOTE: Install the breather hose to the carburetor so that the hose does not bend near where it is installed.

A WR426F B WR400F

Carburetor installation

1. Install:

• Carburetor joint ①

3 Nm (0.3 m · kg, 2.2 ft · lb)

NOTE: Install the projection ⓐ on the cylinder between the carburetor joint slots ⓑ.

1. Install:

• Carburetor ①

NOTE: Install the projection between the carburetor joint slots.

1. Tighten:

- Screw (air cleaner joint) ① - Screw (carburetor joint) ② - 3 Nm (0.3 m · kg, 2.2 ft · lb) - 3 Nm (0.3 m · kg, 2.2 ft · lb)

1. Monter:

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled parts, likely for vehicle maintenance or assembly instructions

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts, including numbered annotations ① and ②.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components, likely illustrating a valve or clamp mechanism.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing engine components and wiring (no text or labels)

1. Install:

• Throttle cable cap ①

1. Install:

• Throttle cable ①

1. Adjust:

- Throttle grip free play Refer to "THROTTLE CABLE ADJUSTMENT" section in the CHAPTER 3.

1. Install:

• Throttle cable cover ①

• Screw (throttle cable cover) ②

4 Nm (0.4 m · kg, 2.9 ft · lb)

NOTE:

Install the throttle cable cover with its pawl ⓐ hung on the carburetor.

1. Install:

- TPS (throttle position sensor) coupler ①

- Band ② Refer to "CABLE ROUTING DIAGRAM" section in the CHAPTER 2.

1. Install:

- Clamp ① Refer to “CABLE ROUTING DIAGRAM” section in the CHAPTER 2.

4. Monter:

Extent of removal: ① Cylinder head cover removal

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
Preparation for removal	Seat and CYLINDER HEAD COVER REMOVALfuel tank Refer to “SEAT, FUEL TANK AND SIDE CARBURETOR Refer to “CARBURETOR” section.		SIDE COVERS” section.
1	1 Spark plug 12 Engine upper bracket (right) 13 Engine upper bracket (left) 14 Cylinder head breather hose 15 Oil tank breather hose 16 Bolt (cylinder head cover) 27 Cylinder head cover8 Gasket9 Timing chain guide (upper)	1111

ARBRES A CAMES

COUVERCLE DE CULASSE

Extent of removal: ① Camshaft removal

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
1	CAMSHAFTS REMOVAL1 Timing plug 12 Straight plug 13 Tensioner cap bolt 14 Timing chain tensioner 15 Gasket 16 Bolt (camshaft cap) 107 Camshaft cap 28 Clip 29 Dowel pin 410 Exhaust camshaft11 Intake camshaft	11	Refer to “REMOVAL POINTS”.

ARBRES A CAMES

Technical diagram showing mechanical components with numbered labels ① and ②, likely illustrating a gear or cam mechanism.

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled components and directional arrow indicating rotation or movement

C d E I E I

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with numbered parts, likely illustrating a tool or component assembly.

Technical diagram of an engine cylinder with labeled components and parts, showing internal gears and shafts.

REMOVAL POINTS

Camshaft

1. Remove:

• Timing plug ①
• Straight plug ②

1. Align:

- "l" mark

With stationary pointer.

Checking steps:

• Turn the crankshaft counterclockwise with a wrench.
• Align the "I" mark ⓐ on the rotor with the stationary pointer ⓑ on the crankcase cover. When the "I" mark is aligned with the stationary pointer, the piston is at the Top Dead Center (T.D.C.).

NOTE:

• In order to be sure that the piston is at Top Dead Center, the punch mark © on the exhaust camshaft and the punch mark ⓓ on the intake camshaft must align with the cylinder head surface, as shown in the illustration.

• If there is no clearance, rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise one turn.

• Loosen:

• Tensioner cap bolt ①

1. Remove:

• Timing chain tensioner ②

1. Remove:

• Bolt (camshaft cap) ①
- Camshaft caps ②

NOTE:

Remove the bolts (camshaft cap) in a criss-cross pattern, working from the outside in.

CAUTION:

The bolts (camshaft cap) must be removed evenly to prevent damage to the cylinder head, camshafts or camshaft caps.

POINTS DE DEPOSE

Arbre à cames

1. Déposer:

Technical diagram of an engine cylinder with labeled components and wiring

a 11151001

b 11151002

6. Remove:

• Clips
• Dowel pins
• Exhaust camshaft ①
- Intake camshaft ②

NOTE:

Attach a wire ③ to the timing chain to prevent it from falling into the crankcase.

INSPECTION

Camshaft

1. Inspect:

- Cam lobes Pitting/scratches/blue discoloration → Replace.

2. Measure:

- Cam lobes length ⓐ and ⓑ Out of specification → Replace.

Cam lobes length:

Intake:

a 31.7 \~ 31.8 mm
b 22.95 \~ 23.05 mm

$$ (1. 2 4 8 0 \sim 1. 2 5 2 0 \text { in }) $$

$$ < \text {Limit} >: 3 1. 6 \mathrm{mm} (1. 2 4 4 \text {in}) $$

$$ (0. 9 0 3 5 \sim 0. 9 0 7 5 \text { in }) $$

$$ < \text {Limit} >: 2 2. 8 5 \mathrm{mm} (0. 9 0 0 \mathrm{in}) $$

Exhaust:

a 31.2 \~ 31.3 mm
⑥ 22.95 \~ 23.05 mm

$$ (1. 2 2 8 3 \sim 1. 2 3 2 3 \text { in }) $$

$$ < \text {Limit} >: 3 1. 1 \mathrm{mm} (1. 2 2 4 \text {in}) $$

$$ (0. 9 0 3 5 \sim 0. 9 0 7 5 \text { in }) $$

$$ < \text {Limit} >: 2 2. 8 5 \mathrm{mm} (0. 9 0 0 \mathrm{in}) $$

11151402

3. Measure:

- Runout (camshaft) Out of specification → Replace.

Runout (camshaft):

Less than 0.03 mm (0.0012 in)

6. Déposer:

- Camshaft-to-cap clearance Out of specification → Measure bearing diameter (camshaft)

Camshaft-to-cap clearance:

0.020 \~ 0.054 mm

(0.0008 \~ 0.0021 in)

: 0.08 mm (0.003 in)

Technical diagram of a vehicle engine component with labeled parts and numbered annotation

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components and directional arrows indicating parts of the component.

Illustration of hands using a mechanical tool to adjust a cylindrical component (no text or symbols present)

Technical line drawing of two mechanical gears with a labeled connection point (no text or symbols beyond the number 1)

Measurement steps:

• Install the camshaft onto the cylinder head.
- Position a strip of Plastigauge® ① onto the camshaft.
• Install the circlip, dowel pins and camshaft caps.

Bolt (camshaft cap): 10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

NOTE:

• Tighten the bolts (camshaft cap) in a crisscross pattern from innermost to outer caps.
• Do not turn the camshaft when measuring clearance with the Plastigauge®.
• Remove the camshaft caps and measure the width of the Plastigauge® ①.

5. Measure:

• Bearing diameter (camshaft) ⓐ

Out of specification → Replace the camshaft.

Within specification → Replace camshaft case and camshaft caps as a set.

Bearing diameter (camshaft):

21.967 \~ 21.980 mm

(0.8648 \~ 0.8654 in)

Camshaft sprocket

1. Inspect:

• Camshaft sprocket ①

Wear/damage → Replace the camshaft assembly and timing chain as a set.

4. Mesurer:

Illustration of a hand holding a mechanical component with a tool, showing motion direction (no text or symbols)

Line drawing of a hand holding a tool with an arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts, including gears and a valve marked 'M'

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled parts and directional arrow indicating motion or force

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled components (c, d, E) and numbered parts

Timing chain tensioner

1. Check:

• While pressing the tensioner rod lightly with fingers, use a thin screwdriver ① and wind the tensioner rod up fully clockwise.
• When releasing the screwdriver by pressing lightly with fingers, make sure that the tensioner rod will come out smoothly.
• If not, replace the tensioner assembly.

ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION

1. Install:

• Exhaust camshaft ①
- Intake camshaft ②

Installation steps:

• Turn the crankshaft counterclockwise until the "l" mark ⓐ on the rotor is aligned with the stationary pointer ⓑ on the crankcase cover.
• Fit the timing chain ③ onto both camshaft sprockets and install the camshafts on the cylinder head.

NOTE:

The camshafts should be installed onto the cylinder head so that the exhaust cam sprocket punch mark © and the intake cam sprocket punch mark ⓐ align with the surface of the cylinder head.

CAUTION:

Do not turn the crankshaft during the camshaft installation. Damage or improper valve timing will result.

Technical diagram of an engine cylinder with labeled components and parts, including numbered callouts and a warning label 'E'

• Install the dowel pins, clips and camshaft caps ④.

Bolt (camshaft cap): 10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

NOTE:

Tighten the bolts (camshaft cap) ⑤ in a crisscross pattern.

CAUTION:

The bolts (camshaft cap) must be tightened evenly or damage to the cylinder head, camshaft caps and camshaft will result.

Illustration of a hand holding a mechanical component with a tool, showing a curved arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols present)

New ① a ③ O A ② ③

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with numbered components labeled 4 and 5

2. Install:

• Timing chain tensioner

Installation steps:

• While pressing the tensioner rod lightly with fingers, use a thin screwdriver and wind the tensioner rod up fully clockwise.
- With the rod fully wound and the chain tensioner UP mark ④ facing upward, install the gasket ① and the chain tensioner ②, and tighten the bolt ③ to the specified torque.

Bolt (timing chain tensioner): 10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

- Release the screwdriver, check the tensioner rod to come out and tighten the gasket ④ and the cap bolt ⑤ to the specified torque.

Tensioner cap bolt: 7 Nm (0.7 m · kg, 5.1 ft · lb)

3. Turn:

• Crankshaft Counterclockwise several turns

4. Check:

- Rotor "I" mark Align with the crankcase stationary pointer. - Camshaft match marks Align with the cylinder head surface. Out of alignment → Adjust.

Extent of removal: ① Cylinder head removal

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
Preparation for removal	Seat and	CYLINDER HEAD REMOVALfuel tank Refer to “SEAT, FUEL TANK AND Exhaust pipe and silencer Refer to “EXHAUST PIPE AND Radiator Refer to “RADIATOR” section. Carburetor Refer to “CARBURETOR” section. Camshaft Refer to “CAMSHAFTS” section.		SIDE COVERS” section.UST PIPE AND SILENCER” section.
	1	Decompression cable 12 Cable guide 13 Bolt 14 Decompression shaft5 Oil delivery pipe6 Nut (M6)7 Nut (M8)8 Bolt (L = 150 mm)9 Bolt (L = 160 mm)10 Cylinder head	1122221

CULASSE

CULASSE

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with a tool inserted, showing internal cavities and mounting holes (no text or symbols)

INSPECTION

Cylinder head

1. Eliminate:

• Carbon deposits (from the combustion chambers)

Use a rounded scraper.

NOTE:

Do not use a sharp instrument to avoid damaging or scratching:

• Spark plug threads

- Valve seats

2. Inspect:

• Cylinder head

Scratches/damage → Replace.

Technical line drawing of an engine cylinder head with bolt holes and internal components (no text or labels)

3. Measure:

• Cylinder head warpage

Out of specification → Resurface.

Cylinder head warpage: Less than 0.05 mm (0.002 in)

Warpage measurement and resurface-ment steps:

• Place a straightedge and a feeler gauge across the cylinder head.
• Use a feeler gauge to measure the warpage.
• If the warpage is out of specification, resurface the cylinder head.
• Place a 400 \~ 600 grit wet sandpaper on the surface plate, and resurface the head using a figure-eight sanding pattern.

NOTE:

To ensure an even surface rotate the cylinder head several times.

CONTROLE

Culasse

1. Eliminer:

Technical diagram of an engine cylinder with numbered components for identification

ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION

1. Install:

• Cylinder head
• Bolts (1 \~ 4)

44 Nm (4.4 m · kg, 32 ft · lb)

• Nuts (5, 6)

Follow the numerical order shown in the illustration. Tighten the bolts and nuts in two stages.

ASSEMBLAGE ET MONTAGE

1. Monter:

• Culasse

• Boulon (1 à 4)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 New 8 9 M E E New

Extent of removal: ① Valve removal

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
Preparation for removal Cylinder head Refer to “CYLINDER HEAD” section.
1	1 Valve lifter 52 Adjusting pad 53 Valve cotter 104 Valve retainer 55 Valve spring 56 Stem seal 57 Valve spring seat 58 Exhaust valve 29 Intake valve	3	Use special tool.Refer to “REMOVAL POINTS”.

SOUPAPES ET RESSORTS DE SOUPAPE

SOUPAPES ET RESSORTS DE SOUPAPE

EX IN ① ②

Technical diagram of a mechanical valve assembly with numbered components

① 11171201

REMOVAL POINTS

1. Remove:

2. Valve lifters ①
   • Pads ②

NOTE:

Identify each lifter ① and pad ② position very carefully so that they can be reinstalled in their original place.

1. Check:

- Valve sealing

Leakage at the valve seat → Inspect the valve face, valve seat and valve seat width.

Checking steps:

• Pour a clean solvent ① into the intake and exhaust ports.

• Check that the valve seals properly. There should be no leakage at the valve seat ②.

• Remove:

- Valve cotters

NOTE:

Attach a valve spring compressor ① between the valve spring retainer and the cylinder head to remove the valve cotters.

Valve spring compressor:

YM-04019/90890-04019

POINTS DE DEPOSE

1. Déposer:

Technical diagram of a dial indicator with labeled component 'a' and directional arrow

b 11172102

Technical diagram showing a mechanical assembly with labeled component ①

Technical diagram showing a hand operating a mechanical device with labeled parts ① and ②

③ I1170601

INSPECTION

Valve

1. Measure:

• Stem-to-guide clearance

Stem-to-guide clearance = valve guide inside diameter ① – valve stem diameter ②

Out of specification → Replace the valve guide.

Clearance (stem to guide):

Intake:

0.010 \~ 0.037 mm

(0.0004 \~ 0.0015 in)

: 0.08 mm (0.003 in)

Exhaust:

0.020 \~ 0.047 mm

(0.0008 \~ 0.0019 in)

: 0.10 mm (0.004 in)

1. Replace:

- Valve guide

Replacement steps:

NOTE:

To ease guide removal, installation and to maintain correct fit heat the cylinder head in an over to 100 °C (212 °F).

• Remove the valve guide using a valve guide remover ①.
  • Install the new valve guide using a valve guide remover ① and valve guide installer ②.
  • After installing the valve guide, bore the valve guide using a valve guide reamer ③ to obtain proper stem-to-guide clearance.

CONTROLE

Soupape

1. Mesurer:

Intake 4.5 mm (0.18 in)

YM-4116/90890-04116

Exhaust 5.0 mm (0.20 in)

YM-4097/90890-04097

Valve guide installer:

Intake

YM-4117/90890-04117

Exhaust

YM-4098/90890-04098

Valve guide reamer:

Intake 4.5 mm (0.18 in)

YM-4118/90890-04118

Exhaust 5.0 mm (0.20 in)

YM-4099/90890-04099

NOTE:

After replacing the valve guide reface the valve seat.

3. Inspect:

- Valve face

Pitting/wear → Grind the face.

- Valve stem end

Mushroom shape or diameter larger than the body of the stem → Replace.

a 45°

4. Measure:

• Margin thickness ⓐ

Out of specification → Replace.

Margin thickness:

Intake:

1.0 mm (0.039 in)

: 0.85 mm (0.033 in)

Exhaust:

1.0 mm (0.039 in)

: 0.85 mm (0.033 in)

Escape 5,0 mm (0,20 in)

YM-4097/90890-04097

Escape 5,0 mm (0,20 in)

YM-4099/90890-04099

NOTA:

Technical diagram of a mechanical testing setup with a dial indicator and rotating component (no text or symbols)

a 11171603

Simple line drawing of a circular object with a labeled point 'b' and vertical line, no text or symbols present.

5. Measure:

Out of specification → Replace.

Runout limit:

0.01 mm (0.0004 in)

NOTE:

• When installing a new valve always replace the guide.
• If the valve is removed or replaced always replace the oil seal.

6. Eliminate:

• Carbon deposits

(from the valve face and valve seat)

7. Inspect:

- Valve seats

Pitting/wear → Reface the valve seat.

8. Measure:

- Valve seat width ⓐ

Out of specification → Reface the valve seat.

Valve seat width:

Intake:

0.9 \~ 1.1 mm (0.0354 \~ 0.0433 in)

: 1.6 mm (0.0630 in)

Exhaust:

0.9 \~ 1.1 mm (0.0354 \~ 0.0433 in)

: 1.6 mm (0.0630 in)

Measurement steps:

• Apply Mechanic's blueing dye (Dykem) ⑥ to the valve face.
  • Install the valve into the cylinder head.
• Press the valve through the valve guide and onto the valve seat to make a clear pattern.
• Measure the valve seat width. Where the valve seat and valve face made contact, blueing will have been removed.
• If the valve seat is too wide, too narrow, or the seat is not centered, the valve seat must be refaced.

5. Mesurer:

After refacing the valve seat or replacing the valve and valve guide, the valve seat and valve face should be lapped.

Simple line drawing of a circular object with two vertical lines above it, no text or symbols present.

M

Technical line drawing of a mechanical device with rotating shaft and base (no text or symbols)

Lapping steps:

- Apply a coarse lapping compound to the valve face.

CAUTION:

Do not let the compound enter the gap between the valve stem and the guide.

• Apply molybdenum disulfide oil to the valve stem.
  • Install the valve into the cylinder head.
• Turn the valve until the valve face and valve seat are evenly polished, then clean off all of the compound.

NOTE:

For best lapping results, lightly tap the valve seat while rotating the valve back and forth between your hands.

- Apply a fine lapping compound to the valve face and repeat the above steps.

NOTE:

After every lapping operation be sure to clean off all of the compound from the valve face and valve seat.

• Apply Mechanic's blueing dye (Dykem) to the valve face.
  • Install the valve into the cylinder head.
• Press the valve through the valve guide and onto the valve seat to make a clear pattern.
• Measure the valve seat width again. If the valve seat width is out of specification, reface and relap the valve seat.

9. Roder:

Out of specification → Replace.

Free length (valve spring):

Intake:

41.36 mm (1.63 in)

: 39.3 mm (1.55 in)

Exhaust:

43.60 mm (1.72 in)

: 41.4 mm (1.63 in)

1. Measure:

• Compressed spring force ⓐ

Out of specification → Replace.

⑥ Installed length

Compressed spring force:

Intake:

11.5 \~ 13.2 kg at 32.87 mm

(25.35 \~ 29.10 lb at 1.29 in)

Exhaust:

11.9 \~ 13.7 kg at 35.38 mm

(26.23 \~ 30.20 lb at 1.39 in)

a 11171903

Simple line drawing of a cylinder (no text or symbols)

1. Measure:

• Spring tilt ⓐ

Out of specification → Replace.

Spring tilt limit:

Intake:

2.5°/1.8 mm (0.071 in)

Exhaust:

2.5°/1.9 mm (0.075 in)

Valve lifter

1. Inspect:

- Valve lifter

Scratches/damage → Replace both lifters and cylinder head.

Ressort de soupape

1. Mesurer:

Technical diagram showing a mechanical component with labeled parts (a) and (b), alongside a 3D view of a cylindrical container.

Combination of cylinder head and valve lifter

1. Combination:

For this combination, match the paint color on the cylinder head with that on the valve lifter according to the chart below.

Combination
Cylinder head mark ⓐ (color)	Valve lifter mark ⓑ (color)
Blue Blue
Yellow Yellow
Purple Black

NOTE:

When you purchase a cylinder head, you cannot designate its size. Choose the valve lifter that matches the above chart.

ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION

1. Apply:

• Molybdenum disulfide oil Onto the valve stem and valve stem seal.

a b b

2. Install:

• Valves ①
• Valve spring seats ②
• Valve stem seals ③
  • Valve springs ④
• Valve spring retainers ⑤
  New

NOTE:

- Make sure that each valve is installed in its original place, also referring to the painted color as follows.

Intake (middle) ⓐ: light blue

Intake (right/left) ⓑ: white

Exhaust: not paint

• Install the valve springs with the larger pitch © facing upward.

(d) Smaller pitch

① ⑤ ④ ③ New ② ③ d c M

Technical diagram of a mechanical clamp or clamping device with internal components and a labeled part (1), no readable text or symbols present.

Line drawing of a hand using a tool to press or inspect internal components on an engine block (no text or symbols)

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating motion or movement.

3. Install:

- Valve cotters

NOTE:

While compressing the valve spring with a valve spring compressor ① install the valve cotters.

Valve spring compressor: YM-04019/90890-04019

1. To secure the valve cotters onto the valve stem, lightly tap the valve tip with a piece of wood.

CAUTION:

Hitting the valve tip with excessive force could damage the valve.

5. Install:

• Adjusting pad ①
  • Valve lifter ②

NOTE:

• Apply the engine oil on the valve lifters.
• Apply the molybdenum disulfide oil on the valve stem end.
• Valve lifter must turn smoothly when rotated with a finger.
• Be careful to reinstall valve lifters and pads in their original place.

SOUPAPES ET RESSORTS DE SOUPAPE VENTILE UND VENTILFEDERN VÁLVULAS Y MUELLES DE VÁLVULA

ENG

3. Monter:

Extent of removal: ① Cylinder removal ② Piston removal

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
Preparation for removal Cylinder head Refer to "CYLINDER HEAD" section.
1↓2	1 Bolt (cylinder) 12 Cylinder 13 Gasket 14 Dowel pin 25 Dowel pin/O-ring 1/16 Piston pin clip 27 Piston pin 18 Piston 19 Piston ring set	1	Use special tool.Refer to "REMOVAL POINTS".

CYLINDRE ET PISTÓN ZYLINDER UND KOLBEN CILINDRO Y PISTÓN

ENG

CYLINDRE ET PISTON

CYLINDRE ET PISTON

Technical line drawing of a piston assembly with labeled component (no text or symbols present)

③ ② ④ 11221001

REMOVAL POINTS

Piston

1. Remove:

• Piston pin clips ①
• Piston pin ②
• Piston ③

NOTE:

• Put identification marks on each piston head for reference during reinstallation.
• Before removing each piston pin, deburr the clip groove and pin hole area. If the piston pin groove is deburred and the piston pin is still difficult to remove, use the piston pin puller ④.

Piston pin puller: YU-1304/90890-01304

CAUTION:

Do not use a hammer to drive the piston pin out.

Piston ring

1. Remove:
2. Piston rings

NOTE:

Spread the end gaps apart while at the same time lifting the piston ring over the top of the piston crown, as shown in the illustration.

INSPECTION

Cylinder and piston

1. Inspect:

- Cylinder and piston walls Vertical scratches → Replace cylinder and piston.

1. Measure:

• Piston-to-cylinder clearance

D₁ D₂ D₃ D₄ D₅ D₆

11210102

Measurement steps:

1st step:

- Measure the cylinder bore "C" with a cylinder bore gauge.

NOTE:

Measure the cylinder bore "C" in parallel to and at right angles to the crankshaft. Then, find the average of the measurements.

POINTS DE DEPOSE

Piston

1. Déposer:

Cylinder bore “C”	WR426F:95.00 ~ 95.01 mm(3.7402 ~ 3.7406 in)WR400F:92.00 ~ 92.01 mm(3.6220 ~ 3.6224 in)
Taper limit “T” 0.05 mm (0.002 in)
Out of round “R” 0.05 mm (0.002 in)
“C” = Maximum D
“T” = (Maximum D_1 or D_2 )- (Maximum D_5 or D_6 )
“R” = (Maximum D_1 , D_3 or D_5 )- (Minimum D_2 , D_4 or D_6 )
• If out of specification, replace the cylinder,and replace the piston and piston rings as set.2nd step:• Measure the piston skirt diameter “P” witha micrometer.@ 9 mm (0.35 in) from the piston bottom edge.
	Piston size P
Standard	WR426F:94.945 ~ 94.960 mm(3.738 ~ 3.739 in)WR400F:91.945 ~ 91.960 mm(3.6199 ~ 3.6205 in)
• If out of specification, replace the pistonand piston rings as a set.

- Calculate the piston-to-cylinder clearance with following formula:

Piston-to-cylinder clearance = Cylinder bore “C” – Piston skirt diameter “P”

Piston-to-cylinder clearance: 0.040 \~ 0.065 mm (0.0016 \~ 0.0026 in) : 0.1 mm (0.004 in)

- If out of specification, replace the cylinder, and replace the piston and piston rings as set.

Line drawing of two hands holding a circular object with a numbered label (1), no text or symbols present.

I1221401

Piston ring

1. Measure:

• Ring side clearance

Use a feeler gauge ①.

Out of specification → Replace the piston and rings as a set.

NOTE:

Clean carbon from the piston ring grooves and rings before measuring the side clearance.

	Side clearance
	Standard
Top ring	0.030 ~ 0.065 mm(0.0012 ~ 0.0026 in)	0.12 mm(0.005 in)
2nd ring	0.020 ~ 0.055 mm(0.0008 ~ 0.0022 in)	0.12 mm(0.005 in)

2. Position:

- Piston ring

In cylinder.

NOTE:

Insert a ring into the cylinder and push it approximately 10 mm (0.39 in) into the cylinder. Push the ring with the piston crown so that the ring will be at a right angle to the cylinder bore.

① 10 mm (0.39 in)

CYLINDRE ET PISTÓN ZYLINDER UND KOLBEN CILINDRO Y PISTÓN

ENG

3ème étape:

Out of specification → Replace.

NOTE:

You cannot measure the end gap on the expander spacer of the oil control ring. If the oil control ring rails show excessive gap, replace all three rings.

	End gap
	Standard Limit
Top ring	WR426F:0.20 ~ 0.30 mm(0.008 ~ 0.012 in)WR400F:0.20 ~ 0.35 mm(0.008 ~ 0.014 in)	WR426F:0.55 mm(0.022 in)WR400F:0.60 mm(0.024 in)
2nd ring	WR426F:0.35 ~ 0.50 mm(0.014 ~ 0.020 in)WR400F:0.40 ~ 0.55 mm(0.016 ~ 0.022 in)	WR426F:0.85 mm(0.033 in)WR400F:0.90 mm(0.035 in)
Oil ring	0.20 ~ 0.50 mm(0.01 ~ 0.02 in)	—

Piston pin

1. Inspect:

- Piston pin

Blue discoloration/grooves →

Replace, then inspect the lubrication system.

CYLINDRE ET PISTÓN ZYLINDER UND KOLBEN CILINDRO Y PISTÓN

ENG

3. Mesurer:

Illustration of a hand using a micrometer to measure a scale, showing the needle and handle (no text or symbols present)

Technical diagram showing hands operating a piston-cylinder assembly with labeled component 'b'

2. Measure:

• Piston pin-to-piston clearance

Measurement steps:Measure the outside diameter (piston pin)a.If out of specification, replace the piston pin
	Outside diameter (piston pin):WR426F: 18.991 ~ 19.000 mm(0.7477 ~ 0.7480 in)WR400F: 17.991 ~ 18.000 mm(0.7083 ~ 0.7093 in)
• Measure the inside diameter (piston) b.
	Inside diameter (piston):WR426F: 19.004 ~ 19.015 mm(0.7482 ~ 0.7486 in)WR400F: 18.004 ~ 18.015 mm(0.7088 ~ 0.7093 in)
• Calculate the piston pin-to-piston clearance with the following formula.
Piston pin-to-piston clearance = Inside diameter (piston) b - Outside diameter (piston pin) a
• If out of specification, replace the piston.
	Piston pin-to-piston clearance:0.004 ~ 0.024 mm(0.00016 ~ 0.00094 in): 0.07 mm (0.003 in)

Simple line drawing of a coiled pipe with an upward arrow labeled 'UP' (no text or symbols beyond the label)

ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION

Piston

1. Install:

• Piston rings

Onto the piston.

NOTE:

- Be sure to install the piston rings so that the manufacturer's marks or numbers are located on the upper side of the rings.

- Lubricate the piston and piston rings liberally with engine oil.

CYLINDRE ET PISTÓN ZYLINDER UND KOLBEN CILINDRO Y PISTÓN

ENG

2. Mesurer:

WR426F: 18,991–19,000 mm WR400F: 17,991–18,000 mm

WR426F: 19,004–19,015 mm WR400F: 18,004–18,015 mm

a ① ② ③ New E

③ New

① New ② ③ ④

2. Position:

• Top ring
• 2nd ring
  . Oil ring

Offset the piston ring end gaps as shown.

① Top ring end
⑥ 2nd ring end
© Oil ring end (upper)
d Oil ring
© Oil ring end (lower)

3. Install:

Piston ①
• Piston pin ②
• Piston pin clips ③

New

NOTE:

• Apply engine oil onto the piston pin and piston.
• Be sure that the arrow mark ⓐ on the piston points to the exhaust side of the engine.
• Before installing the piston pin clip, cover the crankcase with a clean rag to prevent the piston pin clip from falling into the crankcase.
  • Install the piston pin clips with their ends facing downward.

4. Lubricate:

• Piston
• Piston rings
• Cylinder

NOTE:

Apply a liberal coating of engine oil.

Cylinder

1. Install:

• Dowel pins
• O-ring
• Gasket ①
• Cylinder ②

New

NOTE:

Install the cylinder with one hand while compressing the piston rings with the other hand.

CAUTION:

• Pass the timing chain ③ through the timing chain cavity.
- Be careful not to damage the timing chain guide ④ during installation.

2. Positionner:

• Segment de feu

Extent of removal:
① Push rod and push lever removal
② Push pod 1 disassembly
③ Friction plate and clutch plate removal
④ Clutch housing removal

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
Preparation for removal	Drain the	CLUTCH REMOVALengine oil. Refer to “ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT”Brake pedal Refer to “ENGINE REMOVAL”Clutch cable Disconnect at engine side.
	1 Clutch cover 12 Gasket 13 Dowel pin 24 Clutch spring5 Pressure plate6 Push rod 17 Circlip8 Plain washer9 Bearing10 Ball11 Push rod 2

EMBRAYAGE (WR426F)

EMBRAYAGE

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
	12 Clutch plate 713 Friction plate 2 814 Nut 115 Look washer 116 Clutch boss 117 Clutch plate 118 Friction plate 1 119 Clutch damper spring 120 Seat plate 121 Thrust washer 122 Clutch housing 123 Push lever 1		Use special tool.Refer to "REMOVAL POINTS".
①↑

Technical diagram of a mechanical gear assembly with numbered components for identification

Two technical line drawings of metal clamps, labeled A and B, showing different clamp configurations (no text or symbols present)

Technical diagram showing gear meshing with labeled components and two inset diagrams illustrating gear tooth profiles.

Illustration of hands assembling a mechanical gear assembly (no text or symbols)

Line drawing of a hand using a caliper to adjust a spring (no text or symbols present)

FC493000

REMOVAL POINTS

EC483211

Clutch boss

1. Remove:

• Nut ①
- Lock washer ②
- Clutch boss ③

NOTE:

Straighten the lock washer tab and use the clutch holding tool ④ to hold the clutch boss.

Clutch holding tool: YM-91042/90890-04086

A For USA and CDN
B Except for USA and CDN

EC494000

INSPECTION

EC484100

Clutch housing and boss

1. Inspect:

2. Clutch housing ① Cracks/wear/damage → Replace.

3. Clutch boss ② Scoring/wear/damage → Replace.

EC484201

Primary driven gear

1. Check:

2. Circumferential play Free play exists → Replace.

3. Gear teeth @ Wear/damage → Replace.

EC484400

Clutch spring

1. Measure:

- Clutch spring free length @ Out of specification → Replace springs as a set.

Clutch spring free length:

Standard

48.4 mm (1.91 in) 47.4 mm (1.87 in)

POINTS DE DEPOSE

Noix d'embrayage

1. Déposer:

Line drawing of hands using a tool to cut a gear (no text or symbols)

Technical diagram showing two hands operating a small object with labeled parts, likely illustrating a mechanical or electrical procedure.

EC484500

Friction plate

1. Measure:

- Friction plate thickness Out of specification → Replace friction plate as a set. Measure at all four points.

Friction plate thickness:

2.9 \~ 3.1 mm

(0.114 \~ 0.122 in)

: 2.7 mm (0.106 in)

EC484600

Clutch plate

1. Measure:

- Clutch plate warpage Out of specification → Replace clutch plate as a set. Use a surface plate ① and thickness gauge ②.

Warp limit: 0.1 mm (0.004 in)

Technical line drawing of a mechanical lever component (no text or symbols)

Exploded view diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered parts for identification

Push lever

1. Inspect:

- Push lever ① Wear/damage → Replace.

EC484810

Push rod

1. Inspect:

• Push rod 1 ①
• Bearing ②
• Plain washer ③
• Push rod 2 ④
• Ball ⑤
  Wear/damage/bend → Replace.

Disque de friction

1. Mesurer:

Technical diagram illustrating mechanical assembly steps with labeled components and tool paths

FC4A5000

ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION

Push lever

1. Install:

2. Push lever ①

3. Bolt (push lever)

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

NOTE:

• Apply the lithium soap base grease on the oil seal lip.
• Apply the engine oil on the push lever.
• Fit the seat plate ② in the groove @ of the push lever ① and tighten the bolt (seat plate).

Technical diagram of a mechanical gear assembly with numbered parts labeled ① to ⑤

Clutch

1. Install:

2. Seat plate ①
   . Clutch damper spring ②

3. Friction plate 1 [d = ø128 mm (5.04 in)] ③
   . Clutch plate ④

To clutch boss ⑤.

NOTE:

Install the clutch damper spring with the "OUT SIDE" mark @ facing out.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components labeled 1 through 5

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components and labeled parts

1. Install:

• Primary driven gear ①
- Thrust washer ②
- Clutch boss ③

NOTE:

Apply the engine oil on the primary driven gear inner circumference.

ASSEMBLAGE ET MONTAGE

Levier de poussée

1. Monter:

① ② ③ ④ New

Two technical line drawings of metal clamps, labeled A and B, showing different angles and configurations (no text or symbols present)

Technical line drawing of a mechanical gear assembly with no visible text or symbols

Diagram showing two mechanical components with labeled parts, including gear-like structures and a labeled component E.

New ③ ② ① ④ E

3. Install:

- Lock washer ①

New

- Nut (clutch boss) ②

Use the clutch holding tool ③ to hold the clutch boss.

Clutch holding tool: YM-91042/90890-04086

A For USA and CDN

B Except for USA and CDN

1. Bend the lock washer ① tab.

5. Install:

- Friction plate 2 [d = ø119 mm (4.69 in)] ①

- Clutch plate ②

NOTE:

• Install the clutch plates and friction plates 2 alternately on the clutch boss, starting with a friction plate and ending with a friction plate.

- Apply the engine oil on the friction plates and clutch plates.

6. Install:

• Bearing ①

- Plain washer ②

• Circlip ③ New

To push rod 1 ④.

NOTE:

Apply the engine oil on the bearing and plain washer.

3. Monter:

• Rondelle-frein ① New

[d = ∅119 mm (4,69 in)] ①

(an Druckstange 1 ④)

HINWEIS:

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components and a labeled component E

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a clutch mechanism with no visible text or symbols

Technical diagram of a mechanical clutch assembly with numbered components for identification

New ① ② ③

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled components and directional arrows indicating motion or movement.

7. Install:

• Push rod 2 ①
  • Ball ②
  • Push rod 1 ③

NOTE:

Apply the engine oil on the push rod 1, 2 and ball.

8. Install:

- Pressure plate ①

9. Install:

• Clutch spring
  • Bolt (clutch spring)

8 Nm (0.8 m · kg, 5.8 ft · lb)

NOTE: Tighten the bolts in stage, using a crisscross pattern.

10. Install:

New

• Gasket (clutch cover) ①
• Dowel pin ②

11. Install:

• Clutch cover ①
  • Bolt (clutch cover)

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

NOTE: Tighten the bolts in stage, using a crisscross pattern.

7. Monter:

Extent of removal:
① Push rod and push lever removal
② Push rod 1 disassembly
③ Friction plate and clutch plate removal ④ Clutch housing removal

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
Preparation for removal	Drain the	CLUTCH REMOVALengine oil. Refer to “ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT”Brake pedal Refer to “ENGINE REMOVAL”Clutch cable Disconnect at engine side.
1↑	1 Clutch cover 12 Gasket 13 Dowel pin 24 Clutch spring 55 Pressure plate6 Push rod 17 Circlip8 Plain washer9 Bearing10 Push rod 2

EMBRAYAGE (WR400F)

EMBRAYAGE

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
	11 Friction plate 2 112 Clutch plate 713 Friction plate 1 714 Nut 115 Look washer 116 Clutch boss 117 Thrust washer 118 Clutch housing 119 Push lever 1		Use special tool.Refer to “REMOVAL POINTS”.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components, likely illustrating a gear or cam mechanism.

Two technical line drawings of metal clamps, labeled A and B, showing different clamp configurations (no text or symbols present)

Technical diagram showing gear meshing with labeled components and two detailed views of the gear structure.

a II411201

Line drawing of a hand using a caliper to adjust a spring (no text or symbols present)

FC493000

REMOVAL POINTS

EC483211

Clutch boss

1. Remove:

• Nut ①
- Lock washer ②
- Clutch boss ③

NOTE:

Straighten the lock washer tab and use the clutch holding tool ④ to hold the clutch boss.

Clutch holding tool: YM-91042/90890-04086

A For USA and CDN
B Except for USA and CDN

EC494000

INSPECTION

EC484100

Clutch housing and boss

1. Inspect:

2. Clutch housing ① Cracks/wear/damage → Replace.

3. Clutch boss ② Scoring/wear/damage → Replace.

EC484201

Primary driven gear

1. Check:

2. Circumferential play Free play exists → Replace.

3. Gear teeth @ Wear/damage → Replace.

EC484400

Clutch spring

1. Measure:

- Clutch spring free length ⓐ Out of specification → Replace springs as a set.

	Clutch spring free length:
	Standard
	44 mm (1.73 in) 43 mm (1.69 in)

POINTS DE DEPOSE

Noix d'embrayage

1. Déposer:

Line drawing of hands using a tool to cut a gear (no text or symbols)

EC484500

Friction plate

1. Measure:

- Friction plate thickness Out of specification → Replace friction plate as a set. Measure at all four points.

Friction plate thickness:

Friction plate 1 [ø112 mm (4.41 in)]:

2.72 \~ 2.88 mm

(0.107 \~ 0.113 in)

: 2.52 mm (0.099 in)

Friction plate 2 [ø116 mm (4.57 in)]:

2.92 \~ 3.08 mm

(0.115 \~ 0.121 in)

: 2.72 mm (0.107 in)

Technical diagram showing two hands operating a small object with labeled parts, likely illustrating a procedure or manufacturing step.

EC484600

Clutch plate

1. Measure:

- Clutch plate warpage Out of specification → Replace clutch plate as a set. Use a surface plate ① and thickness gauge ②.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with labeled part (1), no text or symbols present

Warp limit: 0.1 mm (0.004 in)

Push lever

1. Inspect:

- Push lever ① Wear/damage → Replace.

Exploded view diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered parts for identification

EC484810

Push rod

1. Inspect:

• Push rod 1 ①
• Bearing ②
- Plain washer ③
- Push rod 2 ④
Wear/damage/bend → Replace.

Disque de friction

1. Mesurer:

[ø112 mm (4,41 in)]:

2,72\~2,88mm

(0,107 \~ 0,113 in)

:

2,52 mm (0,099 in)

Disco de fricción 2

[ø116 mm (4,57 in)]:

2,92 \~ 3,08 mm

(0,115 \~ 0,121 in)

:

2,72 mm (0,107 in)

Disque d'embrayage

1. Mesurer:

Technical diagram illustrating mechanical assembly steps with labeled components and tool paths

FC4A5000

ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION

Push lever

1. Install:

2. Push lever ①
   • Bolt (push lever)

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

NOTE:

• Apply the lithium soap base grease on the oil seal lip.
• Apply the engine oil on the push lever.
• Fit the seat plate ② in the groove @ of the push lever ① and tighten the bolt (seat plate).

Technical diagram of a mechanical gear assembly with numbered parts and labeled component E

Clutch

1. Install:

• Primary driven gear ①
- Thrust washer ②
- Clutch boss ③

NOTE:

Apply the engine oil on the primary driven gear inner circumference.

① New ② ③ ④

1. Install:

- Lock washer ①

New

• Nut (clutch boss) ②

Use the clutch holding tool ③ to hold the clutch boss.

Two technical line drawings of metal clamps, labeled A and B, showing different angles and configurations (no text or symbols present)

Clutch holding tool: YM-91042/90890-04086

A For USA and CDN
B Except for USA and CDN

ASSEMBLAGE ET MONTAGE

Levier de poussée

1. Monter:

Technical line drawing of a mechanical gear assembly with no visible text or symbols

③ E ① E ②

New ③ ② ① ④ E

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components and labeled parts E and ①

Technical diagram of a mechanical gear assembly with labeled components 1, a, and b

1. Bend the lock washer ① tab.

2. Install:

3. Friction plate 1 [d = ø112 mm (4.41 in)] ①

4. Clutch plate ②
5. Friction plate 2 [d = ø116 mm (4.57 in)] ③

NOTE:

• Install the clutch plates and friction plates alternately on the clutch boss, starting with a friction plate 1 and ending with a friction plate 2.
- Apply the engine oil on the friction plates and clutch plates.

1. Install:

• Bearing ①
- Plain washer ②
• Circlip ③ New

To push rod 1 ④.

NOTE:

Apply the engine oil on the bearing and plain washer.

1. Install:

2. Push rod 2 ①

3. Push rod 1 ②

NOTE:

Apply the engine oil on the push rod 1, 2.

1. Install:

- Pressure plate ①

NOTE:

Align the much mark ⓐ on the pressure plate with the punched mark Ⓐ on the clutch boss.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components and directional arrows indicating motion or movement.

Technical diagram of a mechanical clutch assembly with labeled parts and a 'New' label

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled components and circular features

8. Install:

• Clutch spring
  • Bolt (clutch spring)

8 Nm (0.8 m · kg, 5.8 ft · lb)

NOTE:

Tighten the bolts in stage, using a crisscross pattern.

9. Install:

• Gasket (clutch cover) ①

New

• Dowel pin ②

10. Install:

• Clutch cover ①
  • Bolt (clutch cover)

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

NOTE: Tighten the bolts in stage, using a crisscross pattern.

8. Monter:

Extent of removal: ① Oil filter removal ② Water pump removal ③ Crankcase cover (right) removal

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
Preparation for removal Drain the	OIL FILTER, WATER PUMP AND CRANKCASE COVER (RIGHT) REMOVALengine oil. Refer to “ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT”section in the CHAPTER 3.Drain the coolant. Refer to “COOLANT REPLACEMENT”section in the CHAPTER 3.Exhaust pipe Refer to “EXHAUST PIPE AND SILENCER” section.Brake pedal Refer to “ENGINE REMOVAL” section.
1 Oil filter cover 12 Oil filter 13 Coolant pipe 24 Water pump housing 15 Pin6 Oil delivery pipe	121

FILTRE A HUILE, POMPE A EAU ET COUVERCLE DE CARTER (DROIT) FILTRE A HUILE, POMPE A EAU ET COUVERCLE DE CARTER (DROIT)

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
2	7 Oil hose 18 Kick crank 19 Crankcase cover (right) 110 Gasket 111 Dowel pin/O-ring 4/212 Impeller 113 Plain washer 114 Impeller shaft 115 Oil seal 1 116 Oil seal 2 117 Bearing 1		Refer to “REMOVAL POINTS”.

FILTRE A HUILE, POMPE A EAU ET COUVERCLE DE CARTER (DROIT) ÖLFILTER, WASSERPUMPE UND KURBELGEHÄUSEDECKEL (RECHTS) FILTRO DE ACEITE, BOMBA DE AGUA Y CUBIERTA DEL CARTER (DERECHO)

ENG

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered parts labeled 1 and 2

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts (a) and (3), showing internal components like gears and shafts.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with labeled parts (no text or symbols present)

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts, including circular features and numbered annotations.

Technical illustration of a mechanical component with three views: a impeller, a washer, and a threaded shaft (no text or symbols)

REMOVAL POINTS

EC4G3110

Impeller shaft

1. Remove:

2. Impeller ①

3. Plain washer ②
4. Impeller shaft ③

NOTE:

Hold the impeller shaft on its width across the flats ⓐ with spanners, etc. and remove the impeller.

EC4G3210

Oil seal

NOTE:

It is not necessary to disassemble the water pump, unless there is an abnormality such as excessive change in coolant level, discoloration of coolant, or milky transmission oil.

1. Remove:

• Bearing ①
• Oil seal ②

INSPECTION

EC444200

Impeller shaft

1. Inspect:

- Impeller shaft ①

Bend/wear/damage → Replace.

Fur deposits → Clean.

POINTS DE DEPOSE

Axe de turbine

- Bearing Rotate inner race with a finger. Rough spot/seizure → Replace.

EC444400

Oil seal

1. Inspect:

- Oil seal Wear/damage → Replace.

New ① B ① New B

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with labeled parts (no text or symbols present)

ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION

EC4G5110

Oil seal

1. Install:

. Oil seal ① New

NOTE:

• Apply the lithium soap base grease on the oil seal lip.
  • Install the oil seal with its manufacture's marks or numbers facing inward.

Bearing

1. Install:

• Bearing ①

NOTE:

Install the bearing by pressing its outer race parallel.

FILTRE A HUILE, POMPE A EAU ET COUVERCLE DE CARTER (DROIT) ÖLFILTER, WASSERPUMPE UND KURBELGEHÄUSEDECKEL (RECHTS) FILTRO DE ACEITE, BOMBA DE AGUA Y CUBIERTA DEL CÁRTER (DERECHO)

ENG

Roulement

1. Contrôler:

- Roulement

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts and a valve symbol

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered parts, likely illustrating a turning or mounting mechanism.

① ④ New ③ ② ① ②

Technical line drawing of an automotive clutch assembly with no visible text or symbols

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled parts and a numbered section, likely from an engineering or manufacturing context.

EC4G5220

Impeller shaft

1. Install:

• Impeller shaft ①
- Plain washer ②
- Impeller ③

14 Nm (1.4 m · kg, 10 ft · lb)

NOTE:

• Take care so that the oil seal lip is not damaged or the spring does not slip off its position.
- When installing the impeller shaft, apply the engine oil on the oil seal lip, bearing and impeller shaft. And install the shaft while turning it.
- Hold the impeller shaft on its width across the flats @ with spanners, etc. and remove the impeller.

Crankcase cover (right)

1. Install:

• Dowel pin ①
• O-ring ②
• Collar ③
• Gasket ④

New

1. Install:

• Crankcase cover (right) ①

• Bolt 10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

NOTE:

• Apply the engine oil on the impeller shaft end.
• When installing the crankcase cover onto the crankcase, be sure that the impeller shaft end ② aligns with the balancer end slot ③.
• Tighten the bolts in stage, using a crisscross pattern.

Axe de turbine

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating motion or flow.

Kick crank

1. Install:

• Kick crank ①
- Plain washer
• Bolt (kick crank)

Install the kick crank so that the kick crank is as vertical as possible with the distance @ between the kick crank and the frame being 5 mm (0.20 in) or more.

Technical diagram showing hands holding a screw with labeled parts, including numbered annotations ① and ②.

1. Install:

. Oil hose ①
• Bolt (oil hose) ②

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

① ② ③ ④ ③ ③ New

1. Install:

• Copper washer ①

New

• Oil delivery pipe ②
• Union bolt (M8) ③

18 Nm (1.8 m · kg, 13 ft · lb)

• Union bolt (M10) ④

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components and a label 'New' indicating a new component.

Water pump housing

1. Install:

2. Dowel pin ①
   • O-ring ②

New

Démarreur au pied

1. Monter:

① ② ③ ④ New

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components, likely for assembly or maintenance reference.

② New ② New ③ ① New ②

2. Install:

• Water pump housing ①
• Bolt (water pump housing) ②

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

• Plain washer ③ New
  • Coolant drain bolt ④

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

3. Install:

• O-ring
• Coolant pipe ①
• Bolt (coolant pipe) ②

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

Oil filter

1. Install:

• Oil filter ①
. O-ring ② New
- Oil filter cover ③
• Bolt (oil filter cover)

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

2. Monter:

Extent of removal: ① Balancer drive gear ② Balancer

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
Preparation for removal	Clutch housing Refer to “CLUTCH” section.Crankcase cover (right) Refer to “OIL FILTER, WATER PUMP AND CRANKCASE COVER (RIGHT)” section.
	1 Nut (primary drive gear) 12 Nut (balancer) 13 Lock washer 14 Primary drive gear 15 Balancer drive gear 16 Lock washer 17 Balancer driven gear 18 Balancer			Refer to “REMOVAL POINTS”.
			1 Refer to “REMOVAL POINTS”.

BALANCIER

BALANCIER

Technical diagram of a mechanical gear assembly with numbered components labeled 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Technical diagram of a mechanical gear assembly with numbered components labeled 1 to 4

Technical diagram of a mechanical gear assembly with labeled parts 1 and 2

Technical diagram showing three types of gear components with numbered labels (①, ②, ③)

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with a cylindrical shaft and flanged end (no text or symbols)

REMOVAL POINTS

Balancer drive gear and balancer driven gear

1. Straighten the lock washer tab.

2. Loosen:

• Nut (primary drive gear) ①

• Nut (balancer) ②

NOTE:

Place an aluminum plate ⓐ between the teeth of the balancer drive gear ③ and driven gear ④.

Balancer

1. Remove:

• Balancer ①

NOTE:

When removing the balancer shaft, align the center of the balancer shaft weight @ along the line connecting the centers of the crankshaft and balancer shaft.

INSPECTION

Primary drive gear, balancer drive gear and balancer driven gear

1. Inspect:

• Primary drive gear ①

• Balancer drive gear ②

• Balancer driven gear ③

Wear/damage → Replace.

Balancer

1. Inspect:

• Balancer

Cracks/damage → Replace.

POINTS DE DEPOSE

Technical diagram of a mechanical gear assembly with labeled parts 1 and 2

Technical diagram of a gear assembly with labeled parts (a, b, ①)

Technical diagram of a mechanical gear assembly with labeled components (a, b, c, d)

Technical diagram of a mechanical gear assembly with numbered components and labeled parts

Technical diagram of a mechanical gear assembly with numbered components and an inset showing a close-up of a mechanical component.

ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION

Balancer, balancer drive gear and balancer driven gear

1. Install:

• Balancer ①

NOTE:

When installing the balancer shaft, align the center of the balancer shaft weight @ along the line connecting the centers of the crankshaft and balancer shaft.

1. Install:

• Balancer driven gear ①

NOTE:

Install the balancer driven gear onto the balancer while aligning the punch mark ⓐ on the balancer driven gear with the cut ⓑ in the balancer end.

1. Install:

• Balancer drive gear ①

NOTE:

- Align the punched mark ⓐ on the balancer drive gear with the punched mark ⓑ on the balancer driven gear.

- Align the punched mark © on the balancer drive gear with the lower spline ⓐ on the crankshaft.

1. Install:

- Lock washer ①

• Nut (balancer) ②

50 Nm (5.0 m · kg, 3.6 ft · lb)

• Primary drive gear ③

• Nut (primary drive gear) ④

• Install the primary drive gear with its stepped side ⑥ facing the engine.

- Place an aluminum plate ⑨ between the teeth of the balancer drive gear ⑤ and driven gear ⑥.

1. Bend the lock washer tab.

Extent of removal: ① Oil pump removal ② Oil pump disassembly

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
Preparation for removal		OIL PUMP REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLYClutch housing Refer to “CLUTCH” section.Crankcase cover (right) Refer to “OIL FILTER, WATER PUMP AND CRANKCASE COVER (RIGHT)” section.
	1 Circlip 12 Plate washer 13 Oil pump drive gear 14 Oil pump assembly 15 Dowel pin 16 Outer rotor 2 17 Circlip 18 Inner rotor 29 Pin10 Oil pump cover11 Outer rotor 1 112 Inner rotor 1	1

POMPE A HUILE

POMPE A HUILE

• Oil pump drive gear
  • Oil pump driven gear
  • Rotor housing
• Oil pump cover

Cracks/wear/damage → Replace.

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with labeled parts and dimensional annotations

Hand holding a mechanical gear with visible teeth and rotational motion arrows (no text or symbols)

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled components and directional arrows

2. Measure:

- Tip clearance ⓐ

Between the inner rotor ① and the outer rotor ②.

• Tip clearance ⓑ

Between the outer rotor ② and the rotor housing ③.

Out of specification → Replace the oil pump.

Tip clearance ⓐ:

0.12 mm or less

(0.0047 in or less)

: 0.20 mm (0.006 in)

Tip clearance ⓑ:

0.09 \~ 0.17 mm (0.0035 \~ 0.0067 in)

: 0.24 mm (0.009 in)

Side clearance ©:

0.03 \~ 0.10 mm (0.0012 \~ 0.0039 in)

: 0.17 mm (0.007 in)

3. Check:

- Unsmooth → Repeat steps #1 and #2 or replace the defective parts.

ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION

Oil pump

1. Install:

• Oil pump drive shaft ①
.Washer ②
• Pin ③
• Inner rotor 1 ④

NOTE:

• Apply the engine oil on the oil pump drive shaft and inner rotor 1.
  • Fit the pin into the groove in the inner rotor 1.

CONTROLE

Pompe à huile

1. Contrôler:

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with labeled parts and an arrow indicating direction

E New ② ① ③ ④ ⑤

2. Install:

• Outer rotor 1 ①

NOTE: \_\_\_\_

Apply the engine oil on the outer rotor 1.

3. Install:

• Oil pump cover ①

• Screw (oil pump cover) ②

4 Nm (0.4 m · kg, 2.9 ft · lb)

• Pin ③

• Inner rotor 2 ④

• Circlip ⑤

New

NOTE:

- Apply the engine oil on the oil pump drive shaft end and inner rotor 2.

• Fit the pin into the groove in the inner rotor 2.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components and a labeled component E

E ① ② ③ New

4. Install:

• Outer rotor 2 ①

• Dowel pin ②

. Oil pump assembly ③

• Bolt (oil pump assembly)

[L = 30 mm (1.18 in)] ④

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

• Bolt (oil pump assembly)

[L = 25 mm (0.98 in)] ⑤

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

NOTE:

Apply the engine oil on the outer rotor 2.

5. Install:

• Oil pump drive gear ①

- Plate washer ②

• Circlip ③

New

NOTE:

Apply the engine oil on the oil pump drive gear inner circumference.

2. Monter:

[L = 30 mm (1,18 in)] ④

10 Nm (1,0 m · kg, 7,2 ft · lb)

[L=30 mm (1,18 in)]④

10 Nm (1,0 m·kg, 7,2 ft·lb)

KICK AXLE AND SHIFT SHAFT

KICK AXLE AND SHIFT SHAFT

New 10Nm (1.0m·kg,7.2ft·lb) 30Nm (3.0m·kg,22ft·lb) 10Nm (1.0m·kg,7.2ft·lb)

Extent of removal: ① Kick axle removal ② Kick axle disassembly
③ Shift shaft removal ④ Segment removal

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
Preparation for removal Shift pedal Refer to “CDI MAGNETO” section.Oil pump Refer to “OIL PUMP” section.
		1 Kick idle gear 12 Kick axle assembly 1 Refer to “REMOVAL POINTS”.3 Spring guide 14 Torsion spring 15 Ratchet wheel 16 Kick gear 17 Kick axle8 Plain washer9 Shift shaft10 Collar		11111

AXE DE DEMARREUR AU PIED ET ARBRE DE SELECTEUR

KICKSTARTERWELLE UND SCHALTWELLE

Mechanical gear assembly diagram showing meshing gears and shafts (no text or labels)

Technical diagram of engine cylinder assembly with numbered parts and labeled connection points

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled parts and directional arrow

Technical diagram of a mechanical gear assembly with numbered parts labeled ①, ②, and ③

Technical diagram of three gear assemblies with labeled components (a, b, 1, 2)

REMOVAL POINTS

EC4B3101

Kick axle assembly

1. Remove:

• Kick axle assembly ①

NOTE:

Unhook the torsion spring ② from the hole ④ in the crankcase.

EC4C3101

Shift guide and shift lever assembly

1. Remove:

• Bolt (shift guide)
• Shift guide ①
- Shift lever assembly ②

NOTE:

The shift lever assembly is disassembled at the same time as the shift guide.

EC4N3100

Segment

1. Remove:

• Bolt (segment) ①
• Segment ②

NOTE:

Turn the segment counterclockwise until it stops and loosen the bolt.

INSPECTION

EC4C4200

Kick axle and ratchet wheel

1. Check:

2. Ratchet wheel ① smooth movement Unsmooth movement → Replace.

3. Kick axle ② Wear/damage → Replace.
4. Spring ③ Broken → Replace.

EC4C4300

Kick gear, kick idle gear and ratchet wheel

1. Inspect:

• Kick gear ①
• Kick idle gear ②
• Ratchet wheel ③
• Gear teeth ⓐ
• Ratchet teeth ⑥

Wear/damage → Replace.

POINTS DE DEPOSE

Technical diagram of a mechanical tool with labeled parts ① and ②

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components for identification

Two mechanical clamping components labeled ① and ②, shown in line drawings without any text or symbols.

Technical diagram of mechanical assembly with labeled parts a, b, and numbered components

EC4B4400

Shift shaft

1. Inspect:

• Shift shaft ① Bend/damage → Replace.
• Spring ② Broken → Replace.

EC4C4100

Shift guide and shift lever assembly

1. Inspect:

• Shift guide ①
- Shift lever ②
• Pawl ③
• Pawl pin ④
- Spring ⑤ Wear/damage → Replace.

EC4B4500

Stopper lever

1. Inspect:

• Stopper lever ①
Wear/damage → Replace.
• Torsion spring ②
Broken → Replace.

EC4C5000

ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION

Segment

1. Install:

• Segment ①
• Bolt (segment)

30 Nm (3.0 m · kg, 22 ft · lb)

NOTE:

Align the notch ⓐ on the segment with the pin ⓑ on the shift cam.

Arbre de sélecteur

1. Contrôler:

Technical diagram of mechanical assembly with numbered components and labeled parts

EC4B5111

Stopper lever

1. Install:

• Torsion spring ①
• Stopper lever ②
• Bolt (stopper lever) ③

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

NOTE:

Align the stopper lever roller with the slot on segment.

Diagram of a medical or laboratory procedure with labeled components and directional arrows, including numbered parts and a label 'E' at the bottom.

Shift guide and shift lever assembly

1. Install:

• Spring ①
• Pawl pin ②
-Pawl ③

To shift lever ④.

NOTE:

Apply the engine oil on the springs, pawl pins and pawls.

Technical diagram of a mechanical clamp or bracket with labeled parts ① and ②

1. Install:

- Shift lever assembly ①

To shift guide ②.

Technical diagram showing engine component assembly with labeled parts and a tool pointing to component E

1. Install:

2. Shift lever assembly ①

3. Shift guide ②

NOTE:

• The shift lever assembly is installed at the same time as the shift guide.
• Apply the engine oil on the bolt (segment) shaft.

AXE DE DEMARREUR AU PIED ET ARBRE DE SELECTEUR KICKSTARTERWELLE UND SCHALTWELLE EJE DEL PEDAL Y EJE DE SELECCIÓN

ENG

Levier de butée

1. Monter:

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components, likely illustrating a gear or coupling mechanism.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components and labeled parts E

New ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ a b

4. Install:

• Bolt (shift guide) ①

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

EC4C5301

Shift shaft

1. Install:

• Roller ①
• Collar ②
• Torsion spring ③
• Shift shaft ④

NOTE:

Apply the engine oil on the roller and shift shaft.

Kick axle assembly

1. Install:

• Kick gear ①
- Plain washer ②
• Circlip ③ New
• Ratchet wheel ④
• Spring ⑤
- Plain washer ⑥
• Circlip ⑦ New
To kick axle ⑧.

NOTE:

• Apply the molybdenum disulfide oil on the kick gear inner circumference.
• Align the punch mark ⓐ on the ratchet wheel with the punch mark Ⓐ on the kick axle.

Technical diagram showing mechanical components with labeled parts a and b, including gears and a coiled wire.

2. Install:

• Torsion spring ①
To kick axle ②.

NOTE:

Make sure the stopper ⓐ of the torsion spring fits into the hole ⓑ on the kick axle.

AXE DE DEMARREUR AU PIED ET ARBRE DE SELECTEUR KICKSTARTERWELLE UND SCHALTWELLE EJE DEL PEDAL Y EJE DE SELECCIÓN

ENG

1. Monter:

Technical diagram of a mechanical gear assembly with labeled parts ① and ②

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components and labeled parts

Technical line drawing of a mechanical gear assembly with no visible text or symbols

Technical diagram of mechanical gear assembly with labeled parts and a highlighted section showing 'New' component

3. Install:

• Spring guide ①

NOTE:

Slide the spring guide into the kick axle, make sure the groove @ in the spring guide fits on the stopper of the torsion spring.

4. Install:

• Kick axle assembly ①

- Plain washer ②

NOTE: \_\_\_\_

- Apply the engine oil on the kick axle.

- Slide the kick axle assembly into the crank-case, make sure the kick axle stopper ⓐ fit into their home position ③.

5. Hook:

• Torsion spring ①

NOTE:

Turn the torsion spring clockwise and hook into the proper hole @ in the crankcase.

Kick idle gear

1. Install:

• Kick idle gear ①

- Plain washer ②

• Circlip ③ New

NOTE:

• Install the kick idle gear with its depressed side @ toward you.

- Apply the engine oil on the kick idle gear inner circumference.

AXE DE DEMARREUR AU PIED ET ARBRE DE SELECTEUR KICKSTARTERWELLE UND SCHALTWELLE EJE DEL PEDAL Y EJE DE SELECCIÓN

ENG

3. Monter:

• Guide de ressort ①

N.B.:

Extent of removal: ① CDI magneto removal

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
Preparation for removal	Seat and	CDI MAGNETO REMOVALfuel tank Refer to “SEAT, FUEL TANK AND SIDEBolt [radiator (left)]Disconnect the CDI magneto lead.		SIDECOVERS” section.Refer to “RADIATOR” section.
	1 Engine guard (left) 12 Shift pedal 13 Crankcase cover (left) 14 Gasket 15 Dowel pin 26 Nut (rotor) 1 Use special tool.7 Rotor 18 Stator9 Woodruff key		1	Refer to “REMOVAL POINTS”.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components, likely illustrating a gear or cam mechanism.

1.0mm 32mm 6mm

EC4L3000

REMOVAL POINTS

Rotor

1. Remove:

• Nut (rotor) ①
- Plain washer

Use the rotor holding tool ②.

Rotor holding tool: YU-1235/90890-01235

1. Remove:

• Rotor ①

Use the flywheel puller ②.

Flywheel puller: YU-33270-B/90890-01362

NOTE:

Install three bolts ③ of the proper size, as shown in illustration.

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled parts (a and b) and a close-up view of the component.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

EC4L4000

INSPECTION

EC4L4101

CDI magneto

1. Inspect:

• Rotor inner surface ⓐ
• Stator outer surface ⑥

Damage → Inspect the crankshaft run-out and crankshaft bearing.

If necessary, replace CDI magneto and/or stator.

EC4L4200

Woodruff key

1. Inspect:

• Woodruff key ①

Damage → Replace.

POINTS DE DEPOSE

Rotor

1. Déposer:

• Ecrou (rotor) ①

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components and directional arrows indicating motion or assembly.

FC4L5000

ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION CDI magneto

1. Install:

• Stator ①
- Screw (stator) ②

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

NOTE:

• Apply the sealant to the grommet of the CDI magneto lead.
  • Tighten the screws using the T30 bit.

Quick gasket®:

ACC-QUICK-GS-KT

YAMAHA Bond No. 1215:

90890-85505

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts and an inset view showing a cross-section detail.

1. Install:

• Woodruff key ①
• Rotor ②

NOTE:

• Clean the tapered portions of the crankshaft and rotor.
• When installing the woodruff key, make sure that its flat surface ⓐ is in parallel with the crankshaft center line ⓑ.
• When installing the rotor, align the keyway © of the rotor with the woodruff key.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components, likely illustrating a gear or cam mechanism.

1. Install:

2. Plain washer
   • Nut (rotor) ①

48 Nm (4.8 m · kg, 35 ft · lb)

Use the rotor holding tool ②.

Rotor holding tool: YU-1235/90890-01235

ASSEMBLAGE ET MONTAGE Magnéto CDI

1. Monter:

• Stator ①

• Boulon (stator) ②

10 Nm (1,0 m · kg, 7,2 ft · lb)

N.B.:

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with a magnified inset showing internal components (no text or symbols)

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components, likely for assembly or maintenance instructions.

4. Connect:

- CDI magneto lead Refer to "CABLE ROUTING DIAGRAM" section in the CHAPTER 2.

5. Install:

• Gasket [crankcase cover (left)] New

• Crankcase cover (left) ①

• Hose holder (cylinder head breather hose) ②

• Bolt [crankcase cover (left)]

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

NOTE:

Tighten the screws in stage, using a crisscross pattern.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating motion or force

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components, likely for assembly or maintenance reference.

6. Install:

• Shift pedal ①

• Bolt (shift pedal)

NOTE:

When installing the shift pedal onto the shift shaft, be sure that the center of the shift pedal is about 2 mm @ above the top of the footrest.

7. Install:

- Engine guard (left) ① - Hose holder (cylinder head breather hose) ② - Bolt [engine guard (left)]

23 Nm (2.3 m · kg, 17 ft · lb)

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
Preparation for removal	Hold the ENGINE REMOVALmachine by placing the suitable stand under the frame.Seat and fuel tank Refer to “SEAT, FUEL TANK AND SIDECOVERS” section.Carburetor Refer to “CARBURETOR” section.Exhaust pipe and silencer Refer to “EXHAUST PIPE AND SILENCER” section.Clutch cable Disconnect at engine side.Decompression cable and guide Disconnect at engine side.Radiator Refer to “RADIATOR” section.Shift pedal Refer to “CDI MAGNETO” section.Cylinder head breather hose and oil tank breather hoseDrain the engine oil Refer to “ENGINE OILRefer to “CAMSHAFTS” section.Spark plug capDisconnect the CDI magneto lead.	WARNINGSupport the machine securely so there is no danger of it falling over.

DEPOSE DU MOTEUR

Extent of removal: ① Engine removal

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
1	1 Engine skidplate 12 Neutral switch 13 Oil hose 24 Chain cover 16 Lock washer 17 Drive sprocket 18 Clip 19 Bolt (brake pedal) 110 Brake pedal 111 Engine upper bracket (right)12 Engine upper bracket (left)13 Engine lower bracket14 Engine mounting bolt15 Pivot shaft16 Engine	Refer to "REMOVAL POINTS".5 Nut (drive sprocket) 11231	Refer to "REMOVAL POINTS".

Technical diagram of a mechanical gear assembly with numbered components and labeled parts

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled parts ① and ②, likely illustrating a gear mechanism or assembly.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a lever mechanism with no visible text or symbols

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

FC4M3000

REMOVAL POINTS

EC4F3100

Drive sprocket

1. Remove:

• Nut (drive sprocket) ①
- Lock washer ②

NOTE:

• Straighten the lock washer tab.
- Loosen the nut while applying the rear brake.

1. Remove:

• Drive sprocket ①
- Drive chain ②

NOTE:

Remove the drive sprocket together with the drive chain.

EC4M3301

Engine removal

1. Remove:

• Pivot shaft ①

NOTE:

If the pivot shaft is pulled all the way out, the swingarm will come loose. If possible, insert a shaft of similar diameter into the other side of the swingarm to support it.

1. Remove:

- Engine ①

From right side.

NOTE:

Make sure that the couplers, hoses and cables are disconnected.

POINTS DE DEPOSE

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components for identification

① ② ③ New B ④ a

FC4M5000

ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION

EC4M5160

Engine installation

1. Install:

- Engine ① Install the engine from right side.

- Pivot shaft ② 85 Nm (8.5 m · kg, 61 ft · lb)

• Engine mounting bolt (lower) ③ 69 Nm (6.9 m · kg, 50 ft · lb)

• Engine lower bracket ④

• Bolt (engine bracket) ⑤ 34 Nm (3.4 m · kg, 24 ft · lb)

• Engine mounting bolt (front) ⑥ 69 Nm (6.9 m · kg, 50 ft · lb)

- Engine upper bracket (right) ⑦ - Engine upper bracket (left) ⑧ - Bolt (engine bracket) ⑨

• Apply the lithium soap base grease on the bolt, O-rings and brake pedal bracket.
  • Install the clip with its stopper portion @ facing inward.

Technical diagram of a mechanical gear assembly with numbered components

EC4M5331

Drive sprocket

1. Install:

• Drive sprocket ①
- Drive chain ②

NOTE:

Install the drive sprocket together with the drive chain.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components, likely for assembly or maintenance instructions.

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with numbered components and labeled parts

New ③ ① ② ④ ⑤ ⑤ B

2. Install:

- Lock washer ①

New

• Nut (drive sprocket) ②

Tighten the nut while applying the rear brake.

3. Bend the lock washer tab to lock the nut.

4. Install:

- Chain guide

- Chain cover ①

• Screw (chain cover) ②

8 Nm (0.8 m · kg, 5.8 ft · lb)

5. Install:

. Oil hose ①

• Bolt (oil hose) ②

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb

6. Install:

• Spring ①

• Pin ②

. O-ring ③

New

• Neutral switch ④

• Bolt (neutral switch) ⑤

4 Nm (0.4 m · kg, 2.9 ft · lb)

NOTE:

Apply the lithium soap base grease on the O-ring.

2. Monter:

CRANKCASE AND CRANKSHAFT

CRANKCASE AND CRANKSHAFT

12Nm (1.2m·kg, 8.7ft·lb) 10Nm (1.0m·kg, 7.2ft·lb) New 10Nm (1.0m·kg, 7.2ft·lb)

Extent of removal: ① Crankcase separation ② Crankshaft removal

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
Preparation for removal Engine R		CRANKCASE SEPARATIONRefer to “ENGINE REMOVAL” section.Piston Refer to “CYLINDER AND PISTON” Balancer Refer to “BALANCER” section.Kick axle assemblySegmentStator Refer to “CDI MAGNETO” section.		sec-tion.Refer to “KICK AXLE AND SHIFT SHAFT” section.
1	2	1 Timing chain guide (rear) 12 Timing chain 13 Bolt (40 mm) 34 Bolt (50 mm) 45 Bolt (60 mm) 26 Bolt (75 mm) 37 Hose guide 18 Clutch cable holder9 Crankcase (right)10 Crankcase (left)	111	Refer to “REMOVAL POINTS”.

Extent of removal: ① Crankcase bearing removal

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
Preparation for removal	Transmission	CRANKCASE BEARING REMOVALShift cam and shift fork		Refer to “TRANSMISSION, SHIFT CAM AND SHIFT FORK” section.
1	1 Oil seal 32 Bearing 10 Refer to “REMOVAL POINTS”.

ROULEMENTS DE CARTER

Technical line drawing of an automotive engine block assembly (no text or labels)

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

Technical line drawing of an internal combustion engine component (no text or labels)

REMOVAL POINTS

Crankcase

1. Separate:

• Crankcase (right)
• Crankcase (left)

Separation steps:

- Remove the crankcase bolts, hose guide and clutch cable holder.

NOTE:

Loosen each bolt 1/4 of a turn at a time and after all the bolts are loosened, remove them.

- Remove the crankcase (right).

NOTE:

• Place the crankcase with its left side downward and split it by inserting a screw-driver tip into the splitting slit ⓐ in the crankcase.
• Lift the crankcase (right) horizontally while lightly patting the case splitting slit and engine mounting boss using a soft hammer, and leave the crankshaft and transmission with the crankcase (left).

CAUTION:

Use soft hammer to tap on the case half. Tap only on reinforced portions of case. Do not tap on gasket mating surface. Work slowly and carefully. Make sure the case halves separate evenly. If one end "hangs up", take pressure off the push screw, realign, and start over. If the cases do not separate, check for a remaining case screw or fitting. Do not force.

- Remove the dowel pins and O-ring.

POINTS DE DEPOSE

Carter

1. Séparer:

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered parts labeled ① and ②

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled components and a schematic of a vehicle under load.

Diagram of a human hand holding a chain with two circular insets showing internal structure (no text or symbols)

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with labeled parts (a) and (b)

11610101

Crankshaft

1. Remove:

• Crankshaft ①

Use the crankcase separating tool ②.

Crankcase separating tool: YU-1135-A/90890-01135

CAUTION:

Do not use a hammer to drive out the crankshaft.

Crankshaft bearing

1. Remove:

• Bearing ①

NOTE:

- Remove the bearing from the crankcase by pressing its inner race.

• Do not use the removed bearing.

INSPECTION

Timing chain and timing chain guide

1. Inspect:

- Timing chain

Cracks/stiff → Replace the timing chain and camshaft sprocket as a set.

1. Inspect:

• Timing chain guide

Wear/damage → Replace.

EC4N4101

Crankcase

1. Inspect:

- Contacting surface ⓐ

Scratches → Replace.

• Engine mounting boss ⓑ, crankcase

Cracks/damage → Replace.

1. Inspect:

• Bearing

Rotate inner race with a finger.

Rough spot/seizure → Replace.

1. Inspect:

. Oil seal

Wear/damage → Replace.

Vilebrequin

1. Déposer:

• Vilebrequin ①

Diagram of a mechanical or fluid system with labeled components a and b, showing directional flow arrows.

d C

EC4N4201

Crankshaft

1. Measure:

• Runout limit ⓐ
• Small end free play limit ⑥
- Connecting rod big end side clearance ©
• Crank width ⓓ

Out of specification → Replace.

Use the dial gauge and a thickness gauge.

Dial gauge and stand: YU-3097/90890-01252

	Standard
Runout limit:	0.03 mm(0.0012 in)	0.05 mm(0.002 in)
Small end free play:	0.4 ~ 1.0 mm(0.016 ~ 0.039 in)	2.0 mm(0.08 in)
Side clearance:	0.15 ~ 0.45 mm(0.0059 ~ 0.0177 in)	0.50 mm(0.02 in)
Crack width:	61.95 ~ 62.00 mm(2.439 ~ 2.441 in)	—

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with a circular mesh grille and mounting bracket (no text or symbols)

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a shaft with multiple bearings and two washers, no text or symbols present

Oil strainer

1. Inspect:

• Oil strainer

Damage → Replace.

Oil delivery pipe

1. Inspect:

- Oil delivery pipe

Cracks/damage → Replace.

• Oil delivery pipe holes ①

Clogged → Blow out with compressed air.

Vilebrequin

1. Mesurer:

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with labeled parts and exploded view

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components for identification

A ② ③ ④ ⑤

B ② ⑤ ③ ④

FC4N5000

ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION Crankshaft bearing

1. Install:

• Bearing

New

• Bearing stopper
• Screw (bearing stopper)

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

- Screw [bearing stopper (crankshaft)] ①

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

To crankcase (left and right).

NOTE:

• Install the bearing by pressing its outer race parallel.
• To prevent the screw [bearing stopper (crankshaft)] from becoming loose, crush the screw head periphery ① into the concave ② using a punch etc. In so doing, take care not to damage the screwdriver receiving hole in the screw head.

Crankshaft

1. Install:

• Crankshaft ①

Use the crankshaft installing tool ②, ③, ④, ⑤.

Crankshaft installing tool:

Pot ②:

YU-90050/90890-01274

Bolt ③:

YU-90050/90890-01275

Adapter ④:

YM-1277/90890-01277

Spacer ⑤:

YM-91044/90890-04081

A For USA and CDN
B Except for USA and CDN

NOTE:

• Hold the connecting rod at top dead center with one hand while turning the nut of the installing tool with the other. Operate the installing tool until the crankshaft bottoms against the bearing.
• Before installing the crankshaft, clean the contacting surface of crankcase.

CAUTION:

Do not use a hammer to drive in the crankshaft.

ASSEMBLAGE ET MONTAGE Roulement de vilebrequin

1. Installer:

• Roulement

New

Mechanical gear assembly diagram showing gear meshing and shaft alignment (no text or labels)

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled parts and numbered annotations

Technical line drawing of an internal combustion engine component (no text or labels)

① ① ② New

2. Check:

• Shifter operation
  • Transmission operation
  Unsmooth operation → Repair.

3. Install:

. Oil strainer ①
• Bolt (oil strainer) ②

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

4. Apply:

• Sealant
  On the crankcase (right) ①.

Quick gasket®:

ACC-QUICK-GS-KT

YAMAHA Bond No. 1215:

90890-85505

NOTE:

Clean the contacting surface of crankcase (left and right) before applying the sealant.

5. Install:

• Dowel pin ①
• O-ring ②
New
• Crankcase (right)
To crankcase (left).

NOTE:

• Fit the crankcase (right) onto the crankcase (left). Tap lightly on the case with soft hammer.
• When installing the crankcase, the connecting rod should be positioned at TDC (top dead center).

CARTER ET VILEBREQUIN KURBELGEHÄUSE UND KURBELWELLE CÁRTER Y CIGÜEÑAL

ENG

2. Contrôler:

Technical diagram of an automotive gear assembly with numbered components labeled ① and ②

6. Tighten:

• Hose guide ①
- Clutch cable holder ②
• Bolt (crankcase)

12 Nm (1.2 m · kg, 8.7 ft · lb)

NOTE:

Tighten the crankcase tightening bolts in stage, using a crisscross pattern.

7. Install:

• Oil delivery pipe
. O-ring New
• Bolt (oil delivery pipe)

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

8. Install:

• Timing chain
  • Timing chain guide (rear)
  • Bolt (timing chain guide)

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

9. Remove:

- Sealant

Forced out on the cylinder mating surface.

10.Apply:

- Engine oil

To the crank pin, bearing and oil delivery hole.

11.Check:

- Crankshaft and transmission operation. Unsmooth operation → Repair.

6. Monter:

TRANSMISSION, SHIFT CAM AND SHIFT FORK

TRANSMISSION, SHIFT CAM AND SHIFT FORK

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components and labeled parts (A–M)

Extent of removal: ① Shift fork, shift cam, main axle and drive axle removal

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
Preparation for removal	Engine	TRANSMISSION, SHIFT CAM AND SHIFT FORK REMOVALRefer to “ENGINE REMOVAL” section.Separate the crankcase. Refer to “CRANKCASE AND CRANK-SHAFT” section.
1	1 Shift fork 1 12 Shift fork 2 13 Shift fork 3 14 Shift cam 15 Main axle 16 Drive axle 17 Collar		1	Refer to “REMOVAL POINTS”.

BOITE A VITESSES, TAMBOUR ET FOURCHETTE DE SELECTION

BOITE A VITESSES, TAMBOUR, FOURCHETTE DE SELECTION ET VILEBREQUIN

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a hand operating a tool on a mechanical component (no text or labels visible)

FC4H3000

REMOVAL POINTS

Shift fork, shaft cam and transmission

1. Remove:

• Shift forks
- Shift cam
• Main axle
- Drive axle

NOTE:

• Tap lightly on the transmission drive axle and shift cam with a soft hammer to remove.
• Remove assembly carefully. Note the position of each part. Pay particular attention to the location and direction of shift forks.

Technical diagram of a gear with labeled parts a, b, and c

EC4H4000

INSPECTION

EC4H4200

Gears

1. Inspect:

• Matching dog ⓐ
• Gear teeth ⑥
• Shift fork groove ©
Wear/damage → Replace.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical gear assembly with no visible text or symbols

1. Inspect:

• O-ring ①
Damage → Replace.

1. Check:

• Gears movement
Unsmooth movement → Repair or replace.

Technical drawing of a mechanical bearing assembly with sectional views and dimension annotations

EC4H4600

Bearing

1. Inspect:

2. Bearing ①
   Rotate inner race with a finger.
   Rough spot/seizure → Replace.

POINTS DE DEPOSE

Mechanical linkage diagram showing two connected components with a numbered label (1) pointing to one end (no text or symbols present)

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with labeled parts ① and ②

Line drawing of a hand adjusting a mechanical component with arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Technical diagram of mechanical assembly with numbered components and a labeled component M

EC4H4801

Shift fork, shift cam and segment

1. Inspect:

- Shift fork ① Wear/damage/scratches → Replace.

1. Inspect:

- Shift cam ① - Segment ② Bend/wear/damage → Replace.

1. Check:

- Shift fork movement Unsmooth operation → Replace shift fork.

NOTE:

For a malfunctioning shift fork, replace not only the shift fork itself but the two gears each adjacent to the shift fork.

ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION

Transmission

1. Install:

2. 5th pinion gear (25T) ①
   • 3rd pinion gear (16T) ②
   • Collar ③
   • 4th pinion gear (20T) ④
   •2nd pinion gear (15T) ⑤
   To main axle ⑥.

NOTE:

• Apply the molybdenum disulfide oil on the 4th and 5th pinion gears inner circumference and on the end surface.
• Apply the molybdenum disulfide oil on the 2nd and 3rd pinion gears inner circumference.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components and labeled parts (1–7)

New ① ② ③ a

Technical line drawing of a gear assembly with two views: one showing teeth and the other showing a curved mechanical component (no text or symbols)

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

2. Install:

•2nd wheel gear (26T) ①
• 4th wheel gear (21T) ②
•3rd wheel gear (21T) ③
• 5th wheel gear (21T) ④
- 1st wheel gear (29T) ⑤
• O-ring ⑥

To drive axle ⑦.

NOTE:

• Apply the molybdenum disulfide oil on the 1st, 2nd and 3rd wheel gears inner circumference and on the end surface.
• Apply the molybdenum disulfide oil on the 4th and 5th wheel gears inner circumference.
• Apply the lithium soap base grease on the O-ring.

3. Install:

• Plain washer ①
  • Circlip ② New

NOTE:

• Be sure the circlip sharp-edged corner ⓐ is positioned opposite side to the plain washer and gear ⓑ.
• Be sure the circlip end © is positioned at axle spline groove ⓐ.

4. Install:

• Collar ①

NOTE:

• Apply the lithium soap base grease on the oil seal lip.
• When installing the spacer into the crankcase, pay careful attention to the crankcase oil seal lip.

2. Monter:

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating assembly steps

Mechanical gear assembly diagram showing gear and shaft components (no text or labels)

5. Install:

• Shift fork 1 (L) ①
• Shift fork 2 (C) ②
• Shift fork 3 (R) ③
- Shift cam ④

To main axle and drive axle.

NOTE:

• Apply the molybdenum disulfide oil on the shift fork grooves.
• Mesh the shift fork #1 (L) with the 4th wheel gear ⑤ and #3 (R) with the 5th wheel gear ⑦ on the drive axle.
• Mesh the shift fork #2 (C) with the 3rd pinion gear ⑥ on the main axle.

6. Install:

• Transmission assembly ①

To crankcase (left) ②.

NOTE:

Apply the engine oil on the bearings and guide bars.

7. Check:

• Shifter operation
  • Transmission operation

Unsmooth operation → Repair.

5. Monter:

① Front wheel removal

② Wheel bearing removal

③ Break disc removal

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
Preparation for removal		FRONT WHEEL REMOVALHold the machine by placing the suitable stand under the engine.
	1 Trip meter cable 12 Hose cover 13 Bolt (brake hose holder) 2 Only loosening.4 Bolt (axle holder) 4 Only loosening.5 Nut (front wheel axle) 16 Front wheel axle 17 Front wheel 18 Trip meter gear unit 19 Collar 110 Oil seal11 Bearing12 Brake disc	12 Refer to “REMOVAL POINTS”.1

PARTIE CYCLE

ROUE AVANT ET ROUE ARRIERE

ROUE AVANT

① Rear wheel removal

② Wheel bearing removal

③ Brake disc removal

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
Preparation for removal			REAR WHEEL REMOVALHold the machine by placing the suitable stand under the engine.
		1 Nut (rear wheel axle) 12 Rear wheel axle 13 Chain puller 24 Rear wheel 1 Refer to “REMOVAL POINTS”.5 Collar 26 Driven sprocket 17 Oil seal 28 Circlip 19 Bearing 2 Refer to “REMOVAL POINTS”.10 Brake disc	1

ROUE AVANT ET ROUE ARRIERE

VORDER- UND HINTERRAD

RUEDA DELANTERA Y RUEDA TRASERA

CHAS

ROUE ARRIERE

Technical diagram showing a chain drive mechanism with labeled parts ① and ②

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts ① and ②, showing components like bolts, springs, and a central housing.

Technical diagram showing mechanical device and clamp assembly with labeled components

Technical diagram of two mechanical bearing assemblies with alignment arrows (no text or labels)

FC593000

REMOVAL POINTS

EC523101

Rear wheel

1. Remove:

- Wheel ①

NOTE:

Push the wheel forward and remove the drive chain ②.

EC513201

Wheel bearing (if necessary)

1. Remove:

. Bearing ①

NOTE:

Remove the bearing using a general bearing puller ②.

EC594000

INSPECTION

EC514100

Wheel

1. Measure:

. Wheel runout

Out of limit → Repair/replace.

Wheel runout limit:

Radial ①: 2.0 mm (0.08 in)

Lateral ②: 2.0 mm (0.08 in)

1. Inspect:

- Bearing

Rotate inner race with a finger.

Rough spot/seizure → Replace.

NOTE:

Replace the bearings, oil seal and wheel collar as a set.

POINTS DE DEPOSE

Roue arrière

1. Déposer:

- Roue ①

N.B.:

Technical diagram of a dial indicator measuring a mechanical setup with labeled component 1

EC514200

Wheel axle

1. Measure:

- Wheel axle bends Out of specification → Replace. Use the dial gauge ①.

Wheel axle bending limit: 0.5 mm (0.020 in)

NOTE:

The bending value is shown by one half of the dial gauge reading.

WARNING

Do not attempt to straighten a bent axle.

a ① 12210203

EC594200

Brake disc

1. Measure:

- Brake disc deflection (only rear brake disc) Use the dial gauge ①. Out of specification → Inspect wheel runout. If wheel runout is in good condition, replace the brake disc.

	Disc deflection limit:
	Standard
Rear —		0.15 mm(0.006 in)

1. Measure:

- Brake disc thickness ⓐ Out of limit → Replace.

	Disc wear limit:
	Standard
Front	3.0 mm(0.12 in)	2.5 mm(0.10 in)
Rear	4.0 mm(0.16 in)	3.5 mm(0.14 in)

ROUE AVANT ET ROUE ARRIERE VORDER- UND HINTERRAD RUEDA DELANTERA Y RUEDA TRASERA

Axe de roue

1. Mesurer:

① ② ③ ④ New

graph TD
    1 --> 2
    2 --> 3
    3 --> 4
    4 --> 5
    5 --> 6
    6 --> 1
    1 --> 2
    2 --> 3
    3 --> 4
    4 --> 5
    5 --> 6
    6 --> 1
    style 1 fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style 2 fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style 3 fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style 4 fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style 5 fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style 6 fill:#fff,stroke:#000

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly steps with labeled parts and a magnified inset of a valve mechanism

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with labeled parts a and b, showing internal components and assembly lines.

FC595000

ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION

Front wheel

1. Install:

2. Bearing (left) ①

3. Spacer ②
4. Bearing (right) ③
5. Oil seal ④ New

NOTE:

• Apply the lithium soap base grease on the bearing and oil seal lip when installing.
• Use a socket that matches the outside diameter of the race of the bearing.
• Left side of bearing shall be installed first.
• Install the oil seal with its manufacture's marks or numbers facing outward.

CAUTION:

Do not strike the inner race of the bearing. Contact should be made only with the outer race.

1. Install:

2. Brake disc ①
   • Bolt (brake disc) ②

12 Nm (1.2 m · kg, 8.7 ft · lb)

NOTE:

Tighten the bolts in stage, using a crisscross pattern.

1. Install:

• Collar ①

NOTE:

• Apply the lithium soap base grease on the oil seal lip.
  • Install the collar with their projection @ facing the wheel.

• Install:

- Trip meter gear unit ①

NOTE:

Make sure the two projections ① in the wheel hub are meshed with the two slots ② in the trip meter gear unit.

REMONTAGE ET MONTAGE

Roue avant

1. Monter:

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts a and b

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts and directional arrow indicator

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled component ①

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with labeled parts ① and ②

Line drawing of a bicycle's front wheel and suspension mechanism, showing mechanical components and motion arrows (no text or symbols)

1. Install:

.Wheel

NOTE:

• Install the brake disc between the brake pads correctly.

- Make sure that the projections ① in the trip meter gear unit fits over the stopper ② on the front fork outer tube.

1. Install:

- Wheel axle ①

NOTE: Apply the lithium soap base grease on the wheel axle.

1. Install:

- Nut (wheel axle) ①

105 Nm (10.5 m · kg, 75 ft · lb)

1. Tighten:

• Bolt (axle holder) ①

23 Nm (2.3 m · kg, 17 ft · lb)

NOTE: Before tightening the bolt, fit the wheel axle to the axle holder by stroking the front fork several times with the front brake applied.

ROUE AVANT ET ROUE ARRIERE VORDER- UND HINTERRAD RUEDA DELANTERA Y RUEDA TRASERA

5. Monter:

• Roue

N.B.:

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts (a, b, ①, ②) showing components like springs and gears.

9. Install:

- Brake hose ①

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

To brake hose holder ②.

NOTE:

Before tightening the bolt (brake hose holder), pass the brake hose in front of the axle boss ⓐ, then fit it into the hose groove ⓑ so that the brake hose does not contact the nut (wheel axle).

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components for identification

10. Install:

• Hose cover ①

- Plain washer ②

• Bolt [hose cover (M8)] ③

16 Nm (1.6 m · kg, 11 ft · lb)

• Bolt [hose cover (M6)] ④

7 Nm (0.7 m · kg, 5.1 ft · lb)

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled component ①

11.Install:

- Trip meter cable ①

9. Monter:

• Tuyau de frein ①

10 Nm (1,0 m · kg, 7,2 ft · lb)

• Bearing (right) ①
• Circlip ② New
- Spacer ③
• Bearing (left) ④
. Oil seal ⑤ New

NOTE:

• Apply the lithium soap base grease on the bearing and oil seal lip when installing.
  • Install the bearing with seal facing outward.
• Use a socket that matches the outside diameter of the race of the bearing.
  • Right side of bearing shall be installed first.
  • Install the oil seal with its manufacture's marks or numbers facing outward.

CAUTION:

Do not strike the inner race of the bearing. Contact should be made only with the outer race.

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with numbered parts and directional arrows indicating motion or assembly.

1. Install:

2. Brake disc ①
   • Bolt (brake disc) ②

NOTE:

Tighten the bolts in stage, using a crisscross pattern.

Technical diagram of a mechanical gear assembly with numbered components and directional arrows indicating motion or assembly.

1. Install:

2. Driven sprocket ①
   • Bolt (driven sprocket) ②

3. Plain washer (driven sprocket) ③
   • Nut (driven sprocket) ④

NOTE:

Tighten the nuts in stage, using a crisscross pattern.

Roue arrière

1. Monter:

Technical diagram showing a hand adjusting a gear mechanism with labeled parts ① and B

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts ① and ②

Technical diagram showing a chain drive mechanism with labeled parts ① and ②

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components and labeled parts

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components, likely a valve or pump component.

1. Install:

• Collar ①

NOTE:

Apply the lithium soap base grease on the oil seal lip.

1. Install:

.Wheel

NOTE: Install the brake disc ① between the brake pads ② correctly.

1. Install:

- Drive chain ①

NOTE:

Push the wheel ② forward and install the drive chain.

1. Install:

- Chain puller (left) ①

• Wheel axle ②

NOTE:

• Install the chain puller (left), and insert the wheel axle from left side.

- Apply the lithium soap base grease on the wheel axle.

1. Install:

- Chain puller (right) ①

- Plain washer ②

• Nut (wheel axle) ③

NOTE:

Temporarily tighten the nut (wheel axle) at this point.

ROUE AVANT ET ROUE ARRIERE VORDER- UND HINTERRAD RUEDA DELANTERA Y RUEDA TRASERA

4. Monter:

• Collerette ①

N.B.:

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled component 'a' and directional arrow

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts ① and ②

9. Adjust:

• Drive chain slack ⓐ

Drive chain slack: 40 \~ 50 mm (1.6 \~ 2.0 in)

Refer to "DRIVE CHAIN SLACK ADJUSTMENT" section in the CHAPTER 3.

10. Tighten:

• Nut (wheel axle) ①

125 Nm (12.5 m · kg, 90 ft · lb)

- Locknut ②

9. Régler:

Extent of removal: ① Brake hose removal ② Caliper removal

③ Master cylinder removal

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
Preparation for removal			FRONT BRAKE REMOVALHold the machine by placing the suitable stand under the engine.Drain the brake fluid.
		1 Hose cover 12 Brake hose holder 13 Bolt (brake hose holder) 2 Only loosening.4 Union bolt 25 Brake hose 16 Pad pin plug 1 Remove when loosening the pad pin.7 Pad pin 1 Loosen when disassembling the caliper.8 Caliper 19 Brake lever 110 Master cylinder bracket 111 Master cylinder	1

FREIN AVANT ET FREIN ARRIERE

FREIN AVANT

Extent of removal: ① Caliper removal ② Brake hose removal

③ Master cylinder removal

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
Preparation for removal				REAR BRAKE REMOVALHold the machine by placing the suitable stand under the engine.Rear wheel Refer to “FRONT WHEEL AND REARWHEEL” section.Drain the brake fluid. Refer to “REMOVAL POINTS”.
(HOT6)1↑	[70YT]	[A55S]	1 Pad pin plug 1 Remove when loosening the pad pin.2 Pad pin 1 Loosen when disassembling the caliper.3 Caliper 14 Brake hose holder 25 Union bolt 26 Brake hose7 Brake pedal8 Reservoir tank9 Reservoir hose10 Master cylinder	1111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111

FREIN AVANT ET FREIN ARRIERE VORDER- UND HINTERRADBREMSE FRENO DELANTERO Y FRENO TRASERO

FREIN ARRIERE

3Nm (0.3m·kg,2.2ft·lb) 18Nm (1.8m·kg,13ft·lb) 6Nm (0.6m·kg,4.3ft·lb) New A B New 6Nm (0.6m·kg,4.3ft·lb) New New 18Nm (1.8m·kg,13ft·lb) 3Nm (0.3m·kg,2.2ft·lb)

A Front

B Rear

Extent of removal:

① Front caliper disassembly

② Rear caliper disassembly

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
		CALIPER DISASSEMBLY A B
		Pad pin 1 1Brake pad 2 2Pad support 1 1Caliper piston 2 1 Refer to “REMOVAL POINTS”.
		Dust sealPiston seal		22	Refer to “REMOVAL POINTS”.

FREIN AVANT ET FREIN ARRIERE VORDER- UND HINTERRADBREMSE RUEDA DELANTERA Y RUEDA TRASERA

DEMONTAGE DE L'ETRIER

A Avant
B Arrière

① Front master cylinder disassembly

② Rear master cylinder disassembly

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
1↑ 2↑	1 Master cylinder cap 12 Diaphragm 13 Master cylinder boot 14 Circlip 1 Use a long nose circlip pliers.5 Plain washer 16 Push rod 17 Master cylinder kit	MASTER CYLINDER DISASSEMBLY

FREIN AVANT ET FREIN ARRIERE

VORDER- UND HINTERRADBREMSE

FRENO DELANTERO Y FRENO TRASERO

CHAS

DEMONTAGE DU MAITRE-CYLINDRE

A Avant
B Arrière

Line drawing of hands using a mechanical clamp to adjust or install a component (no text or symbols present)

Line drawing of a hand using a tool to adjust or install a mechanical component (no text or symbols visible)

EC5A3000

REMOVAL POINTS

Brake fluid

1. Remove:

[Front]

• Master cylinder cap ①
[Rear]
• Master cylinder guard ①
• Reservoir tank cap ②

NOTE:

Do not remove the diaphragm.

A Front
B Rear

1. Connect the transparent hose ② to the bleed screw ① and place a suitable container under its end.

A Front
B Rear

1. Loosen the bleed screw and drain the brake fluid while pulling the lever in or pushing down on the pedal.

CAUTION:

. Do not reuse the drained brake fluid.
- Brake fluid may erode painted surfaces or plastic parts. Always clean up spilled fluid immediately.

EC533301

Caliper piston

1. Remove:

• Caliper piston

Use compressed air and proceed carefully.

WARNING

• Cover piston with rag and use extreme caution when expelling piston from cylinder.
  . Never attempt to pry out piston.

Caliper piston removal steps:

• Insert a piece of rag into the caliper to lock one caliper.
• Carefully force the piston out of the caliper cylinder with compressed air.

A Front
B Rear

POINTS DE DEPOSE

Liquide de frein

1. Déposer:

[Arrière]

A ① ② ② ①

B ① ②

A B a a

A ① B ①

A ① ② B ① ②

EC533402

Piston seal kit

1. Remove:

• Dust seal ①
• Piston seal ②

NOTE:

Remove the piston seals and dust seals by pushing them with a finger.

CAUTION:

Never attempt to pry out piston seals and dust seals.

WARNING

Replace the piston seals and dust seals whenever a caliper is disassembled.

A Front
B Rear

EC5A4000

INSPECTION

EC534112

Master cylinder

1. Inspect:

- Master cylinder inner surface @ Wear/scratches → Replace master cylinder assembly. Stains → Clean.

WARNING

Use only new brake fluid.

A Front
B Rear

1. Inspect:

• Diaphragm ① Crack/damage → Replace.

A Front
B Rear

1. Inspect:

- Master cylinder piston ① - Master cylinder cup ② Wear/damage/score marks → Replace master cylinder kit.

A Front
B Rear

Technical diagram showing three labeled components: a cylindrical part, two ring rings, and a separate circular component with numbered annotations.

Diagram of a curved mechanical or electrical component with labeled parts (no text or symbols present)

EC534214

Caliper

1. Inspect:

- Caliper cylinder inner surface @ Wear/score marks → Replace caliper assembly.

A Front

B Rear

1. Inspect:

- Caliper piston ① Wear/score marks → Replace caliper piston assembly.

WARNING

Replace the piston seals and dust seals ② whenever a caliper is disassembled.

EC534301

Brake hose

1. Inspect:

- Brake hose ① Crack/damage → Replace.

EC5A5000

ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION

WARNING

• All internal parts should be cleaned in new brake fluid only.
• Internal parts should be lubricated with brake fluid when installed.
• Replace the piston seals and dust seals whenever a caliper is disassembled.

EC5A5800

Caliper piston

1. Clean:

• Caliper
• Piston seal
• Dust seal
- Caliper piston
Clean them with brake fluid.

Etrier

1. Contrôler:

A ① ① New ② ② New

B ① New ② New

A ① ① a

B ① b ①

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered parts and an inset view labeled a and b

1. Install:

Piston seal ①

New

• Dust seal ②

New

WARNING

Always use new piston seals and dust seals.

NOTE:

Fit the piston seals and dust seals onto the slot on caliper correctly.

A Front

B Rear

1. Install:

- Caliper piston ①

NOTE:

Apply the brake fluid on the piston wall.

CAUTION:

- For the front caliper, install the piston with its depressed side ⓐ facing the caliper. For the rear caliper, install the piston with its shallow depressed side ⓑ facing the caliper.

. Never force to insert.

A Front

B Rear

EC5A5700

Front caliper

1. Install:

• Pad support ①

- Brake pad ②

• Pad pin ③

NOTE:

• Install the brake pads with their projections Ⓐ into the caliper recesses ⓑ.

• Temporarily tighten the pad pin at this point.

FREIN AVANT ET FREIN ARRIERE VORDER- UND HINTERRADBREMSE FRENO DELANTERO Y FRENO TRASERO

2. Monter:

• Joint de piston ①

New

• Joint antipoussière

)

New

AVERTISSEMENT

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts a and b

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components for identification

2. Install:

• Copper washer ①

New

- Union bolt ②

30 Nm (3.0 m · kg, 22 ft · lb)

WARNING

Always use new copper washers.

CAUTION:

Install the brake hose so that its pipe portion ⓐ directs as show and lightly touches the projection Ⓑ on the caliper.

3. Install:

- Brake hose holder ①

• Caliper ②

• Bolt (caliper) ③

23 Nm (2.3 m · kg, 17 ft · lb)

NOTE:

Fit the brake hose holder cut ⓐ over the projection ⓑ on the front fork and clamp the brake hose.

4. Tighten:

- Pad pin ④

18 Nm (1.8 m · kg, 13 ft · lb)

5. Install:

- Pad pin plug ⑤

3 Nm (0.3 m · kg, 2.2 ft · lb)

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components and an inset view labeled 'a'

EC5A5100

Rear caliper

1. Install:

• Pad support ①
• Brake pad ②
• Pad pin ③

NOTE:

• Install the brake pads with their projections ① into the caliper recesses ②.
• Temporarily tighten the pad pin at this point.

FREIN AVANT ET FREIN ARRIERE VORDER- UND HINTERRADBREMSE FRENO DELANTERO Y FRENO TRASERO

2. Monter:

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with numbered parts labeled 1, 2, and 3.

New ① ② ③ ④ a

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with a labeled component (b), showing no text or symbols beyond the label.

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with numbered components for identification

2. Install:

• Disc cover ①
• Bolt (disc cover) ②

7 Nm (0.7 m · kg, 5.1 ft · lb)

3. Install:

• Copper washer ①
New
- Brake hose ②
- Union bolt ③

30 Nm (3.0 m · kg, 22 ft · lb)

WARNING

Always use new copper washers.

CAUTION:

Install the brake hose to the caliper with the paint ⓐ on the pipe facing the caliper and with the pipe contacting the caliper projection Ⓐ.

4. Install:

• Caliper ①
  • Rear wheel ②

Refer to "FRONT WHEEL AND REAR WHEEL" section.

5. Tighten:

• Pad pin ③

18 Nm (1.8 m · kg, 13 ft · lb)

6. Install:

- Pad pin plug ④

3 Nm (0.3 m · kg, 2.2 ft · lb)

2. Monter:

• Master cylinder
• Master cylinder kit

Clean them with brake fluid.

A ② ① ③ B ① ② ③

A ② ① ③ B ① ② ③

A ② ① B ② ①

2. Install:

• Master cylinder cup (primary) ①
• Master cylinder cup (secondary) ②

To master cylinder piston ③.

NOTE: ____

Apply the brake fluid on the master cylinder cup.

WARNING

After installing, cylinder cup should be installed as shown direction. Wrong installation cause improper brake performance.

A Front
B Rear

3. Install:

• Spring ①

To master cylinder piston ②.

NOTE:

Install the spring at the smaller dia. side.

A Front
B Rear

A ⑤ ① ② ③ ④

B ⑤ ① ② ③ ④ B

4. Install:

[Front]

• Master cylinder kit ①
- Plain washer ②
• Circlip ③
• Master cylinder boot ④ To master cylinder ⑤.

[Rear]

• Master cylinder kit ①
• Push rod ②
• Circlip ③
• Master cylinder boot ④ To master cylinder ⑤.

NOTE:

• Apply the brake fluid on the master cylinder kit.
• Apply the lithium soap base grease on the tip of the push rod.
• When installing the circlip, use a long nose circlip pliers.

A Front
B Rear

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts and directional indicator 'UP'

EC5A5310

Front master cylinder

1. Install:

• Master cylinder ①
• Master cylinder bracket ②
• Bolt (master cylinder bracket) ③

9 Nm (0.9 m · kg, 6.5 ft · lb)

NOTE:

• Install the bracket so that the arrow mark ⓐ face upward.
- First tighten the bolts on the upper side of the master cylinder bracket, and then tighten the bolts on the lower side.

4. Monter:

[Avant]

Technical diagram showing a hand operating a tool with labeled parts and a connector labeled B

① ② - UPPER - LOWER ③

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components, likely for assembly or maintenance reference.

New ① ② ③ ④ B ⑤ ⑥ a

2. Install:

• Brake lever ①
  • Bolt (brake lever) ②

6 Nm (0.6 m · kg, 4.3 ft · lb)

• Nut (brake lever) ③

6 Nm (0.6 m · kg, 4.3 ft · lb)

NOTE:

Apply the lithium soap base grease on the brake lever sliding surface, bolt and contacting surface of the master cylinder piston.

Rear master cylinder

1. Install:

• Reservoir hose ①
• Reservoir tank ②
• Bolt (reservoir tank) ③

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

2. Install:

• Master cylinder ①
  • Bolt (master cylinder) ②

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

3. Install:

• Spring ①
• Brake pedal ②
.O-ring ③ New
• Bolt (brake pedal) ④

26 Nm (2.6 m · kg, 19 ft · lb)

- Clip ⑤

NOTE:

• Apply the lithium soap base grease on the bolt, O-ring and brake pedal bracket.
• Install the clip with its stopper portion @ facing inward.

FREIN AVANT ET FREIN ARRIERE VORDER- UND HINTERRADBREMSE FRENO DELANTERO Y FRENO TRASERO

2. Monter:

• Levier de frein ①

•Cilindro principal ①

• Perno (cilindro principal) ②

3. Monter:

• Ressort ①

• Pédale de frein ②

Technical diagram showing a mechanical assembly with numbered components and a label 'New' in the corner.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts a, b, and numbered annotations

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components for identification

Technical diagram of a mechanical device with labeled parts (a, 1, 2) and numbered components

4. Install:

• Pin ①
- Plain washer ②
• Cotter pin ③ New

NOTE: After installing, check the brake pedal height. Refer to "REAR BRAKE ADJUSTMENT" section in the CHAPTER 3.

Front brake hose

1. Install:

- Brake hose ①

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

To brake hose holder ②.

NOTE: ____ Before tightening the bolt (brake hose holder), pass the brake hose in front of the axle boss ⓐ, then fit it into the hose groove Ⓐ so that the brake hose does not contact the nut (wheel axle).

2. Install:

• Hose cover ①
• Plain washer ②
  • Bolt [hose cover (M8)] ③

16 Nm (1.6 m · kg, 11 ft · lb)

• Bolt [hose cover (M6)] ④

7 Nm (0.7 m · kg, 5.1 ft · lb)

1. Pass the brake hose through the cable guide ①, then through the guide ② on the protector ②.

FREIN AVANT ET FREIN ARRIERE VORDER- UND HINTERRADBREMSE FRENO DELANTERO Y FRENO TRASERO

4. Monter:

• Goupille ①

① New ② ③

Technical diagram of a mechanical device with labeled parts and an inset showing a component detail view.

① New ③ New ④

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts a, b, c, d and a plus symbol indicating a joint or connection.

4. Install:

• Copper washer ①

New

- Brake hose ②

• Union bolt ③

30 Nm (3.0 m · kg, 22 ft · lb)

WARNING

Always use new copper washers.

CAUTION:

Install the brake hose so that its pipe portion ⓐ directs as show and lightly touches the projection Ⓑ on the master cylinder.

EC5A5500

Rear brake hose

1. Install:

• Copper washer ①

New

- Brake hose ②

• Copper washer ③

New

• Union bolt ④

30 Nm (3.0 m · kg, 22 ft · lb)

WARNING

Always use new copper washers.

CAUTION:

When installing the brake hose, first align the tooth ⓐ on the copper washer ① with the projection Ⓑ on the master cylinder. Then, align the pipe portion Ⓒ on the end of the brake hose with the tooth ⓓ on the copper washer ① and tighten the union bolt.

FREIN AVANT ET FREIN ARRIERE VORDER- UND HINTERRADBREMSE FRENO DELANTERO Y FRENO TRASERO

4. Monter:

New

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with numbered components and labeled parts

Line drawing of a mechanical assembly with gears and a worm-like object, no text or symbols present

A a UP

B - UPPER - LOWER a

2. Install:

• Brake hose holder ①
  • Screw (brake hose holder) ②

4 Nm (0.4 m · kg, 2.9 ft · lb)

CAUTION:

After installing the brake hose holders, make sure the brake hose does not contact the spring (rear shock absorber). If it does, correct its twist.

Brake fluid

1. Fill:

- Brake fluid

Until the fluid level reaches "LOWER" level line @.

Recommended brake fluid: DOT #4

WARNING

. Use only the designated quality brake fluid:
otherwise, the rubber seals may deteriorate, causing leakage and poor brake performance.
- Refill with the same type of brake fluid; mixing fluids may result in a harmful chemical reaction and lead to poor performance.
- Be careful that water does not enter the master cylinder when refilling. Water will significantly lower the boiling point of the fluid and may result in vapor lock.

CAUTION:

Brake fluid may erode painted surfaces or plastic parts. Always clean up spilled fluid immediately.

A Front
B Rear

FREIN AVANT ET FREIN ARRIERE VORDER- UND HINTERRADBREMSE FRENO DELANTERO Y FRENO TRASERO

2. Monter:

Fluid at lower level → Fill up.

Refer to "BRAKE FLUID LEVEL

INSPECTION" section in the CHAPTER 3.

A ① ②

B ① UPPER LOWER ②

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components, likely illustrating a vehicle or mechanical assembly.

4. Install:

[Front]

• Diaphragm

• Master cylinder cap ①

• Screw (master cylinder cap) ②

2 Nm (0.2 m · kg, 1.4 ft · lb)

[Rear]

• Diaphragm

• Reservoir tank cap ①

• Screw (reservoir tank cap) ②

2 Nm (0.2 m · kg, 1.4 ft · lb)

• Master cylinder guard

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

CAUTION:

After installation, while pulling the lever in or pushing down on the pedal, check whether there is any brake fluid leaking where the union bolts are installed respectively at the master cylinder and caliper.

A Front

B Rear

1. Install: (rear brake only)

- Protector ①

• Bolt (protector) ②

7 Nm (0.7 m · kg, 5.1 ft · lb)

FREIN AVANT ET FREIN ARRIERE VORDER- UND HINTERRADBREMSE FRENO DELANTERO Y FRENO TRASERO

2. Purger l'air:

Extent of removal: ① Front fork removal

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
Preparation for removal		FRONT FORK REMOVALHold the machine by placing the suitable stand under the engine.Front wheel Refer to “FRONT WHEEL AND REARWHEEL” section.Front caliper Refer to “FRONT BRAKE AND REARBRAKE” section.HeadlightHandlebar Refer to “HANDLEBAR” section.
	1 Protector 12 Brake hose holder 23 Pinch bolt (handle crown) 2 Only loosening.4 Cap bolt 1 Loosen when disassembling the front fork.5 Pinch bolt (under bracket) 2 Only loosening.6 Front fork	1

FOURCHE AVANT

Extent of removal:
① Oil seal removal

② Damper rod removal

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
12	1 Cap bolt 1 Refer to “REMOVAL POINTS”.2 Fork spring 1 Drain the fork oil.3 Dust seal 15 Inner tube 16 Outer tube 17 Piston metal8 Slide metal9 Plain washer10 Oil seal11 Spring guide12 Base valve13 Damper rod	FRONT FORK DISASSEMBLY	Refer to “REMOVAL POINTS”.4 Stopper ring1Use special tool.1Refer to “REMOVAL POINTS”.

DEMONTAGE DE LA FOURCHE AVANT

The front fork requires careful attention. So it is recommended that the front fork be maintained at the dealers.

CAUTION:

To prevent an accidental explosion of air, the following instructions should be observed:

• The front fork with a built-in piston rod has a very sophisticated internal construction and is particularly sensitive to foreign material.
  Use enough care not to allow any foreign material to come in when the oil is replaced or when the front fork is disassembled and reassembled.
• Before removing the cap bolts or front forks, be sure to extract the air from the air chamber completely.

Line drawing of a hand holding a cylindrical object with a numbered label (1), no text or symbols present.

Technical diagram of a mechanical spring assembly with numbered parts labeled 1 to 5

EC553000

REMOVAL POINTS

EC553150

Cap bolt

1. Remove:

- Cap bolt ①

From the outer tube.

NOTE:

Before removing the front fork from the machine, loosen the cap bolt.

1. Remove:

- Cap bolt ①

NOTE:

• While compressing the fork spring, set the thin type spanners ② between the spacer ③ and spring guide ④.
• Hold the locknut ⑤ and remove the cap bolt.

REMARQUES CONCERNANT LA MANIPULATION

N.B.:

Technical diagram showing a mechanical assembly with labeled parts ① and ②, likely illustrating a pipe or connection mechanism.

Technical diagram showing hands operating a mechanical component with labeled parts ① and ②, including directional arrows.

Technical diagram of a mechanical device with numbered components labeled ①, ②, and ③.

Line drawing of a mechanical tool or rod with a flanged end and labeled component (no text or symbols present)

EC553201

Inner tube

1. Remove:

• Dust seal ①
- Stopper ring ②

Using slotted-head screwdriver.

CAUTION:

Take care not to scratch the inner tube.

1. Remove:

• Inner tube ①

Oil seal removal steps:

• Push in slowly ⓐ the inner tube just before it bottoms out and then pull it back quickly ⓑ.
• Repeat this step until the inner tube can be pulled out from the outer tube.

EC553311

Damper rod

1. Remove:

2. Base valve ①
   • Damper rod ②

NOTE:

Use a damper rod holder ③ to lock the damper rod.

Damper rod holder: YM-1423/90890-01423

EC554000

INSPECTION

EC554100

Damper rod

1. Inspect:

• Damper rod ①

Bend/damage → Replace damper rod.

CAUTION:

The front fork with a built-in piston rod has a very sophisticated internal construction and is particularly sensitive to foreign material.

Use enough care not to allow any foreign material to come in when the oil is replaced or when the front fork is disassembled and reassembled.

Tube interne

1. Déposer:

Technical diagram of a mechanical connector with labeled parts ① and ②

Diagram of a coiled spring with labeled dimension 'a' (no text or symbols beyond label)

Technical diagram of a mechanical device with labeled parts ① and ②, showing components like a valve and adjustment knob.

Line drawing of a cylindrical pipe with a flanged end and labeled point 1 (no text or symbols beyond label)

EC554200

Base valve

1. Inspect:

• Valve assembly ① Wear/damage → Replace.
  • O-ring ② Damage → Replace.

EC554400

Fork spring

1. Measure:

- Fork spring free length ⓐ Out of specification → Replace.

	Fork spring free length:
Standard
460 mm(18.1 in)		455 mm(17.9 in)

EC554502

Inner tube

1. Inspect:

• Inner tube surface @ Score marks → Repair or replace. Use #1,000 grit wet sandpaper. Damaged oil lock piece → Replace.
• Inner tube bends Out of specification → Replace. Use the dial gauge ①.

Inner tube bending limit: 0.2 mm (0.008 in)

NOTE:

The bending value is shown by one half of the dial gauge reading.

WARNING

Do not attempt to straighten a bent inner tube as this may dangerously weaken the tube.

EC554600

Outer tube

1. Inspect:

- Outer tube ① Score marks/wear/damage → Replace.

Soupape de base

1. Contrôler:

• Ensemble clapet ① Usure/endommagement → Changer.
  • Joint torique ② Endommagement → Changer.

Luftventil

1. Kontrollieren:

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with numbered parts labeled ①, ②, and ③

EC554700

Cap bolt

1. Inspect:

2. Cap bolt ①
   • O-ring ②
   • Air bleed screw ③
   Wear/damage → Replace.

EC555000

ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION

Front fork assembly

1. Wash the all parts in a clean solvent.

Technical diagram of a mechanical device with labeled parts ① and ②, showing exploded and assembled views.

1. Install:

• Damper rod ①
To inner tube ②.

CAUTION:

To install the damper rod into the inner tube, hold the inner tube aslant. If the inner tube is held vertically, the damper rod may fall into it, damaging the valve inside.

④ ③ ① New ②

1. Install:

• Copper washer ①
• O-ring ②
- Base valve ③
To inner tube ④.

New

Technical diagram of a mechanical device with numbered components labeled ①, ②, and ③.

1. Tighten:

- Base valve ①

55 Nm (5.5 m · kg, 40 ft · lb)

NOTE:

• Use a damper rod holder ② to lock the damper rod ③.
• Apply the LOCTITE ^® on the base valve thread.

Damper rod holder: YM-1423/90890-01423

Bouchon de fourche

1. Contrôler:

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts and an inset showing a cross-section view labeled 'b'.

New ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ New ⑥

③ ④ I2311310

① New

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with labeled parts ① and ②

5. Install:

• Spring guide ①
- Locknut ②

To damper rod ③.

NOTE:

• Install the spring guide with its cut @ facing upward.
- With its thread ⑥ facing upward, fully finger tighten the locknut onto the damper rod.

6. Install:

• Dust seal ①
- Stopper ring ②
. Oil seal ③ New
- Plain washer ④
• Slide metal ⑤ New

To inner tube ⑥.

NOTE:

• Apply the fork oil on the inner tube.
• When installing the oil seal, use vinyl seat ⓐ with fork oil applied to protect the oil seal lip.
  • Install the oil seal with its manufacture's marks or number facing the axle holder side.

7. Install:

Piston metal ①

New

NOTE:

Install the piston metal onto the slot on inner tube.

8. Install:

- Outer tube ①

To inner tube ②.

5. Monter:

• Guide de ressort ①

- Contre-écrou ②

Technical diagram of a pipe joint with labeled components ① and ②

Illustration of a hand holding a mechanical component with a numbered label (3), no text or symbols present.

Technical diagram showing a hand operating a mechanical component with labeled parts ① and ②

Technical line drawing of a mechanical joint or bearing assembly (no text or symbols)

Technical diagram showing a pipe joint with labeled component B and numbered point 1

9. Install:

• Slide metal ①
- Plain washer ②

To outer tube slot.

NOTE:

Press the slide metal into the outer tube with fork seal driver ③.

Fork seal driver: YM-01442/90890-01442

10. Install:

. Oil seal ①

NOTE:

Press the oil seal into the outer tube with fork seal driver ②.

Fork seal driver: YM-01442/90890-01442

11.Install:

- Stopper ring ①

NOTE:

Fit the stopper ring correctly in the groove in the outer tube.

12. Install:

• Dust seal ①

NOTE:

Apply the lithium soap base grease on the inner tube.

9. Monter:

• Bague antifriction ①
• Rondelle ordinaire ②

Line drawing of a hand holding a mechanical component with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Technical diagram showing a pipe being inserted into a cylindrical component, labeled with number ①

13.Check:

• Inner tube smooth movement Tightness/binding/rough spots → Repeat the steps 2 to 12.

1. Compress the front fork fully.

15.Fill:

- Front fork oil Until outer tube top surface with recommended fork oil ①.

Recommended oil: Suspension oil "01"

CAUTION:

• Be sure to use recommended fork oil. If other oils are used, they may have an excessively adverse effect on the front fork performance.
• Never allow foreign materials to enter the front fork.

Diagram showing a hand holding a cylindrical object with a labeled component and directional arrow indicating movement or force.

Technical diagram showing a hand operating a mechanical device with labeled component ① and directional arrows indicating movement.

1. After filling, pump the damper rod ① slowly up and down more than 10 times to distribute the fork oil.

2. Fill:

- Front fork oil Until outer tube top surface with recommended fork oil once more.

1. After filling, pump the outer tube ① slowly up and down (about 200 mm (7.9 in) stroke) to distribute the fork oil once more.

NOTE:

Be careful not to excessive full stroke. A stroke of 200 mm (7.9 in) or more will cause air to enter. In this case, repeat the steps 15 to 18.

1. Contrôler:

1. Wait ten minutes until the air bubbles have been removed from the front fork, and the oil has dispense evenly in system before setting recommended oil level.

NOTE:

Fill with the fork oil up to the top end of the outer tube, or the fork oil will not spread over to every part of the front forks, thus making it impossible to obtain the correct level.

Be sure to fill with the fork oil up to the top of the outer tube and bleed the front forks.

① ② ③ 311404

20.Measure:

• Oil level (left and right) ⓐ

Out of specification → Adjust.

Standard oil level:

135 mm (5.31 in)

*125 mm (4.92 in)

Extent of adjustment:

80 \~ 150 mm (3.15 \~ 5.91 in)

From top of outer tube with

inner tube and damper rod ①

fully compressed without

spring.

* For EUROPE

NOTE:

Be sure to install the spring guide ② when checking the oil level.

WARNING

Never fail to make the oil level adjustment between the maximum and minimum level and always adjust each front fork to the same setting. Uneven adjustment can cause poor handling and loss of stability.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts and dimension annotations

H-S ①

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with numbered parts and directional arrows indicating assembly or assembly.

Diagram showing a hand holding a coiled spring with labeled parts ①, ②, and ③

Technical line drawing of a mechanical spring assembly with threaded end (no text or symbols)

21.Measure:

• Distance ⓐ

Out of specification → Turn into the locknut.

Distance ①: 20 mm (0.79 in) or more Between damper rod ① top and locknut ② top.

22.Loosen:

• Rebound damping adjuster ①

NOTE:

- Loosen the rebound damping adjuster finger tight.

- Record the set position of the adjuster (the amount of turning out the fully turned in position).

23. Install

• Cushion rubber ①

.Washer ②

- Spacer ③

To cap bolt ④.

NOTE:

Install the cushion rubber with its smaller dia. end @ facing the cap bolt.

24. Install:

. Push rod ①

•Fork spring ②

NOTE:

• Install the fork spring with the damper rod ③ pulled up.

• After installing the fork spring, hold the damper rod end so that it will not go down.

25. Install:

- Cap bolt ①

Fully tighten the cap bolt onto the damper rod by hand.

21. Mesurer:

• Distance ⓐ

Technical diagram of a mechanical spring assembly with numbered parts labeled 1 to 5

Line drawing of a hand holding a cylindrical object with a small inset component, labeled with number 1 (no text or symbols on the object itself)

①

Technical diagram of a mechanical device with labeled component ①

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled parts and directional arrows

1. Tighten:

- Cap bolt (locknut) ①

29 Nm (2.9 m · kg, 21 ft · lb)

NOTE:

- While compressing the fork spring, set the thin type spanners ② between the spacer ③ and spring guide ④.

- Hold the locknut ⑤ and tighten the cap bolt with specified torque.

1. Install:

- Cap bolt ①

To outer tube.

NOTE:

Temporarily tighten the cap bolt.

1. Install:

- Protector guide ①

Installation

1. Install:

- Front fork ①

NOTE:

• Temporarily tighten the pinch bolts (under bracket).

- Do not tighten the pinch bolts (handle crown) yet.

1. Tighten:

- Cap bolt ①

30 Nm (3.0 m · kg, 22 ft · lb)

1. Adjust:

• Front fork top end ⓐ

Front fork top end (standard) ⓐ: Zero mm (Zero in)

1. Serrer:

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with numbered components, likely for vehicle or mechanical assembly instructions.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered parts labeled 1 through 3

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components labeled 1 through 5

4. Tighten:

• Pinch bolt (handle crown) ①

23 Nm (2.3 m · kg, 17 ft · lb)

• Pinch bolt (under bracket) ②

Tighten the under bracket to specified torque. If torqued too much, it may cause the front fork to malfunction.

5. Install:

- Brake hose holder ①

• Caliper ②

• Bolt (caliper) ③

23 Nm (2.3 m · kg, 17 ft · lb)

NOTE:

Fit the brake hose holder cut ⓐ over the projection ⓑ on the front fork and clamp the brake hose.

6. Install:

- Brake hose holder ①

• Bolt (brake hose holder) ②

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

• Protector ③

• Bolt (protector) ④

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

NOTE:

When installing the brake hose holder, pass the brake hose ⑤ in front of the axle boss ④, then fit it into the hose groove ⑥ so that the brake hose does not contact the nut (wheel axle).

S→H ①

7. Adjust:

• Rebound damping force

NOTE:

Turn in the damping adjuster ① finger-tight and then turn out to the originally set position.

4. Serrer:

Extent of removal: ① Handlebar removal

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
Preparation for removal		HANDLEBAR REMOVALHeadlight
1	1 Decompression cable 1 Disconnect at the lever side.2 Decompression lever holder 13 Clutch cable 1 Disconnect at the lever side.4 Clutch lever holder 15 "ENGINE STOP" button 16 Lights switch 17 Master cylinder 1 Refer to "REMOVAL POINTS".8 Throttle cable cap 19 Throttle cable #2 (pushed) 1 Disconnect at the throttle side.10 Throttle cable #1 (pulled)11 Grip (right)12 Tube guide13 Collar14 Grip (left)15 Handlebar holder (upper)16 Handlebar	the lever side.side.
	1 Disconnect at the throttle side.1 Refer to "REMOVAL POINTS".1Refer to "REMOVAL POINTS".2

GUIDON

Illustration of a hand using a tool to adjust or install a mechanical component, no text or symbols present

Line drawing of a bent tool or tool with a labeled point (1) on the end, no text or symbols present.

Technical diagram showing a mechanical assembly with numbered components labeled ①, ②, and ③.

a FWD

FC5B3000

REMOVAL POINTS

EC5B3100

Master cylinder

1. Remove:

• Master cylinder bracket ①
• Master cylinder ②

CAUTION:

• Do not let the master cylinder hang on the brake hose.
• Keep the master cylinder cap side horizontal to prevent air from coming in.

EC5B3200

Grip

1. Remove:

• Grip ①

NOTE:

Blow in air between the handlebar or tube guide and the grip. Then remove the grip which has become loose.

EC5B4000

INSPECTION

EC5B4100

Handlebar

1. Inspect:

• Handlebar ①

Bends/cracks/damage → Replace.

WARNING

Do not attempt to straighten a bent handlebar as this may dangerously weaken the handlebar.

EC5B5000

ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION

Handlebar

1. Install:

• Handlebar ①
• Handlebar holder ②
• Bolt (handlebar holder) ③

• The upper handlebar holder should be installed with the punched mark @ forward.
- First tighten the bolts on the front side of the handlebar holder, and then tighten the bolts on the rear side.

POINTS DE DEPOSE

Maître-cylindre

b R ① ② a

2. Install:

• Grip (left) ①

Apply the adhesive to the handlebar ②.

NOTE:

- Before applying the adhesive, wipe off grease or oil on the handlebar surface @ with a lacquer thinner.

• Install the grip (left) to the handlebar so that the line ⑥ between the two arrow marks faces straight upward.

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with labeled parts 1, 2, and 3

3. Install:

• Grip (right) ①

• Collar ②

Apply the adhesive on the tube guide ③.

NOTE:

- Before applying the adhesive, wipe off grease or oil on the tube guide surface ⓐ with a lacquer thinner.

• Install the grip to the tube guide so that the grip match mark ⑥ and tube guide slot © form the angle as shown.

90° ① ② ③

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components and labeled parts

4. Install:

• Collar ①

- Throttle cables ②

To tube guide ③.

NOTE:

Apply the lithium soap base grease on the throttle cable end and tube guide cable winding portion.

2. Monter:

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components and directional arrows indicating flow or movement.

Mechanical diagram showing a pipe joint with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts including parts 1, 2, 3, and a marked point 'a'

35 mm (1.38 in) ①

Technical diagram of a mechanical device with numbered components for assembly or maintenance reference.

5. Install:

• Throttle cable cap ①
• Screw (throttle cable cap) ②

4 Nm (0.4 m · kg, 2.9 ft · lb)

• Cover (throttle cable cap) ③

WARNING

After tightening the screws, check that the throttle grip ④ moves smoothly. If it does not, retighten the bolts for adjustment.

6. Install:

• Master cylinder ①
• Master cylinder bracket ②
• Bolt (master cylinder bracket) ③

9 Nm (0.9 m · kg, 6.5 ft · lb)

NOTE:

• Install the bracket so that the arrow mark @ faces upward.
- First tighten the bolt on the upper side of the master cylinder bracket, and then tighten the bolt on the lower side.

7. Install:

• Lights switch ①

2 Nm (0.2 m · kg, 1.4 ft · lb)

8. Install:

• "ENGINE STOP" button ①
• Clutch lever holder ②
  • Bolt (clutch lever holder) ③

4 Nm (0.4 m · kg, 2.9 ft · lb)

• Decompressor lever holder ④
• Bolt (decompressor lever holder) ⑤

4 Nm (0.4 m · kg, 2.9 ft · lb)

- Clamp ⑥

5. Monter:

Technical diagram of a mechanical device with labeled parts, including lever and probe components

NOTE:

- The "ENGINE STOP" button, clutch lever holder, decompression lever holder and clamp should be installed according to the dimensions shown.

- Pass the "ENGINE STOP" button lead in the middle of the clutch holder.

9. Install:

• Clutch cable ①
  • Decompression cable ②

NOTE:

Apply the lithium soap base grease on the clutch cable end and decompression cable end.

10.Adjust:

• Clutch lever free play Refer to "CLUTCH ADJUSTMENT" section in the CHAPTER 3.
• Decompression lever free play Refer to "DECOMPRESSION LEVER ADJUSTMENT" section in the CHAPTER 3.

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled component 1 and numbered callouts

1. Insert the end of the fuel breather hose ① into the hole of the steering shaft.

N.B.:

Extent of removal: ① Under bracket removal ② Bearing removal

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
Preparation for removal	Hold the	STEERING REMOVALmachine by placing the suitable stand under the engine.HeadlightHandlebarCable guideFront fender		WARNINGSupport the machine securely so there is no danger of it falling over.Refer to “HANDLEBAR” section.
	1 Trip meter 12 Steering shaft nut 13 Front fork 2 Refer to “FRONT FORK” section.4 Handle crown 15 Ring nut 1 Use special tool.6 Under bracket 17 Ball race cover	1		Refer to “REMOVAL POINTS”.

DIRECTION

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
	###	8 Bearing (upper) 19 Bearing (lower) 1 Refer to “REMOVAL POINTS”.10 Ball race		2	Refer to “REMOVAL POINTS”.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts ① and ②

FC563000

REMOVAL POINTS

EC563202

Ring nut

1. Remove:

• Ring nut ①

Use the ring nut wrench ②.

Ring nut wrench: YU-33975/90890-01403

WARNING

Support the steering shaft so that it may not fall down.

Technical diagram showing two hands using a hammer to adjust a mechanical component, labeled with parts ① and ②.

EC563300

Bearing (lower)

1. Remove:

• Bearing (lower) ①

Use the floor chisel ②.

CAUTION:

Take care not to damage the steering shaft thread.

① ② 12460503

EC563400

Ball race

1. Remove:

• Ball race ①

Remove the ball race using long rod ② and the hammer.

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with labeled part ①

EC564000

INSPECTION

EC564200

Steering shaft

1. Inspect:

• Steering shaft ①

Bend/damage → Replace.

POINTS DE DEPOSE

Ecrou annulaire

1. Déposer:

• Ecrou annulaire ①

Hand holding a ball bearing with a rotating arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

EC564101

Bearing and ball race

1. Wash the bearings and ball races with a solvent.

2. Inspect:

• Bearing ①

- Ball race

Pitting/damage → Replace bearings and ball races as a set.

Install the bearing in the ball races. Spin the bearings by hand. If the bearings hang up or are not smooth in their operation in the ball races, replace bearings and ball races as a set.

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with labeled part 1

EC565000

ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION

Under bracket

1. Install:

• Bearing (lower) ①

NOTE:

Apply the lithium soap base grease on the dust seal lip and bearing inner circumference.

Technical diagram showing a hand holding a mechanical component with labeled parts ① and ②, and a tool labeled B.

1. Install:

• Ball race

• Bearing (upper) ①

• Ball race cover ②

NOTE:

Apply the lithium soap base grease on the bearing and ball race cover lip.

Technical diagram showing a hand operating a car gear shift lever with labeled parts and an inset view of the component being inserted.

1. Install:

• Under bracket ①

NOTE:

Apply the lithium soap base grease on the bearing and the portion ⓐ of the steering shaft.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components labeled ①, ②, and ③.

Line drawing of hands using a tool to adjust or install a mechanical component (no text or symbols present)

Hand holding a threaded mechanical component, no text or symbols visible

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts ① and ②

Technical diagram showing hands assembling a mechanical component with numbered parts labeled ① and ②

4. Install:

• Plain washer ①
  • Ring nut ②

7 Nm (0.7 m · kg, 5.1 ft · lb)

Tighten the ring nut using the ring nut wrench ③.

Refer to "STEERING HEAD INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT" section in the CHAPTER 3.

1. Check the steering shaft by turning it lock to lock. If there is any binding, remove the steering shaft assembly and inspect the steering bearings.

6. Install:

- Plain washer ①

7. Install:

• Front fork ①
• Handle crown ②

NOTE:

• Temporarily tighten the pinch bolts (under bracket).
- Do not tighten the pinch bolts (handle crown) yet.

8. Install:

• Plain washer ①
  • Steering shaft nut ②

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled component 'a' and directional arrow indicating motion or movement.

Technical diagram of a mechanical device with numbered components and labeled parts

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

1. After tightening the nut, check the steering for smooth movement. If not, adjust the steering by loosening the ring nut little by little.

10.Adjust:

• Front fork top end ⓐ

Front fork top end (standard) ⓐ: Zero mm (Zero in)

11.Tighten:

• Pinch bolt (handle crown) ①

23 Nm (2.3 m · kg, 17 ft · lb)

• Pinch bolt (under bracket) ②

Tighten the under bracket to specified torque. If torqued too much, it may cause the front fork to malfunction.

1. Install:

- Trip meter ①

Extent of removal: ① Swingarm removal

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
Preparation for removal	Hold theSTEERING REMOVALmachine by placing the suitable stand under the engine.Brake hose holderRear caliperBolt (brake pedal)Drive chain			WARNINGSupport the machine securely so there is no danger of it falling over.Refer to “FRONT BRAKE AND REAR BRAKE” section.Shift the brake pedal backward.
	1 Chain support 12 Chain tensioner (lower) 13 Bolt (rear shock absorber-relay arm)4 Bolt (connecting rod) 15 Pivot shaft 16 Swingarm		1 Hold the swingarm.1

BRAS OSCILLANT

Extent of removal:
① Swingarm disassembly
② Connecting rod removal and disassembly
③ Relay arm removal and disassembly

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
			SWINGARM DISASSEMBLY
		1	Cap 2
		2	Relay arm 1
		3	Connecting rod 1
		4	Collar 2
		5	Oil seal 2
		6	Thrust bearing 2
		7	Bush 2
		8	Oil seal 8
		9	Bearing 8 Refer to “REMOVAL POINTS”.

DEMONTAGE DU BRAS OSCILLANT

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled parts and directional arrow

Technical diagram showing a hand holding a connector with numbered parts labeled ①, ②, and ③.

FC573000

REMOVAL POINTS

EC573200

Bearing

1. Remove:

• Bearing ①

NOTE:

Install the bearing by pressing its outer race.

EC574010

INSPECTION

Wash the bearings, bushes, collars, and covers in a solvent.

EC574111

Swingarm

1. Inspect:

• Bearing ①
• Bush ②

Free play exists/unsmooth revolution/rust → Replace bearing and bush as a set.

1. Inspect:

. Oil seal ③

Damage → Replace.

Technical diagram showing a hand holding a mechanical component with numbered parts labeled ①, ②, and ③.

Diagram showing a hand holding a scroll with labeled parts ①, ②, and ③, indicating a folding or rolling process.

EC574210

Relay arm

1. Inspect:

• Bearing ①
• Collar ②

Free play exists/unsmooth revolution/rust → Replace bearing and collar as a set.

1. Inspect:

. Oil seal ③

Damage → Replace.

EC574310

Connecting rod

1. Inspect:

• Bearing ①
• Collar ②

Free play exists/unsmooth revolution/rust → Replace bearing and collar as a set.

1. Inspect:

. Oil seal ③

Damage → Replace.

POINTS DE DEPOSE

Roulement

1. Déposer:

- Roulement ①

N.B.:

Technical diagram showing a mechanical assembly with labeled components and directional arrow

① ② ① ② a b b a

① ② ① ② ① ② ① ② ① ② ① ② ① ② ① ② ① ② ① ② ① ② ① ② ① ② ① ② ① ② ① ② ① ② ① #a #a #a

① ② ② ① ①

EC575000

ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION

EC575201

Bearing and oil seal

1. Install:

• Bearing ①
. Oil seal ②

To swingarm.

NOTE:

• Apply the molybdenum disulfide grease on the bearing when installing.
• Install the bearing by pressing it on the side having the manufacture's marks or numbers.
• First install the outer and then the inner bearings to a specified depth from inside.

Installed depth of bearings: Outer ⓐ: Zero mm (Zero in) Inner ⓑ: 8.5 mm (0.33 in)

1. Install:

• Bearing ①
• Oil seal ②
To relay arm.

NOTE:

• Apply the molybdenum disulfide grease on the bearing when installing.
• Install the bearing by pressing it on the side having the manufacture's marks or numbers.

Installed depth of bearings ⓐ: 5 mm (0.20 in)

1. Install:

• Bearing ①
. Oil seal ②

To connecting rod.

NOTE:

• Apply the molybdenum disulfide grease on the bearing when installing.
• Install the bearing by pressing it on the side having the manufacture's marks or numbers.

Installed depth of bearings ⓐ: 5 mm (0.20 in)

REMONTAGE ET MONTAGE

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with numbered components and labeled parts (①–⑤)

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating motion or force vectors.

Technical diagram showing a mechanical assembly with labeled parts ① and ②, including a motor and spring component.

Technical diagram showing exploded view of mechanical components with numbered parts labeled 1 through 5

EC5751B1

Swingarm

1. Install:

• Bush ①
• Thrust bearing ②
• Oil seal ③
• Collar ④
To swingarm ⑤.

NOTE:

Apply the molybdenum disulfide grease on the bushes, thrust bearings and oil seal lips.

1. Install:

• Collar ①
To relay arm ②.

NOTE:

Apply the molybdenum disulfide grease on the collars, bearings and oil seal lips.

1. Install:

• Collar ①
To connecting rod ②.

NOTE:

Apply the molybdenum disulfide grease on the collar, bearings and oil seal lips.

1. Install:

2. Connecting rod ①
   • Bolt (connecting rod) ②

3. Plain washer ③
   • Nut (connecting rod) ④

80 Nm (8.0 m · kg, 58 ft · lb)

To relay arm ⑤.

NOTE:

Apply the molybdenum disulfide grease on the bolt.

CAUTION:

Install the nut on the left side of the chassis. If you make a mistake in its installation position, the nut contacts the swingarm when stroking the rear shock absorber.

Bras oscillant

1. Monter:

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components and a labeled component M

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components and a labeled tool (M)

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating motion or movement

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered parts, likely for repair or assembly instructions.

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled parts and motion indicators

5. Install:

• Relay arm ①
• Bolt (relay arm) ②
- Plain washer ③
• Nut (relay arm) ④
To swingarm.

NOTE:

• Apply the molybdenum disulfide grease on the bolt.
  • Do not tighten the nut yet.

6. Install:

• Swingarm ①
• Pivot shaft ②

85 Nm (8.5 m · kg, 61 ft · lb)

NOTE:

• Apply the molybdenum disulfide grease on the pivot shaft.
• Insert the pivot shaft from right side.

7. Check:

• Swingarm side play ⓐ Free play exists → Replace thrust bearing.
• Swingarm up and down movement ⑥ Unsmooth movement/binding/rough spots → Grease or replace bearings, bushes and collars.

8. Install:

• Bolt (connecting rod) ①
- Plain washer ②
• Nut (connecting rod) ③

NOTE:

• Apply the molybdenum disulfide grease on the bolt.
  • Do not tighten the nut yet.

9. Install:

• Plain washer ①
  • Bolt (rear shock absorber-relay arm) ②
  53 Nm (5.3 m · kg, 38 ft · lb)

NOTE:

• Apply the molybdenum disulfide grease on the bolt.
• Insert the bolt from right side.

5. Monter:

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a gear and shaft assembly (no text or labels)

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with labeled parts and numbered annotation

Technical diagram showing two views of a car's side panel with labeled components (a) and numbered parts (1)

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with numbered components and labeled parts

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered parts for identification

10.Tighten:

• Nut (connecting rod) ①

80 Nm (8.0 m · kg, 58 ft · lb)

11.Tighten:

• Nut (relay arm) ①

80 Nm (8.0 m · kg, 58 ft · lb)

12. Install:

• Cap ①

NOTE: Install the cap with its mark @ facing forward.

13.Install:

• Bolt [chain tensioner (lower)] ①

- Plain washer ②

• Collar ③

- Chain tensioner ④

• Nut [chain tensioner (lower)] ⑤

19 Nm (1.9 m · kg, 13 ft · lb)

14. Install:

- Chain support ①

• Support cover ②

• Bolt {chain support [ ℓ = 50 mm (1.97 in)]}

③

• Nut (chain support) ④

7 Nm (0.7 m · kg, 5.1 ft · lb)

• Bolt {support cover [ ℓ = 10 mm (0.39 in)]}

⑤

7 Nm (0.7 m · kg, 5.1 ft · lb)

10. Serrer:

• Ecrou (bielle) ①

80 Nm (8,0 m · kg, 58 ft · lb)

10. Festziehen:

① Rear shock absorber removal

② Rear shock absorber disassembly

Extent of removal Order Part name Q'ty Remarks
Preparation for removal		REAR SHOCK ABSORBER REMOVALHold the machine by placing the suitable stand under the engine.Seat, fitting band and side coversRefer to Silencer Refer to “EXHAUST PIPE AND Drain the coolant. Refer to “COOLANT REPLANT REPLACEMENT”Coolant reservoir tank Refer to “RADIATOR” section in the CHAPTER 4.	WARNINGSupport the machine securely so there is no danger of it falling over.“SEAT, FUEL TANK AND SIDE COVERS” section in the CHAPTER 4.SILENCER” section in the CHAPTER 4.LACEMENT”section in the CHAPTER 3.CHAPTER 4.
	1 Tall light connector 22 Band 23 Bolt (reservoir tank) 14 Clamp (air cleaner joint) 1 Only loosening.5 Rear frame6 Bolt (rear shock absorber-relay arm) 17 Bolt (rear shock absorber-frame)8 Rear shock absorber	1	Hold the swingarm.

AMORTISSEUR ARRIERE

This shock absorber is provided with a separate type tank filled with high-pressure nitrogen gas. To prevent the danger of explosion, read and understand the following information before handling the shock absorber.

The manufacturer can not be held responsible for property damage or personal injury that may result from improper handling.

1. Never tamper or attempt to disassemble the cylinder or the tank.
2. Never throw the shock absorber into an open flame or other high heat. The shock absorber may explode as a result of nitrogen gas expansion and/or damage to the hose.
3. Be careful not to damage any part of the gas tank. A damaged gas tank will impair the damping performance or cause a malfunction.
4. Take care not to scratch the contact surface of the piston rod with the cylinder; or oil could leak out.
5. Never attempt to remove the plug at the bottom of the nitrogen gas tank. It is very dangerous to remove the plug.
6. When scrapping the shock absorber, follow the instructions on disposal.

Technical illustration of a mechanical assembly with coiled spring and housing (no text or symbols)

EC587000

NOTES ON DISPOSAL (YAMAHA DEALERS ONLY)

Before disposing the shock absorber, be sure to extract the nitrogen gas from valve ①. Wear eye protection to prevent eye damage from escaping gas and/or metal chips.

WARNING

To dispose of a damaged or worn-out shock absorber, take the unit to your Yamaha dealer for this disposal procedure.

REMARQUES CONCERNANT LA MANIPULATION

AVERTISSEMENT

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled component 1 and directional arrow indicating motion

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled component ① and directional arrow indicating motion

Technical diagram of a mechanical device with a downward arrow and labeled component (no text or symbols present)

Technical diagram of a mechanical device with labeled parts including a spring and coiled spring assembly

Diagram showing two views of a mechanical component with rotational arrows and numbered callouts (no text or symbols)

FC583000

REMOVAL POINTS

EC583320

Bearing

1. Remove:

• Stopper ring (upper bearing) ①

NOTE:

Press in the bearing while pressing its outer race and remove the stopper ring.

1. Remove:

• Upper bearing ①

NOTE:

Remove the bearing by pressing its outer race.

1. Remove:

• Lower bearing ①

NOTE:

Remove the bearing by pressing its outer race.

EC584000

INSPECTION

Rear shock absorber

1. Inspect:

2. Damper rod ① Bends/damage → Replace absorber assembly.

3. Shock absorber ② Oil leaks → Replace absorber assembly. Gas leaks → Replace absorber assembly.
4. Spring ③ Damage → Replace spring. Fatigue → Replace spring. Move spring up and down.
5. Spring guide ④ Wear/damage → Replace spring guide.
6. Bearing ⑤ Free play exists/unsmooth revolution/rust → Replace.

POINTS DE DEPOSE

Roulement

1. Déposer:

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled component 1 and directional arrow indicating motion

FC585000

ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION

EC585300

Bearing

1. Install:

• Upper bearing ①

NOTE:

Install the bearing parallel until the stopper ring groove appears by pressing its outer race.

CAUTION:

Do not apply the grease on the bearing outer race because it will wear the rear shock absorber surface on which the bearing is press fitted.

① New

1. Install:

- Stopper ring (upper bearing) ①

New

NOTE:

After installing the stopper ring, push back the bearing until it contacts the stopper ring.

Technical diagram of a mechanical device with labeled components and directional arrows indicating motion or force.

1. Install:

• Lower bearing ①

NOTE:

Install the bearing by pressing it on the side having the manufacture's marks or numbers.

Technical diagram showing a hand holding a coiled spring with numbered parts labeled ①, ②, and ③.

Installed depth of the bearing ⓐ: 4 mm (0.16 in)

EC585111

Spring (rear shock absorber)

1. Install:

• Spring ①
• Spring guide (upper) ②
• Spring guide (lower) ③

REMONTAGE ET MONTAGE Roulement

1. Monter:

Technical illustration of a mechanical spring assembly with labeled component (1), no text or symbols present

Technical line drawing of a mechanical spring assembly with dimension label (a), no readable text or symbols present.

1. Tighten:

- Adjuster ①

1. Adjust:

• Spring length (installed) ⓐ

	Spring length (installed) @:
Standard length		Extent of adjustment
241 mm (9.49 in)*244 mm (9.61 in)		240.5 ~ 258.5 mm(9.47 ~ 10.18 in)

* For EUROPE

NOTE:

The length of the spring (installed) changes

1.5 mm (0.06 in) per turn of the adjuster.

CAUTION:

Never attempt to turn the adjuster beyond the maximum or minimum setting.

Technical illustration of a car suspension component with threaded end and spring assembly (no text or symbols)

New ② ③ ① M ① New ② ③ B

1. Tighten:

- Locknut ①

Rear shock absorber

1. Install:

• Dust seal ①
• O-ring ②
• Collar ③

New

NOTE:

• Apply the molybdenum disulfide grease on the bearing.
• Apply the lithium soap base grease on the dust seals, O-rings and collars.

2. Serrer:

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts, including numbered annotations ① and ②.

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled parts and motion indicators

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with numbered components and labeled parts

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled components and a circled feature

2. Install:

• Bush ①
• Collar ②
• Dust seal ③

NOTE:

• Apply the molybdenum disulfide grease on the bearing.
• Apply the lithium soap base grease on the bush, collars and dust seals.
  • Install the dust seals with their lips facing outward.

3. Install:

• Rear shock absorber

4. Install:

• Bolt (rear shock absorber-frame) ①
• Nut (rear shock absorber-frame) ②

56 Nm (5.6 m · kg, 40 ft · lb)

NOTE:

Apply the molybdenum disulfide grease on the bolt.

5. Install:

• Plain washer ①
  • Bolt (rear shock absorber-relay arm) ②

53 Nm (5.3 m · kg, 38 ft · lb)

NOTE:

• Apply the molybdenum disulfide grease on the bolt.
• Insert the bolt from right side.

6. Install:

• Rear frame ①
• Bolt (rear frame) ②

29 Nm (2.9 m · kg, 21 ft · lb)
29 Nm (2.9 m · kg, 21 ft · lb)
• Bolt (reservoir tank) ③

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

7. Tighten:

• Screw (air cleaner joint) ①

3 Nm (0.3 m · kg, 2.2 ft · lb)

2. Monter:

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components, likely for assembly or maintenance instructions.

1. Install:

• Band ①
• Tail light connector ②

8. Monter:

① Headlight
② "ENGINE STOP" button
③ Regulator
④ TPS (throttle position sensor)
⑤ Tail light
⑥ CDI magneto
⑦ Neutral switch
⑧ Ignition coil
⑨ Spark plug
⑩ Lights switch
⑪ CDI unit

COLOR CODE

B .... Black
Br ...... Brown
G.... Green
Gy ...... Gray
L...... Blue
O..... Orange
P ...... Pink
R .... Red

Sb....Sky blue
W......White
Y.....Yellow
B/L......Black/Blue
B/W ....Black/White
L/W.....Blue/White
R/W ....Red/White

Technical diagram of a DTR motorcycle with numbered components for identification

Technical diagram of a motorcycle with numbered parts for identification

EC612000

WIRING DIAGRAM

graph TD
    subgraph_Motor_1["⑪"]
        A["①"] --> B["L"]
        B --> C["B"]
        C --> D["Y"]
        D --> E["L"]
        E --> F["L"]
        F --> G["Y"]
        G --> H["⑥"]
        H --> I["Y"]
        I --> J["L"]
        J --> K["⑤"]
        K --> L["B"]
        L --> M["L"]
        M --> N["③"]
    end

    subgraph_Motor_2["⑫"]
        O["②"] --> P["P"]
        P --> Q["B"]
        Q --> R["W"]
        R --> S["W"]
        S --> T["R"]
        T --> U["P"]
        U --> V["G"]
        V --> W["R"]
        W --> X["R"]
        X --> Y["W"]
        Y --> Z["B"]
        Z --> AA["B"]
        AA --> AB["Y"]
        AB --> AC["⑧"]
        AC --> AD["LW"]
        AD --> AE["Sb"]
        AE --> AF["R/W"]
        AF --> AG["Sb"]
        AG --> AH["W"]
        AH --> AI["R/W"]
        AI --> AJ["Sb"]
        AJ --> AK["W"]
        AK --> AL["R/W"]
        AL --> AM["LW"]
        AM --> AN["Sb"]
        AN --> AO["R/W"]
        AO --> AP["W"]
        AP --> AQ["R/W"]
        AQ --> AR["Sb"]
        AR --> AS["W"]
    end

    subgraph_Motor_3["⑪"]
        AT["⑩"] --> AU["L"]
        AU --> AV["B"]
        AV --> AW["⑥"]
        AW --> AX["Y"]
        AX --> AY["LW"]
        AY --> AZ["Sb"]
        AZ --> BA["R/W"]
        BA --> BB["Sb"]
        BB --> BC["R/W"]
        BC --> BD["Sb"]
        BD --> BE["Sb"]
    end

    subgraph_Motor_4["⑪"]
        BF["⑪"] --> BG["B/W"]
        BG --> BH["B"]
        BH --> BI["B/W"]
        BI --> BJ["B"]
    end

    subgraph_Motor_5["⑪"]
        BK["⑪"] --> BL["B/L"]
    end

    subgraph_Motor_6["⑪"]
        BM["⑪"] --> BN["B/W"]
    end

    subgraph_Motor_7["⑪"]
        BO["⑪"] --> BP["B/W"]
    end

    subgraph_Motor_8["⑪"]
        BQ["⑪"] --> BR["B/W"]
    end

    subgraph_Motor_9["⑪"]
        BS["⑪"] --> BT["B/W"]
    end

    subgraph_Motor_10["⑪"]
        BU["⑪"] --> BV["B/W"]
    end

    subgraph_Motor_11["⑪"]
        BW["⑪"] --> BX["B/W"]
    end

    subgraph_Motor_12["⑪"]
        BY["⑪"] --> BZ["B/W"]
    end

    subgraph_Motor_13["⑪"]
        CA["⑪"] --> CB["B/W"]
    end

    subgraph_Motor_14["⑪"]
        CC["⑪"] --> CD["B/W"]
    end

    subgraph_Motor_15["⑪"]
        CE["⑪"] --> CF["B/W"]
    end

    subgraph_Motor_16["⑪"]
        GD["⑪"] --> DH["B/W"]
    end

    subgraph_Motor_17["⑪"]
        DI["⑪"] --> DJ["B/W"]
    end

    subgraph_Motor_18["⑪"]
        DE["⑪"] --> DF["B/W"]
    end

    subgraph_Motor_19["⑪"]
        DG["⑪"] --> DH
    end

* Except for USA

PARTIE

ELECTRIQUE

COMPOSANTS ELECTRI- QUES ET SCHEMA DE CABLAGE

COMPOSANTS ELECTRIQUES

A map-controlled, CDI ignition system is used in the WR426F/WR400F.

The microcomputer in the CDI unit detects the engine speed and throttle position, thus determining the optimum ignition timing through the entire operating range. In this way, quick throttle response can be achieved according to various riding conditions.

Throttle position sensor CDI unit Ignition coil Pickup coil CDI magneto rotor

■ Function of Component

Component Function
TPS(throttle position sensor)	Detects throttle valve opening and inputs it into the computer in the CDI unit as a throttle opening signal.
Pickup coil Detects signal rotor	rotor revolutions and inputs them into the computer in the CDI unit as engine revolution signals.
CDI unit The signals of the TPS	TPS and pickup coil sensor are analyzed by the computer in the CDI unit, which then adjusts ignition timing for the operation requirements.

■ Principal of 3-Dimensional Control

Conventionally, ignition timing was controlled only by engine revolutions (2-dimensional control).

However, ignition timing needs advancement also by engine load. Thus, accurate ignition timing can be determined by adding throttle opening to determine ignition timing (3-dimensional control).

Ignition timing Throttle opening Revolutions

3-D Image Map of Ignition Timing (different from actual characteristics)

BLOC CDI CONTROLE PAR MICROPROCESSEUR

Use the following steps for checking the possibility of the malfunctioning engine being attributable to ignition system failure and for checking the spark plug which will not spark.

graph TD
    A["Spark gap test"] -->|No Spark| B["Check entire ignition system for connection."]
    B -->|OK| C["Check "ENGINE STOP" button."]
    C -->|OK| D["Check ignition coil. Primary coil Replace."]
    D -->|No good| E["Repair or replace."]
    D -->|No good| F["Replace."]
    D -->|No good| G["Secondary coil Replace."]
    G -->|No good| H["..."]
    G -->|No good| I["..."]
    G -->|No good| J["..."]
    D --> K["Check CDI magneto. Pick-up coil Replace."]
    K -->|No good| L["..."]
    K -->|No good| M["Source coil Replace."]
    M -->|No good| N["..."]
    M -->|No good| O["..."]
    K --> P["Check neutral switch. Repair or replace."]
    P -->|No good| Q["..."]
    P -->|No good| R["..."]
    P --> S["Replace CDI unit."]
    S -->|OK| T["Replace CDI unit."]
    A --> U["Spark"]
    U --> V["*Clean or replace spark plug."]

*: Only when the ignition checker is used.

NOTE:

- Remove the following parts before inspection.

1) Seat

2) Fuel tank

- Use the following special tools in this inspection.

Dynamic spark tester: YM-34487

Ignition checker: 90890-06754

Pocket tester: YU-3112-C/90890-03112

SYSTEME D'ALLUMAGE

ETAPES DU CONTROLE

1. Disconnect the spark plug cap from spark plug.
2. Connect the dynamic spark tester ① (ignition checker ②) as shown.
3. Spark plug cap ③
4. Spark plug ④

A For USA and CDN

B Except for USA and CDN

1. Kick the kick starter.
2. Check the ignition spark gap.
3. Start engine, and increase spark gap until misfire occurs. (for USA and CDN only)

Minimum spark gap: 6.0 mm (0.24 in)

EC624000

COUPLERS AND LEADS CONNECTION INSPECTION

1. Check:

- Couplers and leads connection Rust/dust/looseness/short-circuit → Repair or replace.

Technical diagram showing a mechanical assembly with labeled parts, likely illustrating a cable or wiring connection.

EC625001

"ENGINE STOP" BUTTON INSPECTION

1. Inspect:

- "ENGINE STOP" button conduct

Tester (+) lead → Black/White lead 1 Tester (−) lead → Black lead 2

		B/W1	B2	Tester selec-tor position
	PUSH IN	○	○	Ω·1
	FREE

No continuity while being pushed → Replace. Continuity while being freed → Replace.

TEST DE L'INTERVALLE D'ETIN- CELLEMENT D'ALLUMAGE

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled parts, including a cable and connector component

EC626002

IGNITION COIL INSPECTION

1. Inspect:

- Primary coil resistance Out of specification → Replace.

Tester (+) lead → Orange lead 1

Tester (−) lead → Black lead 2

	Primary coil resistance	Tester selector position
	0.20 ~ 0.30 Ω at 20 °C (68 °F)	Ω · 1

Technical diagram showing engine components with numbered labels indicating parts of the engine and wiring.

1. Inspect:

• Secondary coil resistance Out of specification → Replace.

Tester (+) lead → Spark plug lead 1

Tester (−) lead → Orange lead 2

	Secondary coil resistance	Tester selector position
	9.5 ~ 14.3 kΩ at 20 °C (68 °F)	kΩ · 1

NOTE:

When inspecting the secondary coil resistance, remove the spark plug cap.

EC627011

CDI MAGNETO INSPECTION

1. Inspect:

- Pick-up coil resistance Out of specification → Replace.

② W Br P R G B ①

Tester (+) lead → Red lead 1

Tester (−) lead → White lead 2

	Pick-up coil resistance	Tester selector position
	248 ~ 372 Ω at 20 °C (68 °F)	Ω · 100

CONTROLE DE LA BOBINE D'ALLUMAGE

1. Vérifier:

Technical diagram showing car seatbelt fastening with labeled components and a corresponding color-coded grid for vehicle parts.

Technical diagram showing car seatbelt installation with labeled components and a corresponding color-coded grid for vehicle parts.

2. Inspect:

- Source coil 1 resistance

Out of specification → Replace.

Tester (+) lead → Brown lead 1

Tester (−) lead → Green lead 2

	Source coil 1 resistance	Tester selector position
	640 ~ 960 Ω at 20 °C (68 °F)	Ω · 100

3. Inspect:

- Source coil 2 resistance

Out of specification → Replace.

Tester (+) lead → Pink lead 1

Tester (−) lead → Green lead 2

	Source coil 2 resistance	Tester selector position
	464 ~ 696 Ω at 20 °C (68 °F)	Ω · 10

A Ω·1 Sb L/W W R/W ①

B Ω·1 ① Sb L/W W R/W

NEUTRAL SWITCH INSPECTION

1. Inspect:

• Neutral switch conduct

Tester (+) lead → Blue/White lead 1*Sky blue lead 1

Tester (−) lead → Ground

		L/W*Sb 1	Ground	Tester selec-tor position
	NEU-TRAL			Ω·1
	IN GEAR

* Except for USA

No continuity while in neutral → Replace.

Continuity while in gear → Replace.

A For USA

B Except for USA

EC628000

CDI UNIT INSPECTION

Check all electrical components. If no fault is found, replace the CDI unit. Then check the electrical components again.

2. Vérifier:

If the TPS will not operate, use the following inspection steps.

graph TD
    A["Check entire ignition system for connection."] -->|OK| B["Check TPS. TPS coil"]
    B -->|OK| C["*Check CDI magneto. Source coil"]
    C -->|OK| D["Check CDI unit."]
    D --> E["TPS input voltage"]
    E -->|No good| F["Replace."]
    E -->|No good| G["Repair or replace."]
    B -->|No good| H["Replace."]
    C -->|No good| I["Replace."]

*marked: Refer to "IGNITION SYSTEM" section.

NOTE:

- Remove the following parts before inspection.

1) Seat

2) Fuel tank

- Use the following special tools in this inspection.

Pocket tester: YU-3112-C/90890-03112

Inductive tachometer:

YU-08036-B

Engine tachometer:

90890-03113

SYSTEME TPS (CAPTEUR DU PAPILLON D'ACCELERATION)

ETAPES DU CONTROLE

- Couplers and leads connection Rust/dust/looseness/short-circuit → Repair or replace.

Medical diagram showing a catheter insertion into a patient's neck with labeled anatomical regions and an inset of the right side showing a labeled anatomical structure.

TPS COIL INSPECTION

1. Inspect:

- TPS coil resistance Out of specification → Replace.

Tester (+) lead → Blue lead ① Tester (−) lead → Black lead ②

	TPS coil resistance	Tester selector position
	4 ~ 6 kΩ at 20 °C (68 °F)	kΩ · 1

2. Loosen:

• Throttle stop screw

NOTE:

Turn out the throttle stop screw until the throttle shaft is in the full close position.

Technical diagram showing a car seatbelt with labeled parts and an inset diagram of a vehicle's seatbelt with letter codes L, Y, B.

3. Inspect:

- TPS coil variable resistance Check that the resistance in increased as the throttle grip is moved from the full close position to the full open position. Out of specification → Replace.

Tester (+) lead → Yellow lead ① Tester (−) lead → Black lead ②

	TPS coil variable resistance		Tester selec-tor position
	Full closed	Full opened	kΩ·1
	0 ~ 2 kΩ at 20 °C (68 °F)	4 ~ 6 kΩ at 20 °C (68 °F)

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components for identification

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components and an inset showing labeled parts a and b.

TPS REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

1. Remove:

2. TPS coupler
   • Screw (TPS) ①

3. Plain washer ②
   •TPS ③

4. Replace:

•TPS

1. Install:

.TPS ①
- Plain washer ②
• Screw (TPS) ③
• TPS coupler

NOTE:

• Align the slot ⓐ in the TPS with the projection ⓑ on the carburetor.
  • Temporarily tighten the screws (TPS).

• Adjust:

- Idle speed

Refer to "IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT" section in the CHAPTER 3.

1. Calculate:

- TPS coil resistance at idle speed.

TPS coil resistance at idle speed: TPS coil resistance · (0.13 \~ 0.15)

If the TPS coil resistance is 5 kΩ, then the TPS coil resistance at idle speed is:

5k · (0.13 0.15) = 650 750

Refer to "TPS COIL INSPECTION" section about the TPS coil resistance.

REMPLACEMENT ET REGLAGE DU TPS

1. Déposer:

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly steps with labeled parts and directional arrows

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with labeled component (1), no readable text or symbols present

Technical diagram showing a mechanical assembly with labeled parts and an inset showing a labeled component with Y/L and B/L markings.

6. Adjust:

- TPS coil resistance at idle speed

Adjustment steps:

Adjust the angle of the TPS ① to obtain the resistance calculated (example: 650 \~ 750 Ω)

Tester (+) lead → Yellow lead ②

Tester (−) lead → Black lead ③

7. Tighten:

• Screw (TPS) ①

8. Install:

• TPS coupler

EC694000

TPS INPUT VOLTAGE INSPECTION

1. Disconnect the TPS coupler.
2. Start the engine.
3. Inspect:

- TPS input voltage

Out of specification → Replace the CDI unit.

Tester (+) lead → Blue lead 1

Tester (−) lead → Black/Blue lead 2

	TPS input voltage	Tester selector position
	4 ~ 6 V DCV-20

1. Régler:

Refer to the following flow chart when inspecting the ignition system for possible ploblems.

Electrical system repair flowchart covering bulb/bulb socket checking, light switch, CDI lighting, and regulator replacement steps

NOTE:

- Replace the bulb and/or bulb socket.

1) Seat

2) Fuel tank

• Use the following special tool.

Pocket tester: YU-3112-C/90890-03112

SYSTEME D'ECLAIRAGE

PROCEDURES DE VERIFICATION

Y L B Y L B ① ②

LIGHTS SWITCH INSPECTION

1. Inspect:

• Lights switch conduct

Tester (+) lead → Yellow lead 1

Tester (−) lead → Blue lead 2

		Y1	L2	Tester selec-tor position
				Ω·1
	OFF

No continuity while being 📋 Replace. Continuity while being OFF → Replace.

Diagram showing car seatbelt switch and color-coded connector pinout with labels W, Br, P, R, G, B

CDI MAGNETO INSPECTION

1. Inspect:

• Lighting coil resistance

Out of specification → Replace.

Tester (+) lead → Yellow lead 1

Tester (−) lead → Black lead 2

	Lighting coil resistance	Tester selector position
	0.16 ~ 0.24 Ω at 20 °C (68 °F)	Ω · 1

VERIFICATION INTERRUPTEUR LUMIERES

1. Vérifier:

• The air/fuel mixture will vary depending on atmospheric conditions. Therefore, it is necessary to take into consideration the air pressure, ambient temperature, humidity, etc., when adjusting the carburetor.
• Perform a test run to check for proper engine performance (e.g., throttle response) and spark plug(-s) discoloration or fouling. Use these readings to determine the best possible carburetor setting.

NOTE:

It is recommended to keep a record of all carburetor settings and external conditions (e.g., atmospheric conditions, track/surface conditions, lap times) to make future carburetor setting easier.

WARNING

• The carburetor is a part of the fuel line. Therefore, be sure to install it in a well-ventilated area, away from flammable objects and any sources of fire.
• Never look into the carburetor intake. Flames may shoot out from the pipe if the engine backfires while it is being started. Gasoline may be discharged from the accelerator pump nozzle when the carburetor has been removed.

MISES AU POINT MOTEUR

• The carburetor is extremely sensitive to foreign matter (dirt, sand, water, etc.). During installation, do not allow foreign matter to get into the carburetor.
• Always handle the carburetor and its components carefully. Even slight scratches, bends or damage to carburetor parts may prevent the carburetor from functioning correctly. Carefully perform all servicing with the appropriate tools and without applying excessive force.
• When the engine is stopped or when riding at no load, do not open and close the throttle unnecessarily. Otherwise, too much fuel may be discharged, starting may become difficult or the engine may not run well.
• After installing the carburetor, check that the throttle operates correctly and opens and closes smoothly.

Atmospheric conditions and carburetor settings

Air temp.	Humidity	Air pressure (altitude)	Mixture Setting
High	High Low (high)	Richer Leaner
Low	Low High (low)	Leaner Richer

The air density (i.e., concentration of oxygen in the air) determines the richness or leanness of the air/fuel mixture. Therefore, refer to the above table for mixture settings.

That is:

• Higher temperature expands the air with its resultant reduced density.
• Higher humidity reduces the amount of oxygen in the air by so much of the water vapor in the same air.
• Lower atmospheric pressure (at a high altitude) reduces the density of the air.

ATTENTION:

A Closed
B Fully open

Effects of the setting parts on the throttle valve opening

① ② ③ ④ A B 1/41/8 1/2 3/4

① Pilot screw/pilot jet
② Throttle valve cutaway
③ Jet needle
④ Main jet

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components for identification

Main system

The FLATCR carburetor has a primary main jet. This type of main jet is perfect for racing motorcycles since it supplies an even flow of fuel, even at full load. The main air jet has almost no effect on the air-fuel mixture. Use the main jet and the jet needle to set the carburetor.

① Jet needle
② Main air jet
③ Pilot air jet
④ Needle jet
⑤ Main jet
⑥ Pilot jet
⑦ Pilot screw

The FLATCR carburetor is manufactured with a pilot screw. The pilot screw adjustment ranges from fully closed throttle to 1/4 open throttle.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled component ①

Main jet adjustment

The richness of the air-fuel mixture at full throttle can be set by changing the main jet ①.

Standard main jet #165

If the air-fuel mixture is too rich or too lean, the engine power will drop, resulting in poor acceleration.

Effects of changing the main jet (reference)

A Idle B Fully open

Circuit de ralenti

Ajuste del surtidor principal

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

Pilot screw adjustment

The richness of the air-fuel mixture with the throttle fully closed to 1/4 open can be set by turning the pilot screw ①. Turning in the pilot screw will make the mixture lean at low speeds, and turning it out will enrich it.

Standard pilot screw position

WR426F: 1-5/8*7/8WR400F: 1-1/2 (example)

* Except for USA

NOTE:

• If the idling speed fluctuates, turn the pilot screw only 1/2 of a turn in either direction.
• To optimize the fuel flow at a smaller throttle opening, each machine's pilot screw has been individually set at the factory. Before adjusting the pilot screw, turn it in fully and count the number of turns. Record this number as the factory-set number of turns out.

Effects of adjusting the pilot screw (reference)

A 1/4 1/2 3/4 B ① ② +5% ③ -5%

A Idle
B Fully open
① 2-1/8 turns out
② 1-1/8 turns out
③ 1-5/8 turns out

Technical diagram of a mechanical device with numbered component labels

Pilot jet adjustment

The richness of the air-fuel mixture with the throttle open 1/4 or less can be set by adjusting the pilot jet ①.

Standard pilot jet #42

Effects of adjusting the pilot jet (reference)

A Idle B Fully open

Technical diagram of a laboratory instrument with numbered parts and an inset showing a coiled spring component.

Jet needle groove position adjustment

Adjusting the jet needle ① position affects the acceleration when the throttle is 1/8 to 3/4 open.

1. Too rich at intermediate speeds

Rough engine operation is felt and the engine will not pick up speed smoothly. In this case, step up the jet needle clip by one groove and move down the needle to lean out the mixture.

1. Too lean at intermediate speeds

The engine breathes hard and will not pick up speed quickly.

Step down the jet needle clip by one groove and move up the needle to enrich the mixture.

Standard clip position No.4 groove

Effects of changing the jet needle groove position (reference)

A 1/4 1/2 3/4 B ① ② +10% ③ -10%

A Idle
B Fully open
① No.5 groove
② No.3 groove
③ No.4 groove

A 1/4 1/2 3/4 B ① ② +10% ③ -10%

A 1/4 1/2 3/4 ① ② +10% ③ -10%

A 1/4 1/2 3/4 B ① +10% ② -10%

A Ralentí
B Completamente abierto
① Ranura N°5
② Ranura N°3
③ Ranura N°4

Jet needle adjustment

The jet needle is adjusted by changing it.

Standard jet needle

WR426F: OBDRR*OBDQRWR400F: OBDRQ

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ①

* Except for USA

The tapered sections of all jet needles have the same starting positions, but the needles are available with different straight-portion diameters.

OBDRR - 4 Clip position Diameter @ of straight portion

Effects of changing the jet needle (reference)

(Diameter of the straight portion)

Changing the diameter of the straight portion adjusts the air-fuel mixture when the throttle is 1/8 to 1/4 open.

A 1/4 1/2 3/4 Q S B +10% R -10%

A Idle B Fully open

Relationship with throttle opening

The flow of the fuel through the carburetor main system is controlled by the main jet and then, it is further regulated by the area between the main nozzle and the jet needle.

The fuel flow relates to the diameter of the straight portion of the jet needle with the throttle 1/8 to 1/4 open and relates to the clip position with the throttle 1/8 to 3/4 open.

Therefore, the fuel flow is balanced at each stage of throttle opening by the combination of the jet needle straight portion diameter and clip position.

Aiguille standard

WR426F: OBDRR *OBDQR WR400F: OBDRQ

Carburetor setting parts

WR426F

Part name Size	Part number
Main jet Rich(STD)Lean	#178	4MX-14943-93
	#175	4MX-14943-42
	#172	4MX-14943-92
	#170	4MX-14943-41
	#168	4MX-14943-91
	#165	4MX-14943-40
	#162	4MX-14943-90
	#160	4MX-14943-39
	#158	4MX-14943-89
	#155	4MX-14943-38
Pilot jet Rich(STD)Lean	#48	4MX-14948-06
	#45	4MX-14948-05
	#42	4MX-14948-04
	#40	4MX-14948-03
	#38	4MX-14948-02
Jet needle Rich(STD)Lean	#DRN	5GS-14916-RN
	#DRP	5GS-14916-RP
	#DRQ	5GS-14916-R1
	#DRR	5GS-14916-RR
	#DRS	5GS-14916-RS
	#DRT	5GS-14916-RT
	#DRU	5GS-14916-RU
Jet needle Rich*(STD)Lean	#DQN	5GS-14916-1N
	#DQP	5GS-14916-1P
	#DQQ	5GS-14916-11
	#DQR	5GS-14916-1R
	#DQS	5GS-14916-1S
	#DQT	5GS-14916-1T
	#DQU	5GS-14916-1U

* Except for USA

Examples of carburetor setting depending on symptom

Symptom Setting Checking
At full throttleHard breathingShearing noiseWhitish spark plug↓Lean mixture	Increase main jet calibration no.(Gradually)	Discoloration of spark plug →If tan color, it is in good condition.If cannot be corrected:Clogged float valve seatClogged fuel hoseClogged fuel cockCheck that the accelerator pump operates smoothly.
At full throttleSpeed pick-up stopsSlow speed pick-upSlow responseSooty spark plug↓Rich mixture	Decrease main jet calibration no.(Gradually)	Discoloration of spark plug →If tan color, it is in good condition.If cannot be corrected:Clogged air cleanerFuel overflow from carburetor
Lean mixture Lower jet needle	clip position.(1 groove down)	Leaner↑(Standard)↓RicherThe clip position is the jet needle groove on which the clip is installed.The positions are numbered from the top.Check that the accelerator pump operates smoothly (except for rich mixture symptom).
Rich mixture Raise jet needle	clip position.(1 groove up)
1/4 ~ 3/4 throttleHard breathingLack of speed	Lower jet needle clip position.(1 groove down)
1/4 ~ 1/2 throttleSlow speed pick-upPoor acceleration	Raise jet needle clip position.(1 groove up)
Closed to 1/4 throttleHard breathingSpeed down	Use jet needle with a smaller diameter.	Slow-speed-circuit passageClogged → Clean.Overflow from carburetor
Closed to 1/4 throttlePoor acceleration	Use jet needle with a larger diameter.Raise jet needle clip position. (1 groove up)
Poor response in the low to intermediate speeds	Raise jet needle clip position.If this has no effect, lower the jet needle clip position.
Poor response when throttle is opened quickly	Check overall settings.Use main jet with a lower calibration no.Raise jet needle clip position.(1 groove up)If these have no effect, use a main jet with a higher calibration no. and lower the jet needle clip position.	Check air cleaner for fouling.Check that the accelerator pump operates smoothly.

* This should be taken simply for an example. It is necessary to set the carburetor while checking the operating conditions of the engine.

Selection of the secondary reduction ratio (Sprocket)

Secondary reduction ratio = of driven sprocket teethNumber of drive sprocket teeth

Standard secondary reduction ratio

50/14 (3.571)

• It is generally said that the secondary gear ratio should be reduced for a longer straight portion of a speed course and should be increased for a course with many corners. Actually, however, as the speed depends on the ground condition of the day of the race, be sure to run through the circuit to set the machine suitable for the entire course.
• In actuality, it is very difficult to achieve settings suitable for the entire course and some settings may be sacrificed. Thus, the settings should be matched to the portion of the course that has the greatest effect on the race result. In such a case, run through the entire course while making notes of lap times to find the best balance; then, determine the secondary reduction ratio.
• If a course has a long straight portion where a machine can run at maximum speed, the machine is generally set such that it can develop its maximum revolutions toward the end of the straight line, with care taken to avoid the engine over-revving.

NOTE:

Riding technique varies from rider to rider and the performance of a machine also vary from machine to machine. Therefore, do not imitate other rider's settings from the beginning but choose your own setting according to the level of your riding technique.

PARTIE CYCLE

Technical diagram showing gear and chain components with labeled parts ① and ②

EC72N000

Drive and driven sprockets setting parts

Part name Size	Part number
Drive sprocket 1(STD)	14T*15T	9383E-142159383E-15082
Driven sprocket 2(STD)	48T50T52T	5GS-25448-505GS-25450-505GS-25452-50

* For AUS and NZ (WR426F)

EC721002

Tire pressure

Tire pressure should be adjust to suit the road surface condition of the circuit.

Standard tire pressure: 100 kPa (1.0 kg/cm ^2 , 15 psi)

• Under a rainy, muddy, sandy, or slippery condition, the tire pressure should be lower for a larger area of contact with the road surface.

Extent of adjustment: 60 \~ 80 kPa (0.6 \~ 0.8 kg/cm², 9.0 \~ 12 psi)

- Under a stony or hard road condition, the tire pressure should be higher to prevent a flat tire.

Extent of adjustment: 100 \~ 120 kPa (1.0 \~ 1.2 kg/cm², 15 \~ 18 psi)

(1,0 kg/cm², 15 psi)

(1,0 kg/cm², 15 psi)

The front fork setting should be made depending on the rider's feeling of an actual run and the circuit conditions.

The front fork setting includes the following three factors:

1. Setting of air spring characteristics

• Change the fork oil level.

1. Setting of spring preload

- Change the spring.

• Install the adjustment washer.

1. Setting of damping force

2. Change the compression damping.

3. Change the rebound damping.

The spring acts on the load and the damping force acts on the cushion travel speed.

EC723001

Change in level and characteristics of fork oil

Damping characteristic near the final stroke can be changed by changing the fork oil amount.

CAUTION:

Adjust the oil level in 5 mm (0.2 in) increments or decrements. Too low oil level causes the front fork to produce a noise at full rebound or the rider to feel some pressure on his hands or body. Alternatively, too high oil level will develop unexpectedly early oil lock with the consequent shorter front fork travel and deteriorated performance an characteristics. Therefore, adjust the front fork within the specified range.

Standard oil level:

135 mm (5.31 in)

*125 mm (4.92 in)

Extent of adjustment:

80 \~ 150 mm (3.15 \~ 5.91 in)

From top of outer tube with inner tube and damper rod fully compressed without spring.

* For EUROPE
A Air spring characteristics in relation to oil level change
B Load
C Stroke
① Max. oil level
② Standard oil level
③ Min. oil level

A [kg (lb)] ① ② ③

EC727020

Spring preload adjustment

The spring preload is adjusted by installing the adjustment washer ① between the fork spring ② and damper rod ③.

CAUTION:

Do not install three or more adjustment washers for each front fork.

WARNING

Always adjust each front fork to the same setting. Uneven adjustment can cause poor handling and loss of stability.

Standard washer quantity: Zero adjustment washers Extent of adjustment: Zero \~ 2 adjustment washers

A Load
B Fork stroke
① Without adjustment washer (standard)
② 1 adjustment washer
③ 2 adjustment washers

EC72A001

Setting of spring after replacement

As the front fork setting can be easily affected by rear suspension, take care so that the machine front and rear are balanced (in position, etc.) when setting the front fork.

1. Use of soft spring

Generally a soft spring gives a soft riding feeling. Rebound damping tends to become stronger and the front fork may sink deeply over a series of gaps.

To set a soft spring:

• Change the rebound damping. Turn out one or two clicks.
• Change the compression damping. Turn in one or two clicks.

2. Use of stiff spring

Generally a stiff spring gives a stiff riding feeling. Rebound damping tends to become weaker, resulting in lack of a sense of contact with the road surface or in a vibrating handlebar.

To set a stiff spring:

- Change the rebound damping.

Turn in one or two clicks.

- Change the compression damping.

Turn out one or two clicks.

graph TD
    A["Group ①"] --> B["Group ②"]
    B --> C["Group ③"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#bbf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#dfd,stroke:#333

A Coverage of spring by weight
B Rider weight
① Soft
② Standard
③ Stiff

2. Ressort dur

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts and exploded view, including disassembled components and numbered callouts.

EC72P000

Front fork setting parts

- Adjustment washer ①

TYPE (thickness)	PART NUMBER
T = 2.3 mm (0.09 in)	4SS-23364-L0

- Front fork spring ②

[Equal pitch spring]

TYPE	SPRING RATE	SPRING PART NUMBER	I.D. MARK (slits)
SOFT	0.380	4SS-23141-10	I-I
	0.390	4SS-23141-20	I-II
	0.400	4SS-23141-30	I-III
	0.410	4SS-23141-40	I
*STD 0.420 4SR-23141-L0 -
	0.430	4SS-23141-60	III
	0.440	4SS-23141-70	III
	0.450	5BE-23141-L0	-
STD 0.460 5GR-23141-L0 -
STIFF 0.470 5GR-23141-00 II-II

* For EUROPE

[Unequal pitch spring]

TYPE	SPRING RATE (approx.)	SPRING PART NUMBER	I.D. MARK (slits)
SOFT	0.400	5ET-23141-20	V
	0.410	5ET-23141-00	V-I
	0.420	5ET-23141-30	V-II
	0.430	5ET-23141-10	V-III
STIFF	0.440	5ET-23141-40	V-III

NOTE:

• The unequal pitch spring is softer in initial characteristic than the equal pitch spring and is difficult to bottom out under full compression.
• The I.D. mark (slits) ⓐ is proved on the end of the spring.

Rear suspension setting

The rear suspension setting should be made depending on the rider's feeling of an actual run and the circuit conditions.

The rear suspension setting includes the following two factors:

1. Setting of spring preload

- Change the set length of the spring.

- Change the spring.

1. Setting of damping force

• Change the rebound damping.

- Change the compression damping.

a H 11 5

Technical diagram of a bicycle's front wheel assembly with labeled dimensions and component labels

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled parts ① and ②, likely illustrating a valve or spring mechanism.

EC72C001

Choosing set length

1. Place a stand or block under the engine to put the rear wheel above the floor, and measure the length ⓐ between the rear wheel axle center and the rear fender holding bolt.

2. Remove the stand or block from the engine and with a rider astride the seat, measure the sunken length ⑥ between the rear wheel axle center and the rear fender holding bolt.

3. Loosen the locknut ① and make adjustment by turning the spring adjuster ② to achieve the standard figure from the subtraction of the length ⑥ from the length ⑧.

Standard figure: 90 \~ 100 mm (3.5 \~ 3.9 in)

• If the machine is new and after it is broken in, the same set length of the spring may change because of the initial fatigue, etc. of the spring. Therefore, be sure to make re-evaluation.
• If the standard figure cannot be achieved by adjusting the spring adjuster and changing the spring set length, replace the spring with an optional one and make re-adjustment.

EC72G001

Setting of spring after replacement

After replacement, be sure to adjust the spring to the set length and [sunken length 90 \~ 100 mm (3.5 \~ 3.9 in)] set it.

1. Use of soft spring

- Set the soft spring for less rebound damping to compensate for its less spring load. Run with the rebound damping adjuster one or two clicks on the softer side and readjust it to suit your preference.

1. Use of stiff spring

- Set the soft spring for more rebound damping to compensate for its greater spring load. Run with the rebound damping adjuster one or two clicks on the stiffer side and readjust it to suit your preference.

* Adjusting the rebound damping will be followed more or less by a change in the compression damping. For correction, turn the low compression damping adjuster on the softer side.

N.B.:

Technical line drawing of a mechanical spring assembly with dimension label (a), no readable text or symbols present.

graph TD
    A["Group ①"] --> B["Group ②"]
    B --> C["Group ③"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#bbf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#dfd,stroke:#333

CAUTION:

When using a rear cushion other than currently installed, use the one whose overall length ⓐ does not exceed the standard as it may result in faulty performance. Never use one whose overall length is greater than standard.

Length ⓐ of standard shock: 485.5 mm (19.11 in)

A Coverage of spring by weight
B Rider weight
① Soft
② Standard
③ Stiff

ATTENTION:

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts, showing a spring and housing assembly.

EC72Q000

Rear shock absorber setting parts

• Rear shock spring ①

[Equal pitch spring]

TYPE	SPRING RATE	SPRING PART NUMBER	I.D. COLOR/ POINT	SPRING FREE LENGTH
SOFT	4.4	5DH-22212-70	Brown/1	260
	4.6	5DH-22212-10	Green/1	260
*STD	4.8 5DH-22212-20 Red/1		260
STD	5.0 5DH-22212-30 Black/1		260
STIFF	5.2	5DH-22212-40	Blue/1	260
	5.4	5DH-22212-50	Yellow/1	265
	5.6	5DH-22212-60	Pink/1	265

* For EUROPE

[Unequal pitch spring]

TYPE	SPRING RATE (approx.)	SPRING PART NUMBER	I.D. COLOR/ POINT	SPRING FREE LENGTH
SOFT	4.6	5ET-22212-20	Green/2	275
	4.8	5ET-22212-00	Red/2	275
	5.0	5ET-22212-10	Black/2	275
	5.2	5ET-22212-30	Blue/2	275
	5.4	5ET-22212-40	Yellow/2	275
STIFF	5.6	5ET-22212-50	Pink/2	280

NOTE:

• The unequal pitch spring is softer in initial characteristic than the equal pitch spring and is difficult to bottom out under full compression.
• The I.D. color ⓐ is marked at the end of the spring.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical spring assembly with dimension lines (no text or symbols)

• Extent of adjustment (spring length)

SPRING FREE LENGTH	EXTENT OF ADJUSTMENT 6
260 mm (10.24 in)	240.5 ~ 258.5 mm(9.47 ~ 10.18 in)
265 mm (10.43 in)	245.5 ~ 263.5 mm(9.49 ~ 10.37 in)
275 mm (10.83 in)	255.5 ~ 273.5 mm(10.06 ~ 10.77 in)
280 mm (11.02 in)	260.5 ~ 278.5 mm(10.26 ~ 10.96 in)

• If any of the following symptoms is experienced with the standard position as the base, make resetting by reference to the adjustment procedure given in the same chart.
• Before any change, set the rear shock absorber sunken length to the standard figure 90 \~ 100 mm (3.5 \~ 3.9 in).

Symptom	Section				Check Adjust
	Jump	Large gap	Medium gap	Small gap
Stiff over entire range	○	○	○		Compression dampingOil level (oil amount)Spring	Turn adjuster counterclockwise (about 2 clicks) to decrease damping.Decrease oil level by about 5 ~ 10 mm (0.2 ~ 0.4 in).Replace with soft spring.
Unsmooth movement over entire range	○	○	○	○	Outer tubeInner tubeUnder bracket tightening torque	Check for any bends, dents, and other noticeable scars, etc. If any, replace affected parts.Retighten to specified torque.
Poor initial movement				○	Rebound dampingOil seal	Turn adjuster counterclockwise (about 2 clicks) to decrease damping.Apply grease in oil seal wall.
Soft over entire range, bottoming out	○	○			Compression dampingOil level (oil amount)Spring	Turn adjuster clockwise (about 2 clicks) to increase damping.Increase oil level by about 5 ~ 10 mm (0.2 ~ 0.4 in).Replace with stiff spring.
Stiff toward stroke end	○				Oil level (oil amount) Decrease oil level by about 5 mm (0.2 in).
Soft toward stroke end, bottoming out	○				Oil level (oil amount) Increase oil level by about 5 mm (0.2 in).
Stiff initial movement	○	○	○	○	Compression damping	Turn adjuster counterclockwise (about 2 clicks) to decrease damping.
Low front, tending to lower front posture			○	○	Compression dampingRebound dampingBalance with rear endOil level (oil amount)	Turn adjuster clockwise (about 2 clicks) to increase damping.Turn adjuster counterclockwise (about 2 clicks) to decrease damping.Set sunken length for 95 ~ 100 mm (3.7 ~ 3.9 in) when one passenger is astride seat (lower rear posture).Increase oil level by about 5 mm (0.2 in).
"Obtrusive" front, tending to upper front posture			○	○	Compression dampingBalance with rear endSpringOil lever (oil amount)	Turn adjuster counterclockwise (about 2 clicks) to decrease damping.Set sunken length for 90 ~ 95 mm (3.5 ~ 3.7 in) when one passenger is astride seat (upper rear posture).Replace with soft spring.Decrease oil level by about 5 ~ 10 mm (0.2 ~ 0.4 in).

• Rear shock absorber

NOTE:

• If any of the following symptoms is experienced with the standard position as the base, make resetting by reference to the adjustment procedure given in the same chart.
• Adjust the rebound damping in 2-click increments or decrements.
• Adjust the low compression damping in 1-click increments or decrements.
• Adjust the high compression damping in 1/6 turn increments or decrements.

Symptom	Section				Check Adjust
	Jump	Large gap	Medium gap	Small gap
Stiff, tending to sink			○	○	Rebound dampingSpring set length	Turn adjuster counterclockwise (about 2 clicks) to decrease damping.Set sunken length for 90 ~ 100 mm (3.5 ~ 3.9 in) when one passenger is astride seat.
Spongy and unstable			○	○	Rebound dampingLow compression dampingSpring	Turn adjuster clockwise (about 2 clicks) to increase damping.Turn adjuster clockwise (about 1 clicks) to increase damping.Replace with stiff spring.
Heavy and dragging			○	○	Rebound dampingSpring	Turn adjuster counterclockwise (about 2 clicks) to decrease damping.Replace with soft spring.
Poor road gripping				○	Rebound dampingLow compression dampingHigh compression dampingSpring set lengthSpring	Turn adjuster counterclockwise (about 2 clicks) to decrease damping.Turn adjuster clockwise (about 1 clicks) to increase damping.Turn adjuster clockwise (about 1/6 clicks) to increase damping.Set sunken length for 90 ~ 100 mm (3.5 ~ 3.9 in) when one passenger is astride seat.Replace with soft spring.
Bottoming out	○	○			High compression dampingSpring set lengthSpring	Turn adjuster clockwise (about 1/6 turn) to increase damping.Set sunken length for 90 ~ 100 mm (3.5 ~ 3.9 in) when one passenger in astride seat.Replace with stiff spring.
Bouncing	○	○			Rebound dampingSpring	Turn adjuster clockwise (about 2 clicks) to increase damping.Replace with soft spring.
Stiff travel	○	○			High compression dampingSpring set lengthSpring	Turn adjuster counterclockwise (about 1/6 turn) to decrease damping.Set sunken length for 95 ~ 100 mm (3.7 ~ 3.9 in) when one passenger is astride seat.Replace with soft spring.